JP2018130463A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve interest of a game.SOLUTION: When operation means that can be operated by a player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by signal output means and discriminated by discrimination means. A prescribed operation performance mode is executed by operation performance execution means on the basis of a discrimination result by the discrimination means. During a period in which the operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means, the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means is determined by determination means. In a case where a second operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means within a period in which a predetermined condition after the execution of a first operation performance mode is satisfied, the second operation performance mode is switched to a specific operation performance mode and executed by execution control means on the basis of a determination result of the determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 242

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is one that can execute effects corresponding to a plurality of button operations as operation effects using operation buttons (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-180364 A

  However, in the pachinko machine described above, further improvement of interest has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to improve the interest of games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation means operable by a player, a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, A determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, an operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect aspect based on a determination result by the determination means, and the operation effect execution means by the operation effect execution means. The determination means for determining the determination result determined by the determination means during the period being executed, and the operation effect execution means within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed. When the second operation effect mode is executed, based on the determination result by the determination means, the second operation effect mode is switched to a specific operation effect mode and executed. Those having a means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the determination unit at least determines the determination result determined by the determination unit during a period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. 1 determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result, and when the execution control means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, As a specific operation effect mode, an operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the determination unit determines that the operation of the operation unit is performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution The control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as the specific operation effect mode.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the operation number measuring means measures the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. Frequency determination means for determining the number of times measured by the operation frequency measurement means, the determination means based on the determination result of the frequency determination means, the first determination result and the first determination result A third determination result different from is determined.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the determination unit determines that the determination result of the number determination unit is greater than a predetermined number, and the first determination result is Judgment.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and is determined by the determination means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect executing means, the determination result determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution unit within a period in which the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control unit sets the determination result by the determination unit. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to the specific operation effect mode and executed.

  Accordingly, when the second operation effect mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed. Since the second operation effect mode can be switched to a specific operation effect mode and executed based on the content of operation performed on the operation means performed by the player, an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1. That is, during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit to be the first determination result and the second determination result different from the first determination result. . When the determination unit determines that the result is the first determination result, the operation control mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the specific operation effect mode by the execution control unit.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined in the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 2. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as the specific operation effect mode. It is done.

  Thereby, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect aspect, an operation effect aspect that causes the operation means to be operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect aspect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 3. That is, during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number of times the operation unit is operated is measured by the operation number measurement unit, and the number of times measured by the operation number measurement unit is determined by the number determination unit. . Then, based on the determination result of the number determination means, the determination means determines a first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result.

  Thereby, since the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode can be switched based on the number of times the operating means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect that can be done.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 4. That is, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination unit is greater than the predetermined number of times, the determination unit determines the first determination result.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the state which the player is operating the operation means eagerly can be continued.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper unit. It is a front view of an upper unit. It is a rear view of an upper unit. It is a front view of a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower unit. It is a front view of a lower unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retreat rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the overhang rotation position. It is a partial expansion front schematic diagram of the drive arm at the time of rotating from a retracting rotation position to an overhanging rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising / lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotating member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in the 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in the 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of an raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in a 2nd state, (c ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the combined state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation | movement unit in the LIV-LIV line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is a slide unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is a slide unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of a transmission gear, (b) is a side view of a transmission gear. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear meshed, and (b) in the state where the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear was cancelled | released It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit front view. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of the main body base member meshed | engaged, (b) is a housing member displaced, and a lower part of a main body base member It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state by which the meshing | engagement of the side 1st rack gear and the transmission gear was cancelled | released. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of the base member meshed | engaged, (b) has released the meshing | engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of a base member. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which looked at. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the left slide member in the state before the switching plate was operated, and (b) was a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate was operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state after the switching plate was operated in front. is there. 84A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 84B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93 (b); FIG. 93C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97 (b); FIG. 97C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. (A) is a front view of the lifting unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is an operation unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state by which the drive body in 11th Embodiment was arrange | positioned in the 1st rotation position, (b) is the state in which the drive body was arrange | positioned in the 2nd rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the variable prize apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of the La-La cross section in a 1st control example, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a variable winning apparatus in a 1st control example FIG. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the variable winning device in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. . (A) is the figure which showed the area division of the display screen in case reach reach production is displayed, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the effect display mode of reach navigation production. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the effect display mode of reach navigation production. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main controller, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first per-random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a jackpot type in the first per-spec counter C2 and the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the navigation production | presentation selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st navigation production | presentation selection table typically, (c). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second navigation effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. It is a flowchart which shows the display jackpot related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows several command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is V performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows production command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is resident executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows an image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the time of the composite pressing effect in the 2nd control example being started, (b) is the time of reaching the effect setting timing D3b in the composite pressing effect in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a point in time when the timing pressing period Db1 is reached in the composite pressing effect in the second control example, and (b) is a timing pressing period Db1 in the composite pressing effect in the second control example. It is the figure which showed another example of the time of arrival. (A) is the figure which showed an example at the time of operating the frame button 22 during a timing pushing period in the composite pressing effect in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure in the composite pressing effect in a 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the time of reaching | attaining 2 continuous hitting periods Dc. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the continuous slot production performed in the 2nd control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the example of a display of the "normal mode" in a 2nd control example, (b) is the figure which showed the example of a display of the "Sugoroku mode" in a 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows the main display area Dm in a 2nd control example, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the effect display of a point effect in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic structure of RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down scenario table in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal pressing-down scenario in a 2nd control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of a long press-down scenario in the second control example, and (d) schematically shows the content of a composite press-down scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit character selection table typically, (c) is a detachment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the character selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the point selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the winning point selection table typically, (c) is a detachment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the point selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto depression effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the first slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st shortening slot effect performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 2nd shortening slot effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extension slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press presentation related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the pressing command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the length performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows a push command process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the auto press start command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 6 is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the auto press end command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the release command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the slot production command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pressing-down scenario table in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example, (b) is the model which showed the content of the 1st composite pressing-down scenario typically. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second combined pressing scenario. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of each effect performed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of each effect performed in each control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically each mode used for the point effect in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the example of a display of "normal mode A" in the 3rd control example, (b) is the figure which showed the example of a display of "Sugoroku mode" in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the example of a display of "normal mode" in the 3rd control example, (b) is the figure which showed the example of display of "bingo mode" in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the layer in which the character in a 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is a schematic example of the layer in which the point in a 3rd control example is displayed. (C) is the figure which showed typically the example which synthesize | combined the several layer in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the internal level selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the internal score selection table in a 3rd control example. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the frequency | count selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the number-of-times selection table in a 3rd control example. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-out selection table in the third control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the use score selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) showed the structure of the final display mode selection table in a 3rd control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the last 1st display mode selection table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the content of the last 2nd display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the last 3rd display mode selection table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the character display selection table in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display data table in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the transfer data table in the 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the drawing list | wrist in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect initial setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point effect aspect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the point effect relevant command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 6 is a flowchart showing point command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the indicator command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically another example of the layer in which the character in a 3rd control example is displayed, (b) is another example of the layer in which the point in a 3rd control example is displayed. (C) is the figure which showed typically the other example which synthesize | combined the several layer in the 3rd control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of reach navigation production performed in the 4th control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the effect display mode of reach navi effect in the 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example, (b) is the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd internal level selection table in a 4th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the effect scenario storage area in a 4th control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the effect scenario selection table in a 4th control example. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the modification 1 of a 4th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the modification 2 of a 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the modification 3 of the 4th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content displayed in the modification 3 of the 4th control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the continuous slot effect in a 5th control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing showing a flow of the display mode displayed in the slot effect in the fifth control example. It is a chart. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display mode memory | storage area in a 5th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the display mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows typically the content of the winning display mode selection table in a 5th control example. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the display mode selection table for a removal in the 5th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the stop mode selection table in a 5th control example, (b) shows typically the content of the stop mode selection table for winning in a 5th control example. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the stop mode selection table for detachment in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the first slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during normal slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 1st shortening slot effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd shortening slot effect middle process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during an extension slot effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. (A) And (b) is an example of the schematic diagram of the display mode of the back image in a 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the composite press effect performed in the 6th control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the background change operation mode of the composite pressing effect performed in the 6th control example. (A) is a timing chart which shows the flow of the composite pressing effect performed in the 6th control example. (B) is the schematic diagram which showed the button operation content and effect aspect performed in the composite pressing effect performed in the 6th control example. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the pressing effect 2 in the composite pressing effect performed in the 6th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the auto depression effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the press effect 2 in the composite press effect performed in the 6th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow in which the additional production in the 7th control example is set up. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a display of the additional effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example, (b) is the content of the 1st fluctuation pattern selection table in a 7th control example typically. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a second variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, (d) schematically shows the contents of the third variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table in a 7th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example, (b) showed the structure of the production counter in the 7th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (B) is a flowchart which shows the additional effect command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow in which the additional effect in the modification of a 7th control example is set. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change effect in the modification of a 7th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (C) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the background change effect in the modification of a 7th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of an additional effect. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 140a is in an opened state (open state), the first winning combination 140a is compared with a case where the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times 140a is opened. In addition, during the time of probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 140a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric combination 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time and increasing the opening time or the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is released per hit. When it is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric combination 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning port 140, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any prize opening 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 475, 476.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member 730, and the lifting member 820 are respectively in the retracted position. 8, the left slide member 430 is slid to the right slide member 450 side, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhang position from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 9 shows the state where the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging position from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a slide unit 400, an upper unit 500, a lower unit 600, The protruding unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are accommodated rotatably.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is rectangular in a front view disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion of the base member 410 that is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently moved in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. The effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410 is formed to be executable.

  In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to come into contact with each other. In this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are damaged when they are brought into contact with each other. Suppressing structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

  A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 is disposed in a lower part of the opening 301 a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 in a posture parallel to the base member 410, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Are slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. Thereby, it can suppress that the lower end side of each slide member 430,450 shakes in the front-back direction.

  The upper unit 500 includes a base member 510 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front side of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400 and an upper displacement member 530 that is displaceably disposed on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower unit 600 includes a base member 610 having a substantially L shape in front view disposed on the left side and lower side of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the lower base member 610. And a lower displacement member 640 disposed to be displaceable.

  The upper displacement member 530 is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301 a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When projecting to the projecting position, the side surfaces (the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643) of both the displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with (combined with) each other.

  In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other are brought into contact with each other, an impact is generated and the posture may be unstable, such as rebounding from each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of contact is employed. Details of this structure will be described later.

  The protruding unit 700 has a horizontally long base member 710 disposed in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a lifting member disposed on the base member 710 so as to be movable up and down. A base 720 and a rotary member 730 rotatably disposed on the lift base 720. The lift base 720, together with the rotary member 730, is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so as to be able to be displaced (lifted / lowered) between an overhanging position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a.

  The projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that can be moved into and out of the rotating member 730 (sliding displacement), a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed on the rotating member 730, the projecting member 735, And a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) for driving the swing member 732.

  The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by one drive motor 763. Therefore, the driving force necessary for driving the projecting member 735 and the driving force necessary for the swinging member 732 overlap with each other, so that the load increases and the durability of the drive motor 763 may be reduced. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is employed. This structure will be described later.

  The elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is rectangular in a front view disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, and an elevating member 820 that is disposed on the base member 810 so as to be movable up and down. The elevating member 820 is formed to be displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an overhanging position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slid with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

  FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (position farthest from the right slide member 450).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and a sliding bar disposed on the base member 410. Member 420, left slide member 430 and right slide member 450 slidably connected to slide rod member 420, and slide displacement of left slide member 430 and right slide member 450 along slide rod member 420 And a drive mechanism for making it happen.

  The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. A plate-like protruding plate portion 411 protrudes horizontally from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side of the base member 410, and the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420 is faced). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the lower side of the projecting plate portion 411, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

  The slide bar member 420 is a metal bar having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the slide holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Thus, both the slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. Note that both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

  The base-side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears that extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is engaged with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are connected to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, respectively. Transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is rectangular in a front view, a first pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear 432. Front-side rectangular second member 433 having side rack gear 433a, front-side rectangular longitudinal base member 434 hanging downward from the distal end side of second member 433, and rotatable to the front side of base member 434 Rotation member 435 disposed on the surface, displacement member 436 disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435, and transmission (sliding displacement) of base member 434 relative to base member 410 to transmission member 435. Gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

  The first member 431 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having a circular inner peripheral surface, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. The sliding rod member 420 can slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction). In other words, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431 a is a rack gear that meshes with a left drive gear 471 described later, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid along the slide bar member 420. The

  As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (the front side of the first member 431). Is provided with a cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in front view. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 along with the sliding displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

  The second member 433 is disposed (coupled) to the first member 431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the distal end side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. While being displaced, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the sliding rod member 420. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

  In this case, the second member 433 is provided with a second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second rack gear 433a is engaged with the first pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is performed). The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

  That is, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433. The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 431 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431. Can do.

  Note that a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both the slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be brought into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other, and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. The

  The right slide member 450 can be rotated to the front side of the base member 454, the rack member 451 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the base member 454 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. , A displacement member 456 disposed on the back side of the rotation member 455, and a movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to transmit the rotation member 455 to the rotation member 455. Transmission gears 457a to 457f.

  The rack member 451 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having a circular inner peripheral surface on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A rack gear 451 a is engraved on the top surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid along the sliding rod member 420.

  The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 that are rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 respectively engaged with the drive gears 471 and 472. The pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided with a left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected.

  The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are respectively meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). Therefore, the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are rotationally driven by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, and thereby via the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid independently.

  A cover member 416 is disposed in front of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. . Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

  Next, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a back side base member 434 a connected to the second member 433 and a front side disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434 a. The transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably supported (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular shape when viewed from the front.

  As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and are connected (intermeshed) in series. Then, one gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a as the head and the transmission gear 437f as the tail.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

  Therefore, by sliding the left slide member 430 (base member 434) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is It is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation member 435 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

  The rotation member 435 includes a rotation shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b that are coaxially provided from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that becomes a rotation shaft when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotation member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434 by rotating the transmission gear 437f.

  The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. The E-ring is fitted in a fitting groove that is recessed at the tip of the support shaft 435b, so that the displacement member 436 is prevented from coming off from the support shaft 435b.

  The displacement member 436 is a member disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435 so as to be displaceable, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a relief hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotation member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, and thereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 435.

  The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the escape hole 436b is the rotation member 435. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 435 (rotates about the shaft support hole 436a), the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made.

  In this case, the rotation member 435 is formed in a substantially long shape whose frontal shape is larger in the lengthwise direction than in the widthwise direction, and is located at the approximate center in the lengthwise and widthwise directions. The rotating shaft 435a is disposed in The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two parts at the center in the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b), the displacement member 436 is hidden on the back side of the rotation member 435 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Can do.

  In addition, since the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotation member 435 on the opposite side of the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 is provided. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (in a state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed at 435 is substantially coincident with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly protruded to the side of the rotation member 435), The center-of-gravity position of the structure described above can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 by the amount of protrusion of the displacement member 436. Thereby, the center of gravity position can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be performed smoothly.

  That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force is increased due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the structure described above with the displacement member 436 projecting to the side of the rotation member 435 is lowered downward in the gravitational direction at the start of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435). When the displacement member 436 is positioned on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the rotation due to the weight of the structure described above causes Rotation can be assisted. Thereby, the burden of the left drive motor 475 (refer FIG. 11) can be eased, and the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, the center of gravity of the structure in the state where the displacement member 436 projects to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435). If the displacement member 436 is located behind the rotating member 435, the displacement member 436 is concealed (rotated in the other direction) so that the center of gravity of the structure described above approaches (coincides with) the rotating shaft 435a. Thus, the load (see FIG. 11) of the left drive motor 475 can be suppressed from increasing. Thereby, the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be started smoothly.

  Further, the center of gravity of the structure in the state where the displacement member 436 projects to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435) is stopped. In the case of being located on the side to be rotated, it is possible to easily stop the rotation by the weight of the structure described above. Thereby, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (refer FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

  15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451, and a front side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal space) of member 454a and front-side base member 454b. The front-side base member 454b is provided with a shaft support hole 454b1 that is circular when viewed from the front.

  As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected (engaged) in series. Then, one gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a as the head and the transmission gear 457f as the tail.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotation member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

  Therefore, by sliding the right slide member 450 (base member 454) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The transmission is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation member 455 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

  The rotation member 455 includes a rotation shaft 455a and a support shaft 455b that are coaxially provided from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that becomes a rotation shaft when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as will be described later, when the transmission gear 457f is rotated, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

  The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. The E-ring is fitted in a fitting groove that is recessed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, thereby preventing the displacement member 456 from coming off from the support shaft 455b.

  The displacement member 456 is a member disposed on the back side of the rotating member 455 so as to be displaceable, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a relief hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotation member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, and thereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 455.

  The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the escape hole 456b is the width of the rotating member 455. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the escape hole 456b. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is engaged with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 455 around the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b). Can be made.

  In this case, the rotary member 455 is formed in a substantially long shape whose front view shape is larger in the length direction than in the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided at one end side in the length direction. A drive motor 461 is disposed on the other end side. Further, since the rotation member 455 is provided with the displacement member 456 on the opposite side of the drive motor 461 across the support shaft 455b, the structure of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are provided on the rotation member 455. The position of the center of gravity can be disposed at a position eccentric to the one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

  Therefore, at the start of slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By positioning on the side, the weight of the structure can be applied in the direction in which the structure itself is rotated. Thereby, the load of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement from the stopped state of the right slide member 450 can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the gravity center of the structure is set as a resistance by positioning the center of gravity of the structure on the side displaced upward in the gravity direction. By acting, it is possible to easily stop the rotation of the structure value. Thereby, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (refer FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped rapidly.

  Further, as will be described later, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), whereby the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). The center of gravity of the structure described above is positioned on the side that displaces upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exhibits a buffering effect due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and illustrate a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid. 17 and 18 show a state where the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in a state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from this state, the first member 431 moves rightward (see FIG. 11) with respect to the base member 410 by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a. 17 (a) is slid to the right and in the direction approaching the right slide member 450).

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are disposed facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, The first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431 by the action of the base side rack gear 412, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433 a, whereby the second member 433. Is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and is second with respect to the first member 431. The member 433 is partially overlapped (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 is further in the right direction with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 18), the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 at the maximum in the shortening direction as shown in FIG. 18A, and the base member 434 is moved to the right end (FIG. 18). (A) Right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the projecting position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above-described case from the state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid in the left direction with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 18 (a), the direction away from the right slide member 450). .

  Also in this case, as in the case described above, the operation of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. Thus, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is increased in speed than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and the first member 431 is compared with the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended more than the total length in the extended position).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B and the direction away from the right slide member 450). 17), as shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is moved to the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The leftmost position is the position farthest from the right slide member 450), that is, the projecting position.

  In the present embodiment, a detection portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431 and a detection sensor for detecting the detection is provided on the base member 410 (none of which is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the detected part of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is disposed at the retracted position, and is detected by the detection sensor. Is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 at the extended position is stopped, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position is cumulatively added. Is done. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position.

  Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) has a portion overlapping the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be enlarged and the production effect can be enhanced.

  However, if the movable range is overlapped as described above, it is caused by variation in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on variation and tolerance of part dimensions / assembly, or poor control (for example, Due to the occurrence of an error in the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slid to the extended position may come into contact with the right slide member 450 and may be damaged. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while securing the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

  That is, as described above, the second member 433 has the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. 433 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435) is visually recognized by the player. Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement can be ensured.

  On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 makes the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 contact the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of the contact can be weakened, and the damage of both can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is placed on standby (stopped) closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is displaced toward the extended position. In this case, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, and the right slide member 450 is pushed in the direction of the slide displacement by the left slide member 430, thereby performing an effect of sliding the two in an integrated state. be able to. Also in this case, the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to suppress the breakage of both of them.

  The right slide member 450 is disposed on the base member 410 so as to be slidable. The slide displacement direction of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430. That is, in the state where the right slide member 450 is disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). 18 (a) has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side, and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can slide is changed when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the left slide member 430. The direction in which the slide displacement is allowed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (retracted backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since the slide displacement directions of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450. The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exhibit a buffering action and to suppress the damage of both.

  Further, in this case, since the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 share the slide bar member 420, both slide displacement directions are made parallel, so that the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when the slide bar member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the slide bar member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different directions perpendicular to the slide displacement direction. Therefore, the space is increased and the size is increased. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since both slide members 430 and 450 serve as one slide bar member 420, space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved.

  As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (right side in FIG. 18A), and is not in contact with the left slide member 430. It can be arranged at a position where it comes into contact. That is, a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450 can be formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variation and control failure. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functioning as a stopper), when the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively low speed, the stop position can be easily matched with the target position. Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not contact the left slide member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of contact and reduce fatigue associated with contact. As a result, the lifetime of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

  Here, in order to increase the speed of the second member 433 relative to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 is provided with these members 431 and 433 separately, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a, and the number of parts and sliding parts increase, so that the weight and driving resistance increase. Therefore, the force required for driving the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

  In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when the slide displacement is started from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (initial speed when the slide displacement is started from the stop state) is slowed down, there is a possibility that the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement is hindered.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to contact the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18A). ) It is formed to be slidable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased, and the effect of the presentation accompanying the slide displacement can be improved.

  Further, the right slide member 450 contacts the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is slid in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A). Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

  That is, the right slide member 450 is brought into contact with the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is slower than the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and pushes back the first member 431. The time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) from the beginning (that is, after the stopped left slide member 430 starts to be pushed back, the speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450) Thus, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

  Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into a linear motion and slides the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the gear of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a) that converts the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion and slides the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in this embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

  In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474, and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a, so the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first-side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the sliding displacement direction when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. Means large amount.

  As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the slide displacement speed of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the production effect associated with the slide displacement.

  That is, since the gear ratio in the right slide member 450 is set to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force by which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430 is increased. Thus, it is possible to reliably assist the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

  On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased. The slide displacement speed of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect accompanying the slide displacement.

  If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased to increase the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (slower). That is, both the smooth operation of the initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase of the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are achieved. However, it was impossible in the past, and this is the first time that the right slide member 450 has adopted a structure in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back.

  Next, detailed configurations of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper uniting unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper uniting unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. FIG. 19 illustrates a state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combined unit 500 is connected to a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rear base 511 that is rectangular horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a front base 512 that is rectangular long when viewed from the front and is disposed (covered) on the front side of the back base 511. The rack member 520 is accommodated between the facing surfaces of 512 (internal space) so as to be slidable.

  The back surface base 511 includes a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member protruding to the front side. And a support shaft 511c inserted through the guide groove 522 of 520.

  The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

  The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted. When the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the guide hole 511b As the guide pin 532 is slid along the guide hole 511b, the posture (orientation) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed.

  The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521 that is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly. A guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 engraved along a direction parallel to the direction in which the guide groove 522 extends are formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

  A support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is changed to that of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the slide displacement direction of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connection hole 511a of the back surface base 511.

  The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that project from the front side. The connection shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connection hole 511 a of the back surface base 511, and the guide pin 532 is provided on the back surface base 511. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is slid along the guide hole 511b.

  A collar C1 having a larger diameter than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a larger diameter than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the distal ends of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532, respectively, and are prevented from coming off. . Further, the upper displacement member 530 has an upper contact portion 533 formed on the side surface thereof. The upper abutting portion 533 is a portion that abuts on the lower abutting portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (front end side). It is formed.

  The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, a drive motor 543 with a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542, Prepare. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid along the extending direction of the coupling hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

  Next, the operation of the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 are a front view and a rear view of the upper united unit 500, and a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 23A, in a state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position, the connection shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are connected to one end side of the connection hole 511a and the guide hole 511b (see FIG. 23, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in a horizontal posture and hidden on the back side of the base member 510.

  When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is displaced in the horizontal direction along the connecting hole 511a as the rack member 520 slides, and the guide pin 532 is guided in the guide hole 511b. 22 (b) and FIG. 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is inclined obliquely (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), as shown in FIGS. Is displaced. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

  When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in the horizontal direction while being further inclined obliquely (rotating about the connecting shaft 531), and FIG. 22 (c) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 23C, a vertical posture is formed with the tip side (upper contact portion 533) directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhang position (first position).

  Next, the lower unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. FIG. 23 illustrates a state where the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. A drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the distal end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connection arm 650 for connecting the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and a drive arm 630 are attached. An urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

  The base member 610 is formed as a substantially L-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a protruding base 611 protruding from the front at the lower end of the substantially L shape and a front protruding from the front at the upper end of the substantially L shape. The connecting shaft 612 is provided. The projecting base 611 is a part for disposing the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where the drive arm holding member 620 protrudes from the front of the base member 610 (raised to the front side), and extends along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610. Projected.

  The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 provided on the protruding base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 provided (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

  The drive arm holding member 620 has a back side of the back side holding member 621 disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding base 611 of the base member 610. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the retracted position is formed in such a space so as to be accommodated, so that the outer shape of the lower unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

  The drive arm 630 has a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a plurality of teeth engraved along the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

  The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 that project from the front side. The drive arm connection shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connection hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connection hole 651 of the connection arm 650. A cylindrical body having a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

  The lower displacement member 640 has a lower contact portion 643 formed on the side surface thereof. The lower abutting portion 643 is a portion that abuts on the upper abutting portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is based on an imaginary line that connects the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side away from the protruding direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

  The connection arm 650 includes connection holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side. The connection holes 651 and 652 include the connection arm connection shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably coupled to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement trajectory in the connection arm connection shaft 642 portion of the lower displacement member 640 is represented by the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined in a circular arc shape as a center.

  The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring. One of the leg portions extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg portion is engaged with the drive arm 630, so that the drive arm 630 is engaged. Is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to displace the displacement member. The 640 is biased in the rotation direction (right rotation in FIG. 27A) that displaces it from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the projecting direction can be performed smoothly.

  The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c disposed inside the drive arm holding member 620, a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a, and a drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622) disposed in front of the drive arm holding member 620. And a drive motor 672 provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 672 to the driving arm 630. By connecting (meshing) in series, the transmission gear 671a is the head and the transmission gear 671c is the tail. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  The rear transmission gear 671 c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. Thus, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c is applied to the gear portion 632, whereby the drive arm 630 is rotated.

  Next, the operation of the lower unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower unit 600, and shows a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 27A, the left rotation direction). It is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “retraction rotational position”), and is in a tilted posture in which it descends downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, shaft support hole 631) toward the distal end side (connection hole 633). The connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at a position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position (the position farthest from the overhang position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is the lowermost position. It is arranged at a position that is (the position farthest from the overhang position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27A).

  When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from this state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm coupling shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

  When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 further increases as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced rightward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the protruding position.

  In the overhang position, the drive arm 630 is located at a rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “the overhang rotation position”) that is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (c) clockwise direction). In the rotational position, the drive arm 630 is disposed at a position where the distal end side (connection hole 633) exceeds a vertical line passing through the proximal end side (rotation center, ie, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted up most. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27C), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the up-down direction, a position slightly lowered downward from the upper side of FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the displacement speed of the lower unit 600 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 at the retraction rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the overhang rotation position. FIGS. 29A to 29D are schematic partial enlarged front views of the drive arm 630 when the drive arm 630 is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhang rotation position.

  Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhanging rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, so that the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position at which the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction is referred to as a “horizontal rotation position” and rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position at which the drive arm 630 is in the standing posture (the posture in which the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a “vertical rotation position”. The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

  In this case, FIG. 29A corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29B shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. FIG. 29C corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29D shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. FIG. 29E corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

  Note that the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and thus the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it is assumed that the transient period from when the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation from the stop state is sufficiently small and that there is no transient response.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a), and 29 (b), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in a section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1). The connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is tilted to be positioned below the hole 631 and rotated from the retracted position toward the horizontal rotation position, so the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633). The speed component in the tangential direction in the displacement trajectory of (1) is gradually increased in the upward speed component (speed Vv), and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and the upward speed is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633. The tilting position is set above the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced further upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is upward. The speed component (speed Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed is gradually reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 29 (e), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3). The connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the driving arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position toward the vertical rotation position, so that the velocity V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

  Thus, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from rebounding from the upper displacement member 530, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d), in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is While the speed component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the speed V of the coupling hole 633 is the speed component Vh toward the right. Increased gradually.

  As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced in the vicinity of the connection hole 633 toward the left in the section between the retraction rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of the angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is reversed at the rotational position, and is displaced toward the right (in the direction toward the retracted position) in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position.

  That is, the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at the leftmost end (after the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is set to 0), and then the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be displaced horizontally in the accelerated state gradually. As a result, the operation of bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be revealed, and an effect can be provided in which a dynamic feeling is imparted to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section in which the horizontal speed component Vh is decreased (range of the angle θ1), the vertical speed component Vv is increased while the horizontal speed component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, so that the above-described operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player feels that the dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 is stronger. You can make an impression.

  On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines with) the upper displacement member 530, a section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, there is a possibility that the effect produced by the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased, so that the lower displacement member is replaced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement. 640 effects can be performed, and as a result, an effect can be ensured.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 includes the connecting arm 650 at a portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) that is spaced upward from the portion to which the driving arm 630 is connected (the driving arm connecting shaft 641). Since they are connected, the upper part of the lower displacement member 640 (in the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced toward the right along with the rotation about the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. . Therefore, as described above, when the operation of bending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is revealed, the operation of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The feeling of dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 can be further increased. In addition, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce the effect. Can be secured easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (union) operation at the extended position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper union unit 500 and the lower union unit 600 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

  As shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C, the upper displacement member 530 moves from the retracted position hidden on the back side of the base member 510 to the front end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper abutment portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where a vertical posture is formed with its tip side (upper abutment portion 533) directed downward. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost and the vertical position is the lowermost position as the drive motor 672 is driven. Arranged at the exit position.

  As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the overhang position are combined with the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 in contact with each other. Thereby, both can be integrated and a predetermined character can be formed. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's torso, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. Thus, a jumping horse character is formed at the retreat position.

  Here, when the upper displacement member 530 descending and the lower displacement member 640 ascending come into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are rebounded in a direction away from each other by the impact generated during the contact. Posture (ie character shape) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to form a single character by integrating these displacement members 530 and 640. Is bulky and extends, which impairs the effect of the production.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the speed toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is decreased when approaching the overhang position, the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 is brought into contact with the upper displacement member 530 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being bounced away from each other, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Further, the decrease in the velocity component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in a section (range of the angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, and therefore the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. The velocity component Vv heading upward can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form a single character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip of the drive arm 630 (connection hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (connection hole 633). ) Is drawn so as to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv, so that the downward movement of the speed component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced, and the drive state of the drive motor 672 is kept constant. As can be done. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the extended rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 contacts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 can be a negative value at the overhang position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of the angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the direction toward the lower side (the direction away from the upper displacement member 530). Can be an ingredient.

  As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released downward (retracted) from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it can suppress that both the displacement members 530 and 640 bounce in the direction spaced apart from each other, and those postures can be stabilized.

  Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 becomes a negative value. By adopting the configuration, even if a positional deviation occurs at the abutting (merging) position due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control variation in the driving mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530 Since the range in which the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to facilitate contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range where impact can be suppressed.

  Next, the protruding unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protruding unit 700. FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the lifting base 720, and shows a transition state when the lifting base 720 is lifted and lowered with respect to the base member 710.

  The protruding unit 700 is based on a base member 710, a lifting base 720 disposed on the base member 710 so as to be lifted and lowered, a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the lifting base 720, and the base member 710. A driving mechanism for raising and lowering the lifting base 720 and a driving mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 are mainly provided.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, a structure for raising and lowering the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 that is opened as a circular hole in front view substantially at the center in the width direction, a support shaft 712 that projects from the front, and a projecting from the back. Two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. .

  The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 positioned in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed between the rear base 721 and the lower end side of the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. 35). The back base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 with a predetermined distance corresponding to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and a rotating member 730 is provided between the opposing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably accommodated (arranged).

  One side in the width direction of the back surface base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extension / contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front surface of the base member 710, a front end rail disposed on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and a base rail between the base end rail and the front end rail. And an intermediate rail that can displace the proximal rail and the distal rail relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be raised and lowered along the vertical direction with respect to the base member 710 by extending and retracting the slide rail SL.

  The back surface base 721 of the elevating base 720 includes a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. A sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a, so that the lifting base 720 (rear base 721) is lifted and lowered. The

  The connecting arm 719 is projected from the front at the end of the base member 710 that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and the end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). ) And a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . A driving pin 771b of the driving arm 771 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the driven groove 719c. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is driven to rotate, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the shaft support hole 719a as a rotation center.

  A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 that rotatably supports the rotary shaft 771a in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotary shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The transmission gear 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and the drive shaft is connected to the leading transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and the drive disposed in front of the base member 710 And a motor 773.

  The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 773 to the driving arm 771, and are connected in series (engaged) so that the transmission gear 772a is the leading transmission gear 772d. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the lowest position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. The transmission is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 33 (a) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (FIG. 33 (a) clockwise) with the shaft support hole 719a as the rotation center, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (extension position) (FIG. 21 (c). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the uppermost position (the extended position) (see FIG. 21C), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the leading transmission gear. 772a is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (FIG. 33 (c) counterclockwise) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

  Next, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730. FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. Further, the rotation shaft 731 a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721 b of the back surface base 721, so that the rotation member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the opposing surfaces of the back surface base 721 and the front surface base 722.

  The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b disposed on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface with a central angle of about 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a meshes. Therefore, as described later, when the transmission gear 781a is rotated, the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the lifting base 720.

  The drive mechanism for rotating the rotary member 730 relative to the lifting base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the back surface base 721 and the intermediate base 723 in the lifting base 720, and the transmission gear 781b. When the drive shaft is connected, a drive motor 782 disposed on the front surface of the intermediate base 723 is provided.

  Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center in the circumferential direction of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 has the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 (the direction of protrusion or retraction when retracted) as the vertical direction. (Refer to FIG. 36 (b)).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is driven to rotate in the forward direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is centered on the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the positive direction (FIG. 36 (b) clockwise). As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36C) (see FIG. 36C).

  From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated. It rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 36 (c) counterclockwise) centering on 731a. As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotational position (see FIG. 36 (a)). .

  Next, a structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 is moved in and out of the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed in front of the rear base 731, the swinging member 732, and the rear base 731. An interposition member 733 interposed therebetween, a front base 734 disposed in front of the rear base 731, a projecting member 735 slidably disposed on the rear surface of the front base 734, and the front base And a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear base 731 and the rear base 731.

  The back base 731 is formed in a substantially circular container shape with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is omitted, and the bottom of the outer peripheral wall is removed from the bottom. A part of the wall protrudes upward. As described above, the back surface of the back base 731 is curved to be engaged with the rotary shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

  In addition, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and a tip of the operated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back surface base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e into which the slide pin 733b of the interposed member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

  The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft support hole 731c. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swinging member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swinging member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

  The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-like opening that extends in a straight line. The axis of the rotary shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extending direction, and a slide hole 734a of the front base 734, which will be described later. They are formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d is arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

  The oscillating member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an actuated shaft 732b formed as a cylindrical shaft body, and has a posture in which base ends on which the rotating shaft 732a and the actuated shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in a shaft supporting hole 731c of the back surface base 731, and the operated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the operating hole 733a of the interposed member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back surface base 731. Is done.

  The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotation shaft 732a from being detached, and the body portion of the collar C is formed between the rotation shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body of the collar C is connected to the actuated shaft 732d and the guide hole. 731d and the working hole 733a are slidably interposed.

  The interposed member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the back base 731 and the swinging member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the raising / lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposing member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, and the pair is oriented in a C shape when viewed from the front. They are arranged in line symmetry.

  As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip side. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding downward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swing member 732 The tip is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down.

  The slide pin 733 b is a cylindrical portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) protrude from the back surface of the interposed member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the symmetry line of the pair of working holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the interposition member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

  The sliding wall 733c is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the interposition member 733 as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733). A cam portion 761b of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is in contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). In response to the change (increase / decrease), the interposed member 733 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward). That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

  An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the elastic restoring force of the urging spring 791 is as follows. It acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the interposed member 733. That is, the descent (sliding downward) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (self-weight of the interposed member 733). Thereby, as will be described later, the swinging member 732 can be quickly swung (rotated) in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip is lowered).

  The front base 734 is a plate-like body that is circular when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the rear base 731. The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734 a is formed as a groove-like opening extending linearly, and is formed in parallel with the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731.

  The protruding member 735 is a long plate-like body disposed on the back side of the front base 734 so as to be slidable and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) protrude from the front of the protruding member 735. These are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735 with a predetermined interval therebetween. Therefore, the protruding member 735 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

  The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735, and a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted. The Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or pushed down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

  An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the protruding member 735 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic restoring force of the urging spring 792 is as follows. , Acting as an urging force in the direction of lowering the projecting member 735 (sliding downward).

  A driving mechanism for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 (sliding displacement and swinging) includes a driving body 761 rotatably disposed on the front surface of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. The transmission gear 762a to 762e to which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a, and the drive shaft is connected to the leading transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e and disposed on the back surface of the rear base 731. A drive motor 763;

  The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a part formed as a disc cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface. As described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is formed on the outer peripheral surface. The interposition member 733 is driven (slidably displaced) by sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733. Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761, and as described above, the sliding pin 761c protrudes by acting on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The member 735 is driven (slidingly displaced).

  The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the driving body 761, and are connected in series (engaged) so that the transmission gear 762a starts at the transmission gear 762e. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a), the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a meshes with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the interposing member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 has its tip side lowered downward by its own weight. Is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  Further, when the drive body 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the position of the slide pin 761c is raised. Accordingly, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lifted (sliding upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, when the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposed member 733 is raised, the operated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the interposed member 733, and the swinging member 733 is swung. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces the tip side upward.

  Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. Accordingly, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding downward).

  Next, the details of the structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the drive body 761 in a state arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the drive body 761 in a state arranged at the second rotation position. is there. In FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c of the interposed member 733 and the sliding of the protruding member 735 in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position or the second rotational position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) abutted against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously reduced from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  As described above, the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c (the lower surface in FIGS. 40A and 40B) is in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the interposition member 733), FIG. (A) and FIG. 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is changed from the top to the bottom when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the drive body 761 is continuously lowered from below to the first rotation position from the second rotation position, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top.

  The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side (right side of FIG. 40A) of the sliding hole 735b to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight line portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

  The curved portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is positioned on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, and thus the protruding member 735 is maintained in a state where it is stopped at the lowest position.

  The rotational position where the driving body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotational angle from the first rotational position (that is, the rotational position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) is referred to as “predetermined rotational position”. ".

  The straight line portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line shape along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the projecting member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotational position by the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2. When the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the uppermost position to the lowermost position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the bending portion 735b1).

  That is, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and then enters the linear portion 735b2 and ends (slids) the linear portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side (left side of FIG. 40 (a)) of the moving hole 735b, the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the bending portion 735b1, but the bending portion 735b1 It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

  41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, and a transition state when the projecting member 735 is slid and the swinging member 732 is swung is illustrated. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. 41A shows a state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 41B shows a state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the predetermined rotation position. FIG. 42B shows a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at a rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position, and FIG. 42B illustrates a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position. Is done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position, and the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position. Is done. When the driving body 761 is rotated from this state to the predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually decreased from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41B, the projecting member 735 has the sliding pin 761c passing through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted and is maintained in a stopped state at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

  When the driving body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 41B) is further rotated toward the second rotational position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b further increases as shown in FIG. By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. The

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to its lowermost position by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at its lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position as the linear portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

  Contrary to the case described above, when the driving body 761 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position), FIG. ), When the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40B), the interposed member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swinging member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid downward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. The

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42A to a predetermined rotational position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1, as shown in FIG. The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and accordingly, the operation of the swinging member 732 being rotated in the direction of raising the tip thereof is also continued. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position by the linear portion 735b2 being pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41B to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 41A, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter. As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the projecting member 735 is not transmitted with the driving force from the driving body 761, and is located at the lowest position (that is, FIG. At the same position)).

  As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the two members (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by one driving motor 763.

  Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by one drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is duplicated, so that the load on the drive motor increases and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one at a time), the load on the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation member 730, the first transmission means (the cam portion 761b and the interposition member 733) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. In the section (section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position), the load of the drive motor 763 is increased, and the section in which the tip of the swing member 732 is raised (the driving body 761 is moved from the second rotational position to the first position). It is possible to make the load smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section of the rotation position.

  On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the protruding member 735 is a section (sliding the driving body 761 in the second rotation) that slides the protruding member 735 downward. Drive in the section in which the projecting member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). The load of the motor 763 can be made smaller.

  That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means is a relatively high load, the second transmission means is a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means is a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means have a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Further, it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 alternately (one by one), and the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be in a state of being displaced together, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 763. While striving, it is possible to improve the production effect due to the displacement of both members 732 and 735.

  The first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means causes the protruding member 735 to be interlocked by the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. According to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c swing per unit displacement amount (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761). The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load on the drive motor 763.

  Further, it is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position) is gravity due to the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735. It is formed by giving a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, using the displacement due to the weight of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735. Therefore, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b can be suppressed from becoming complicated. Thereby, reduction of component cost can be aimed at. Further, since the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b are prevented from being complicated, the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily made constant. The burden can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are separately arranged. Therefore, a space for the rotation member 730 can be eliminated, and the rotating member 730 can be downsized accordingly. Further, compared to the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both the members 732 and 735 is increased. Can be increased.

  Here, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the driving motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load of the camera becomes large, the initial speed becomes slow, and there is a risk that the production effect is hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the projecting member 735 (sliding hole 735b) from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and accordingly, the rotation of the drive body 761 can be given momentum. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the tip is lowered downward (see FIGS. 41A and 41B). Therefore, when the swinging member 732 is swung while maintaining the protruding member 735 in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 necessary for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, since the momentum can be further increased in the rotation of the driving body 761, the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be started smoothly.

  In addition, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. By avoiding this, it is possible to improve the production effect due to the displacement.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the driving body 761. By applying momentum to the protrusion member 735, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

  In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the rotational driving of the driving body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the bending portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1, but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end portion on the connection side with the bending portion 735b1). Is positioned (see FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 42 (b)). Thereby, it can avoid that the load of the drive motor 763 becomes excessive.

  That is, when the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be made non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In the structure in which the part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a circular arc that protrudes toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the sliding displacement amount upward of the projecting member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 increases rapidly. The load of the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving motor 763.

  Next, the lifting unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

  First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the lifting unit 800 has a horizontally long base member 810 disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and the base member 810 is movable up and down. The lift member 820 to be driven, a drive motor 891 for applying a drive force to the lift member 820, a transmission gear 840 for transmitting the drive force of rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around the shaft support portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is slidably displaceable by displacement of the link member 850, and A transmission member 870 for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820 is mainly provided.

  The base member 810 includes sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 that are formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 that protrude in a columnar shape on the back side. And is mainly provided.

  Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole for restricting the sliding direction of the sliding member 860 by inserting sliding pins 861, 862, 863, which will be described later, into the inside thereof, and the direction of gravity (see FIG. 43 (b) is formed in a long hole shape that opens long in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably disposed along the longitudinal direction of the slide holes 811, 812, and 813.

  Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is formed side by side, a sliding hole 811 is formed at the center, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. . In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

  The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840, which will be described later, and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed to penetrate.

  The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 that is formed to penetrate one end of a link member 850, which will be described later, and rotatably supports the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a drive force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 through the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

  The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable to the pivot pins 814 to 816 that protrude to the back side of the base member 810. Is pivotally supported. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

  The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting a driving force to a link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude at a distance where the tip overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

  The link member 850 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that passes through in a circular shape at one end, a transmission-side sliding groove 854 that passes through the other end in a long hole shape substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, the through hole 851, and the transmission. The connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854 is mainly provided.

  As described above, the through-hole 851 is a through-hole through which the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. The pin 817 has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to fall off by the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 being inserted into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 being inserted from the back side and being fastened with screws or the like. Is done.

  An annular portion 852 that protrudes in an annular shape is formed on the front side (FIG. 43B, the back side of the paper surface) at the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850. The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protruding dimension is set larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

  In addition, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by overlapping a wire made of a metal material around a cylindrical spiral, and can apply a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state of being wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1 collapses, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is changed in the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the cylindrical spiral portion is a relatively large torsion spring SP1, the annular portion 852 can suppress the collapse of the spiral state and stabilize the urging direction.

  That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can do.

  One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 that protrudes in a hook shape from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 that protrudes in a hook shape from the back side of the base member 810. Engaged. Therefore, the shape of the torsion spring SP1 is elastically deformed by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and an urging force can be applied to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation shaft.

  The connecting side sliding groove 853 is a long hole into which the projection 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width of the inner peripheral surface in the short direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the projection 844a. Therefore, when the projection 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the projection 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connection side sliding groove 853. Accordingly, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

  The transmission-side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the sliding member 860 is inserted to displace the sliding member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the short direction thereof. However, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

  Further, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other with the base member 810 interposed therebetween by fastening the collar C3 with a screw or the like from the back side of the link member 850 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816. Therefore, the slide member 860 disposed on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 disposed on the back side of the base member 810.

  The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and the length dimension in the gravitational direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension of the base member 810 in the gravitational direction. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. Thereby, the external form of the whole raising / lowering unit 800 in front view can be made small.

  The slide member 860 includes a plurality of slide pins 861 to 863 that are formed to protrude in a columnar shape from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle that protrudes to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

  As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the sliding member 860, and are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin are inserted. The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back side of the base member 810 with a screw or the like.

  Therefore, the slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight long hole shape. The base member 810 is made non-rotatable and is slidably connected in the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, whereby the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813).

  The plurality of slide-side slide holes 864 to 866 are holes into which protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape that is long in the gravity direction, and have a width dimension in the short direction. The protrusions 871a to 871c are formed smaller than the outer diameter.

  The transmission member 870 is a member that is disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and is engaged with racks 872 that extend in the direction of gravity and that are paired with the target, and rack gears of the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 disposed between the pinion gears 873.

  The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. In addition, a pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and meshes with a pinion gear 873 described later.

  The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the gravitational direction, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the gravitational direction. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the slide member 860.

  The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a standing portion 871e that is bent and standing at the lower end, and rack gears 871d that are engraved on both sides in the left-right direction. A plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c protruding in a columnar shape are mainly provided on the back side.

  The standing portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the standing tip surface, and a connecting hole 871e1 for passing a screw through the tip portion and fastening with the elevating member 820 passes therethrough. It is formed. Therefore, the 2nd slide member 871 and the raising / lowering member 820 can be fastened.

  The standing portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and disposing a decoration member 830 described later in the gap, and the front-rear direction of the decoration member 830 The standing dimension is set to be larger than the thickness. Thereby, the decoration member 830 can be disposed between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

  The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the above-described pinion gear 873, and is engraved on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the second slide member 871 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

  As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. Thus, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of the slide side slide holes 864 to 866.

  Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and accordingly, the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides in the gravitational direction with respect to the slide member 860, so that the base member 810 can be displaced at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and the slide. The distance displaced from the member 860 can be increased. Accordingly, the size of the lifting unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the lifting member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 protruding to the back side.

  The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the standing portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the standing portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the inside of the connection hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the 2nd slide member 871 and the raising / lowering member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

  A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the transmission member 870 from being displaced to the front side, and thereby, the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decoration member 830.

  The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape simulating a title or logo of a gaming machine, and an LED that emits light is disposed on the back side. Thereby, light can be emitted from the title, logo, etc. to the player side to give the player interest.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, the movable state of the elevating unit 800 will be described.

  46 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 52A is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52B is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52C is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

  The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is positioned on the uppermost side and disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is an elevating member 820. It is a state located at the lowermost position and disposed below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810. The second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

  Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 placed at the end most distant from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the reference numeral KS3 is given. .

  As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52A, when the lifting unit 800 is positioned in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). However, it is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the upper end portion of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the lower end portion of the second slide member. In other words, the second slide member 871 is positioned above. Accordingly, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also located at the upper position.

  In the first state, the imaginary line KS1 that connects the shaft of the terminal gear 844 and the projection 844a of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850, and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 And the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position in the short direction of the connecting side sliding groove 853 is a position orthogonal (see FIG. 49).

  That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the terminal gear 844 of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, the link member 850 can be prevented from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

  When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and a rotational driving force is applied, as described above, the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 are rotated and Driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the projection 844a is displaced.

  When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 inserted and connected to the slide pin 861 in the transmission-side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 is slid. Thereby, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to the displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 47, 50, and 52 (b), in the lifting unit 800 in the second state, the link motor 850 is rotated and displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 when the drive motor 891 is rotated. It is assumed that Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810 from the first state.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is such that the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810 than in the second state.

  In this case, the elevating member 820 is disposed at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. Further, the elevating member 820 is adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830, so that the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, the pattern (character) which combined the raising / lowering member 820 and the decoration member 830 of the raising / lowering unit 800 can be displayed ahead of the game area by displacing the raising / lowering unit 800 from the first state to the third state. it can.

  Further, in the third state, the slide pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are positioned at the descending ends of the slide holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, the gear 844 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Next, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  53, the united state shown in FIG. 53 is that the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. This is a state where 820 is displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, each member (elevating base 720, rotating members 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (projection unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is brought close to each other to form one pattern ( The title can be visually recognized by the player as a gaming machine 10 title, logo, character, or the like.

  Each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape simulating an animal's wings, and the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are formed in a bow-shaped shape. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of a gaming machine.

  Further, as described above, the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, so that the elevating base 720, the rotating member 435, and the like in the combined state (overhanging state). 455, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, the elevating unit 800 not only combines the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830 to form one display surface, but also other movable units (the projecting unit 700 and the slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200. And a single display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by changing the displacement state of each movable unit (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the operation unit 200 in the combined state includes a lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 and a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54). It is arranged at the overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. In addition, the raising / lowering member 820 is arrange | positioned in the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each rotating member 435,455 (refer FIG. 54).

  In other words, the operation unit 200 includes a projecting unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are formed to be displaceable at a retracted position and a combined (extended) position. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the projection unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

  In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at different positions in the protruding position from the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members abut against each other in the overhang position, or when there is a possibility of abutting, the lifting member 820 needs to be set in consideration of the damage caused by the impact at the time of contact. And since it does not contact | abut with the rotation members 435 and 455, the displacement speed can be made comparatively quick. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent raising / lowering member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the first rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhang position, and a production effect is achieved when a pattern (character) is formed. Can be increased.

  In addition, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400. Accordingly, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, the rotating members 435 and 455 are moved to the projecting member 735. It can suppress contacting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

  Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) are movable and united in a space in the center of the gaming machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof There is a gaming machine that combines each other by colliding each other. However, when the side surfaces collide with each other, scratches are easily formed on the collision surface due to the collision. Therefore, there exists a problem that the designability of a movable unit tends to be impaired.

  Moreover, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to reduce the collision speed. However, since the displacement speed of the movable unit needs to be reduced, the speed of the combination operation of the accessory is reduced. It ’s going down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (the lifting unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. When displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and merged, the sides of each other do not collide. Therefore, it can suppress that a damage | wound is formed in a movable unit and it can suppress that the designability of a movable unit is impaired.

  Furthermore, since the side surfaces do not collide when the movable unit is displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and merged, the speed of displacement can be made constant when the merged is displaced. As a result, it can suppress that the speed | rate of combination operation | movement of an accessory falls, and can suppress that a player's interest is impaired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the lift unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the lift unit 800 has a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured in such a manner that the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). Therefore, the speed of the displacement operation can be improved as compared with the rack of the type (a configuration composed only of the rack and the pinion), and therefore each operation unit (the lifting unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700) can be improved by increasing the displacement speed. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time that the player can visually recognize the uniting operation. It is possible to prevent the player's interest is impaired.

  Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension increases and the size increases. If the longitudinal dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are reduced (thinned) in order to suppress such longitudinal dimensions, it is difficult to ensure the configuration.

  On the other hand, the elevating member 820 includes the second slide member 871 formed to extend to the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, so that the entire elevating member 820 (rotating member 820, rotating The size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 is reduced while suppressing the size in the front-rear direction as the total of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455), and the rigidity in the front-rear direction is increased by increasing the size in the front-rear direction. Can be secured.

  Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is disposed at a position protruding to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Arranged at overlapping positions. Thereby, the space on the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the front and rear direction (left and right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 are arranged by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53). , And the width that increases in the front-rear direction can be reduced (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 can be prevented from intersecting the displacement trajectory of the rotation of the rotation members 435 and 455. Collisions at the time of displacement can be suppressed (see phantom line KS3 in FIG. 51).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 to FIG. 58, a displacement state when each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) is displaced into the combined state will be described. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 55 to 58 sequentially illustrate the displacement state when each movable unit is displaced into the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of the rotational displacement, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 slidingly moving the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710. Thereby, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced upward. In addition, since the detailed description of the displacement of the raising / lowering base 720 is as above-mentioned, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

  The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operations of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the lifting member 720.

  As described above, as the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and displaced, the rotation members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotation members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. It is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle across (FIG. 57 center position in the left-right direction).

  Here, a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined position. There is a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are associated (integrated) with each other by being brought close to or in contact with each other so that the player can visually recognize the character as one character.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

  However, if the first member and the second member have a structure in which the first member and the second member are displaced to the combined (extension) position by linear displacement, respectively, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the first member and the second member are moved to the combined position. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements, so that it takes time and extends until the character is formed. The production effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is linearly displaced up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that it is disposed at the combined position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since 455 is rotationally displaced from the retracted position and disposed at the combined position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed on the lifting base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. This can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the lifting base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the lifting base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the lifting base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the lifting base 720. ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as the position is displaced.

  Thereby, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that turns around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the lifting base 720. Therefore, by rotating and displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is changed to a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that performs linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 are shifted, the mutual trajectories do not intersect with each other, so that the mutual interference of the members can be suppressed. As a result, since the displacement of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement trajectory that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720, so that the outer shape in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the lifting base 720 of the slide unit 700 that undergoes linear displacement Even if it is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the raising / lowering base 720 can be enlarged.

  As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed on the base members 434 and 454 that are slidable. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the combined (extension) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the combined position.

  That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (extension) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, so that the rotation is moved to the combined position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the protruding unit 700 instead of movement, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

  Here, when the rotational members 435 and 455 are merely rotationally displaced, the position of the rotational shaft is fixed, and therefore the rotational shaft of the rotational members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotational members 435 and 455. In this case, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, only the end portion opposite to the rotating shaft is rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set the displacement distance of the elevating base 720 large. Further, when the rotation shaft of the rotation members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotation members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotation member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotation member is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. It is difficult to arrange the rotating member at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation shafts are slidably displaced to the base members 434 and 454. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be combined with linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, by adding a linear displacement, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 while being rotated, The displacement distance can be set large.

  Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the posture at the retracted position of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the posture at the combined position. Can be defined independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced at the retracted position and the combined position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the protruding position. Since the rotary members 435 and 455 combine rotational displacement and linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount that can be linearly displaced. Therefore, the freedom degree of the attitude | position of the rotating members 435 and 455 in a retracted position can be raised.

  In other words, the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal directions parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracting space at the retracted position at the retracted position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are disposed outside). On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), it is rotated to be in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the freedom degree of the attitude | position of the rotating members 435 and 455 in a retracted position can be raised, and it can project by the center part of the game board 13 in a united position.

  Furthermore, since the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is arrange | positioned in the center part of the gaming machine 10 (motion unit 200) here, as the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is enlarged. The space on the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the combined (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully demonstrated. That is, the game area is formed vertically long, while the 3rd symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the 3rd symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed in a horizontally long posture at the combined (extended) position, while being disposed in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged correspondingly, and as a result, they are formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

  That is, the retreat space where the rotating members 435 and 455 retreat is reduced to secure the space of the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (the third symbol display device 81), and at the combined position, to the central portion of the gaming machine 10 Can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding unit 700 can be enlarged.

  Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are connected to the base members 434 and 454 so as to be capable of rotational displacement, and the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the protruding unit 700 in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size, and together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined (extension) position. Characters to be formed can be made larger. For example, even if it is a relatively narrow region where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing a member, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member 435 , 455 can be set in a large size while the retracting position of 455 is set.

  Further, the protruding unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swinging member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that it can be brought into contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 close to each other. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by contact with the swing member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 along with the displacement.

  Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700 and the lifting / lowering unit 800 are connected, the player can visually recognize the state in which the movable units are integrated (in a combined state) and can be provided with interest by the displacement of the accessory.

  Further, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward in accordance with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swinging member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

  Thereby, when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state, a displaceable space can be secured. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, the rotation members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) can be displaced further, and the variation of the displacement state in the combined state of the operation unit 200 can be increased. .

  That is, when the raising / lowering base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 is exhibited. Can displace the swinging member 732 in the direction approaching the rotating member 730, and can use the space formed by the displacement as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be increased.

  Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining the operation units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when the members (rotating members 435 and 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, the rotary members 435 and 455 are shaped like a bow, and the rotary members 435 and 455 are operated using the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 described above. A state where the arrow is not pulled or a state where the arrow is released from the bow is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the center of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

  Next, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is shifted in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 59A and 59B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. FIG. FIGS. 59A and 59B show a transition state when the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other when the stop position of the left slide member 430 is shifted in the excess direction.

  59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotation member will be described. 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operation unit 200 is disposed symmetrically about the center position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are not properly controlled as shown in FIG. 59 (a) due to poor control, rattling of each member, or error in sensor mounting position. There is a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732 of the projecting unit 700 without being stopped at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with each other and the parts may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swing member 732 is disposed is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the lifting base 720, and therefore, as shown in FIG. As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720, it is possible to mitigate an impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it can suppress that the rocking | swiveling member 732 and each rotating member 435,455 are damaged.

  That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 rotates with respect to the lifting base 720, thereby not only increasing the variation of the displacement state of the protrusion unit 700 but also causing the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 to collide. Damage can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59B, when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the lifting base 720, The swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 disposed in a pair rotate to contact the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

  Therefore, after the rotating member 730 is rotated to mitigate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force that the rotating member 435 further rotates is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the rotating member 730 from being further rotated.

  That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) contacts the swing member 732 in one set, With the contact, the swinging member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435) in the other set. For example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) is When it is displaced beyond the reference position and is brought into contact with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435) in the other set along with the contact. Can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), whereby the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the one set. The impact can be received not only by the swing member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Thereby, kinetic energy can be disperse | distributed, and it can make it easy to stop the displacement of the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) in one group, and can suppress the failure | damage of each member.

  Further, in this case, the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435). When contacting the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), so the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435). ), The rotation of the rotating member 730 can be restricted. Therefore, since it is not necessary to supply electric power for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 730, the driving energy can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60A and 60B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. FIG. FIGS. 60A and 60B show a transition state when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 because the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted.

  Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotary members 435 and 455 are collided. There was a risk of damage.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward by performing the third operation described above at the end timing of the second operation (end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732, the swing member 732 can be displaced downward to mitigate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swinging member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

  Further, in this case, since the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for causing the protruding member 735 to protrude, the drive motor 763 for driving the protruding member 735 can be used. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 through the sliding wall 733c, so that the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load of the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

  The third operation may be performed after a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with the rotary members 435 and 455, the drive for displacing the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is performed. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 can easily stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacing the swing member 732.

  Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotational direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435, 455 in the third operation will be described. 61A and 61B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 in the third operation. FIG. 61B shows a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation are displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation causes the rotation member 730 to move when the third operation is displaced. The swing member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61 (a)) along with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than in the second operation.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the base members 434, 454 of the left and right slide members 430, 450 are further slid to the center of the gaming machine 10, thereby rotating the rotating members 435, 455, It can be displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, a sense of unity can be further provided in the united (extended) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the second united state of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 62 to 64 illustrate transition states in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 protrudes to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the operating unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operating unit 200 in the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operating unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are illustrated respectively.

  Furthermore, each member (rotating members 435 and 455) and elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. ) And the lifting / lowering member 820) in the combined (extended) position will be described below as a first combined state. In the first combined state, the movable units of the first movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800) are associated (integrated) with one pattern as the first effect mode. The player can be recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in a state where the operation unit 200 is disposed at the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A), and the upper unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22A ), The lower unit 600 is placed in the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 27A). 62, the base unit 434 of the slide unit 400 is first slid to the center of the game board 13 from the state shown in FIG. 62, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 is moved. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by the downward displacement and the downward displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper combined unit 500 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower combined unit 600 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27C, the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

  In the second combined state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600) are associated (integrated) with one pattern as the second effect mode. The player can be recognized. Note that the pattern (character) formed in the second rendering mode is, for example, a pattern (character) simulating Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on a horse's body). In this case, the part that forms the body part of the Pegasus is the lower unit 600, the part that forms the Pegasus head is the upper unit 500, and the part that forms the Pegasus wing is the slide unit 400.

  In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434 disposed so as to be slidable is displaced to the extended position of the slide end position (position shown in FIG. 18A). That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged with different distances for sliding displacement from the retracted position. Moreover, since the rotation member 435 is connected with the base member 434, the position where the rotation member 435 is arrange | positioned can be varied by a 1st union state and a 2nd union state.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently by the amount of slide displacement. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged in a posture that differs by about 180 degrees around the rotation axis in the first combined state and the second combined state.

  As described above, the operation unit 200 is a tension member for each of the operation units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) (the rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 720 (the rotating member 730), and the elevating member 820). Due to the displacement to the exit position, the members can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, the motion unit 200 only forms a single pattern (character) by combining the members with the central space of the motion unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) as the first effect mode. Instead, as the second effect mode, the members can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

  Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect and time. Can be made. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various entertainments and give interest.

  Here, the first movable unit group including a plurality of movable units formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (extended) position, and formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

  According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) with one pattern ( Character) as the first effect mode, while each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other. An effect of allowing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as the second effect mode (integrated) is performed. In other words, in the first production mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed at the extended position, so that the first A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group, and in the second gaming state, the first movable unit is retreated to the retreat position, while the second movable unit By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhang position, an effect of forming the second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

  However, when a plurality of characters (directions) are formed as in the conventional technique described above, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters is increased accordingly, and each movable unit is retracted. Since the area (space) to be kept is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to enlarge each character (direction mode).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined). Since one movable unit of the movable unit of the unit 500 and the lower unit 600) is also used, the movable unit necessary for forming a plurality of (first and second) production modes is accordingly provided. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a part of the pattern (character) that the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 makes the player visually recognize as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, a space is created in the retreat space at the inner edge of the back case 300 (a space other than the central space in the retracted state (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) shown in FIG. 62). The unit 400, the upper unit 500, the lower unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800) can be increased in size.

  Further, each member (rotating members 435 and 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit can be increased in size, so that the first The pattern (character) formed by the production mode and the second production mode can be enlarged.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 has a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. When the first effect mode and the second effect mode are arranged at the same position, both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are movable in common. It becomes easy for a player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, and the interest is hindered.

  Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first production mode and the second production mode using the members (rotating members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom decreases accordingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has a united (extension) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extension) arranged when forming the second effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the position where the rotation member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, a pattern (character) formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's interest is inhibited.

  In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extension positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The difference (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

  Here, when the rotating member 435 is disposed in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for players to see and hinders interest. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the 1st production | presentation aspect and the 2nd production | presentation aspect respectively using the rotation member 435 of the same attitude, the degree of freedom will correspondingly fall, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has a different posture between the posture when forming the first performance mode and the posture when forming the second performance mode. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the entertainment can be prevented from being inhibited. Moreover, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 has different positions in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and has different positions (rotation angles). It can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are combined, and the entertainment can be prevented from being inhibited.

  In other words, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode has a state in which either one of the positions or the postures arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. However, there is a possibility that the player can recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the mode and the second performance mode are different from each other in the arrangement position and the posture, the player knows that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first combined state and the second combined state. Can be difficult to see.

  In addition, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the base member 434 that is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are associated (integrated), and the player can be recognized as a predetermined pattern (character) as a whole.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotation member 435, the rotation member 345 can be formed in a larger size, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be increased in size. Can be For example, even if there is a relatively narrow area such as one side and the other side of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, it is difficult to secure a member arrangement space. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state 435.

  In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in a region where the striking rotation member 435 of the base member 434 overlaps in the front view at the retracted position. The dimension in the front-rear direction of the area where no is disposed can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second combined state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600. FIG. FIG. 67A is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper unit 500, and the lower unit 600 seen in the direction of the arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb. FIG. 68A is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper unit 500, and the lower unit 600 seen in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66A, and FIG. 68B is a diagram of FIG. 66B. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb.

  In addition, FIG. 65A to FIG. 66B sequentially show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second combined state. FIG. 65A shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65B shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66A shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. Each of the slide units 400 in the retracted state is illustrated.

  Also, the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65A to the first state shown in FIG. 65B is performed by sliding the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

  66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 at an intermediate position of displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. In the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. Is done. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

  Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are shown by chain lines for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the upper unit 500 has the upper displacement member 530 accommodated in the base member 510 in the retracted state (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position). The lower unit 600 is disposed at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotation member 435 and the base member 434 of the left slide member 430.

  As described above, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of the front side base member 434b disposed on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) disposed on the back side. A step portion 434b2 that is recessed toward the back side is formed on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

  The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600, and the lower side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is entirely on the back surface. The gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased by being recessed to the side.

  That is, since the lower side of the step 434b2 of the base member 434 is formed to be recessed on the back surface side, a gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower unit unit 600 is placed in the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

  In addition, since the thickness in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base member 434 is reduced, the gap between the facing member and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other when the base member 434 is slid and displaced in a first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) which will be described later.

  On the other hand, on the upper side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting drive to the rotating member 435 can be disposed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said.

  As described above, the base member 434 is in a state where the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected and hangs down so as to be slidable with respect to the base member 410, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. Since it is slidably inserted between facing the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the upper side of the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction). Since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, the base member 434 can be prevented from being deformed.

  Further, at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65A), the back side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, the lower unit 600 in the retracted state can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction.

  That is, in the lower unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the upper end portion is likely to fall down in the front-rear direction, and the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 In this state, the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position can be stabilized. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slid to the first state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65B and 67B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotation member 435 is rotationally displaced along with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, when the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount, the rotating member 435 is rotated so that the rotating member 435 and the lower unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower The united unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the lower base member 610 does not overlap in the front-rear direction inside a region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower unit 600. A portion of the lower displacement member 640 is disposed.

  As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed inside the region K2 where the upper end portion tends to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 collides with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435.

  In the first state, the base member 434 displaces the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 (rotational driving force) on the side away from the connecting shaft 531 (on the upper contact portion 533 side). It arrange | positions in the position which overlaps with 530 in the front-back direction. Thereby, when displacing to a 2nd state, it can suppress that the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 collides with the rotating shaft 435a which connects the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

  That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 and the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435 collide with each other. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 can be prevented from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a.

  Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the protruding position is started when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced, collision with the side surface of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only at one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 rotates downward and displaces as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slid to the center side with respect to the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side from the front surface of the base member 434. When the base member 434 collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530. Colliding with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 66 (a)). Therefore, the rotating member 435 that is rotationally displaced according to the slide displacement of the base member 434 is also rotationally displaced. Thereby, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower unit 600 unit side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased, and by rotating the rotating member 435, the vertical direction of the region K2 (FIG. 66 ( a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

  Thereby, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper member of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

  Moreover, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement from the first state to the second state is performed, the base member 434 can be placed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, and as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to suppress the upper contact portion 533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

  In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 434 when viewed from the front while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, and thus is displaced to a position where the second combined state is formed. In the meantime, the upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

  Furthermore, since the protruding position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned on the front side so that the player can easily see the upper member. By linking (integrating) the displacement member 530 and the rotation member 435, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. In addition, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed on the front side of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower unit 600 (left side in FIG. 68B).

  Thereby, the rotation member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

  Here, the rotation member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first production mode and the second production mode, and needs to form a plurality of stop states. The structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stop state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary. Therefore, when the rotation member 435 of the slide unit 400 contacts the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600. On the other hand, if the rotation member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper unit The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 in the united state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 has the movable units (the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, the lower uniting unit 600, and the projecting unit 700) in the first stage and the second stage. , The movable unit (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the elevating unit 800) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction and each movable unit in front view Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member, even when there is a variation in the stopped state (overhanging or posture) in the first production mode and the second production mode, the relationship with each movable member of each movable unit It is easy to maintain sex. That is, by overlapping partly in front view, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with each movable member of each movable unit, and the position in the front-rear direction can be reduced. By being different, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable members of the movable units caused by being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relevance of each movable unit to each movable member in the combined state.

  In the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are disposed in contact with each other, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front thereof. By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435, a pattern (character) formed in the second combined state can be easily recognized by the player.

  That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be in the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (projected) state are Since it can be integrated and made easy for the player to visually recognize, the pattern (character) formed in the second rendering mode can be easily recognized by the player.

  In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture). However, at the stop position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode, the upper displacement member In the structure in contact with 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position or posture of the rotation member 435 does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

  Similarly, even if the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause positional displacement, and thus association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other, if the rotation member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member When the arrangement position or orientation of 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 that are in contact with each other are displaced, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are not displaced relative to the rotating member 435, Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (extended) position, the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

  Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a part of a portion where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are in contact. The contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing as a pattern (character) of the second effect mode and losing interest.

  Next, the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment are described. 2450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 arranged to be rotatable with respect to the main body base member 2480. Composed.

  The main body base member 2480 is formed from a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body as viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with projecting portions 2481 on the lower surface sides of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

  The protruding plate portion 411 is provided with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 disposed on the first member 431 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

  The protrusions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 as described above. The protruding portion 2481 has a circular bearing hole 2481a into which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmitting member 2485 described later is inserted. In addition, a through hole 2481b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in the protrusion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (the right side of the gaming machine).

  The bearing holes 2481a are recessed in both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 to the outside, and the shaft centers formed at both ends are formed concentrically.

  The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, there are formed rotating portions 2487 that are formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the side and have a predetermined thickness, and the shaft portion 2486 of the shaft-like body extends longitudinally outward from the axis of the rotating portion 2487. Projectingly formed.

  Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end in the longitudinal direction (the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side of the game board). Established.

  The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485 are formed so that their axes are concentric. Further, as described above, the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2481, so that the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

  Thus, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and disposed in the main body base member 2480.

  A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (the right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is disposed on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with the pinion gear 2488 disposed on one side of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction (right side in front view).

  The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotation drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmission member 2485, and the shaft center is fastened to the rotation drive motor 2489. The rotation drive motor 2489 has its rotation shaft inserted through the through hole 2481b of the protrusion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protrusion 2481.

  Therefore, by applying a rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and a driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. Thereby, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437 a disposed on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f by the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a. As a result, rotation of the rotating member 435 can be imparted with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430.

  The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with a transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the transmission is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f by the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a. Thereby, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the right slide member 2450.

  Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, and thus detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a is omitted.

  71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437 a includes a tooth portion 2437 a 1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437 a 2 that gradually decreases as the tooth thickness goes toward the back surface side.

  The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has a thickness dimension substantially the same as the thickness dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

  The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back side. The distance dimension at which the bulging part 2437a2 bulges from the tooth part 2437a1 to the back side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth part 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth part 2437a1. Thereby, it can suppress that the rigidity of the bulging part 2437a2 falls, and can suppress that the bulging part 2437a2 is damaged.

  Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) is a diagram illustrating the rotation transmission member 2485, the transmission gear 2437a, and the like. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 2400 in the state by which the mesh | engagement was cancelled | released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram of the slide unit 2400 along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

  In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are illustrated in a transparent state.

  As shown in FIGS. 72A and 73A, when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned below (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is performed. A state in which the gear 2437a is engaged is formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. Accordingly, the rotation driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when a rotational driving force is applied to the rotational drive motor 2489 and the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated upward on the back side, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. The

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates around the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated. Displaces upward along with the rotation. Accordingly, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slid with respect to the base member 2410, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, so the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate. As a result, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, the rotating member 435 can be configured not to rotate.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430 The displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 is not rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is stopped and rotated. A third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed.

  Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotation member 435 can be increased, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor for applying a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, if a drive motor is disposed on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. it can. That is, it is not necessary to provide the left slide member 2430 with drive means for driving the rotation member 435 to rotate, and accordingly, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, thereby transmitting the left rotation transmission. When the meshing between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is to be released, the gears are not meshed when the second driving state in which the meshing is released is switched to the first driving state in which the meshing is not performed, and the side surfaces are in contact with each other. There is a problem that the counterclockwise transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a cannot be engaged with each other due to a collision.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed in the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second driving state in which the engagement is released to the first driving state in which the engagement is performed, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

  Further, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed so that the tooth thickness is gradually decreased toward the back side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the gradually decreasing inclined surface. can do.

  That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 in the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is performed.

  In addition, it is preferable that the axial part 2486 in 2nd Embodiment is formed in the plane of the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of a 1st drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first driving state to the second driving state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

  Next, a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

  The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge.

  On the lower side of the projecting plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the lower surface side on the lower side (the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side of the game board). Established. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed in the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 so as to penetrate in the vertical direction.

  The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in front view. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 that protrudes from the edge to the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

  In addition, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Accordingly, the housing member 3490 can be disposed inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

  A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, a projecting wall 3491 on the upper side of the housing member 3490 is formed with a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction.

  The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the housing member 3490 to fasten a shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495, which will be described later, and the housing member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 The diameter is formed to be smaller than the diameter.

  The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides the housing member 3490 up and down by its drive. By applying electric power, the shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion This is a member (solenoid) for displacing the protruding distance.

  The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 in a state in which the shaft portion is inserted into the insertion hole 3481 c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. The main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

  Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. That is, the housing member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

  Next, the operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 viewed from the front in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are engaged with each other, and FIG. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 as viewed from the front in a state in which the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 76B is a diagram of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), when the housing member 3490 is positioned upward, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is as follows. While being arranged in a sufficiently secured state, the counterclockwise transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are engaged with each other.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

  That is, in a state where the storage member 3490 is positioned below, the distance L2 between the bottom surface of the storage member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension L1. A state is formed in which the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the base member 3480 is released (distance dimension L1> L2).

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 is slid with respect to the base member 3410, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotation member 435, even if the left slide member 430 is displaced, a form that does not rotate can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 Is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped. The third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a disposed on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. The first driving state and the second driving state can be switched.

  Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be performed smoothly.

  That is, in a state where the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought close to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 with the phase shifted, the left rotation transmission rack gear Since the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other and the transmission gear 437a meshes with the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged. It is not necessary to match the phases, and the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a slide unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of a base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge portion. . On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. In addition, a notch 4413a having a tooth surface cut out is formed at both ends and the center of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth portion 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

  On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, notch portions 4414a are formed by notching the tooth surfaces. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to each other.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  78A is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a of the base member 4410 are engaged with each other, and FIG. 78B is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 4400 in the state which the engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was cancelled | released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the disengaged state are formed.

  That is, the rotation member 435 can be rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is reduced to its inertial force. Can be continued.

  Accordingly, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped. The third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  Further, the switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured such that the disengagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is released by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Therefore, there is no need to dispose a drive motor or the like for releasing the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for slidably moving the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with a small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. And the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

  That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the notch 4413a collide.

  In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a smoothly mesh. be able to.

  That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 without the small tooth portion 4413b, when the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is deviated when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are engaged with each other and cannot be engaged.

  In this case, when the rotation of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is out of phase by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a to have an outer shape smaller than the other teeth. However, it is possible to adjust the phase of the transmission gear 437a by rotating the transmission gear 437a while suppressing the meshing of the teeth when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment are described. 5450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment, a one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on a rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

  The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed in a circular shape through the shaft center of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d, a holder 5439e that holds each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a that is connected to the holder 5439e and switches the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. .

  The switching plate 5439a is formed with a sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in the shape of a long hole, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 viewed from the front before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81B is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, for ease of understanding, the drawing is simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436 d formed on the displacement member 5436 is associated with the displacement. It is displaced with respect to. Thereby, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, a state where the one-way clutch 5439 allows rotation transmission and a state where rotation transmission is blocked can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 5430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 is not rotated, and the one-way clutch when stopping the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 By changing from the state in which 5439 allows the transmission of the rotation to the state in which the rotation is blocked, the third driving state in which the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped is formed. be able to.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined with the movement of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 (linear movement and rotation movement), the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436. Therefore, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment are described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435 in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted into the through hole 6434a1 of the back side base member 434a. The

  The through-hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole through which the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

  In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operation element 6438 described later. The

  The operation element 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The operation element 6438 is formed with a connecting pin 6438a protruding forward at the lower end, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the central part in the vertical direction.

  The through-hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back side of the back side base member 434a to the rear, and is formed to have a larger diameter than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

  Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the distal end of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back side base member 434a in a rotatable state.

  The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and has an outer diameter dimension smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

  Therefore, when the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 and the operating element 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes, and thus the one-way. The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

  Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434 a and the other end is locked to the operation element 6438. As a result, the operating element 6438 is always urged in the clockwise direction around the through hole 6438b in the front view. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied to the operation element 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can be always driven (a state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435).

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 84A is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84B is a slide unit in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at 6400 front. FIG. 85A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 85B is a diagram of the slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operation element 6438 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), when the external force is not applied to the operation element 6438, the operation element 6438 has a longitudinal direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. It is arranged with.

  In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and is bitten by a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and the other end of the operation element 6438 disposed on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side (upper side) of the right side of the front surface is in contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

  After the side surface of the operation element 6438 and the base member 6410 come into contact with each other, when the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion, the operation element 6438 is displaced in the leftward rotation direction when viewed from the front centering on the through hole 6438b.

  Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotation member 5435 can be formed.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, a state in which the transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked are formed. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 When the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from a state allowing the transmission of rotation to a state where the rotation is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third driving state can be formed.

  Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 6430 and the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. Thus, the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 86, the slide unit 7400 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment are described. 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which a second slide member 7460 described later is disposed is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

  The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 disposed opposite to the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and the two plate members 7462. And a drive gear 7464 which is disposed above the rack gear 7461 and meshes with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. The

  The rack gear 7461 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a gear tooth surface 7461a is formed on the upper surface side. A stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

  The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465 to be described later, and is formed in a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In the plate member 7462, a slide groove 7462a positioned on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed in the vertical direction on the side surface, and a through hole 7462b is formed through the slide groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

  The through hole 7462 b is a through hole for fastening with the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) through the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw with the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

  The shaft portion 7463 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. The axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

  As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is sandwiched and held between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid in the up-down direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the up-down direction. .

  The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed in a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the shaft center. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7463 inserted through the shaft hole and is disposed between two plate members 7462.

  The drive gear 7464 is a member for engaging with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force that slides and displaces the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

  The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467 a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

  Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates and the rack gear 7461 can be slid in the left-right direction.

  Of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 disposed on the front side is decorated (displayed with a symbol or the like) on the plane disposed on the front side thereof. Thereby, the second slide member 7460 can be slid and displaced from the position overlapping the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position not overlapping, thereby enabling the player to visually recognize the decorative surface.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 87 to 89, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

  First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the movable range of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operating element 6438 before displacement, the through hole 6438b, and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not disposed between 6434a2 and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 87A, in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slid, the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is disposed in a state tilted to the right side.

  In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and is bitten by a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, the left slide member 7430 is displaced to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 contacts the roller 7465 (position shown in FIG. 87B). The rotation member 5435 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operating element 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Abut. Accordingly, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is tilted to the right side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the operation element is urged downward by the slide displacement. 6438 can be rotated with the through hole 6438b as an axis.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operation element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is a roller 7465. The roller 7465 is in contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 which is located at substantially the same height as the axis.

  Accordingly, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the operation element 6438 can be rotated about the through hole 6438b as an axis while urging the roller 7465 to the right by the slide displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is disposed in a state tilted to the right side, the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is disposed on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Is done.

  Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotation member 5435 can be formed.

  In addition, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is rotated to a state where the operation element 6438 is tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 can be biased upward by the slide displacement.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 inserted through the roller 7465 is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is positioned above the operation element 6438, the operation element 6438 can be displaced to the right side of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Further, as described above, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is positioned on the right side of the roller 7465 is in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 blocks transmission of rotation, so that the left side of the roller 7465 is left. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when slid.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, a state in which the transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked are formed. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are changed. In the stopped state, the third driving state in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed.

  Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 7430 and the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until a time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, A second driving state in which the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated can be formed.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 7430 and the motion of the rotating member 5435 (linear motion and rotational motion) can be increased. . As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is rotated. The position where the allowable state is changed to the restricted state or the allowable state is changed to the restricted state can be changed. Accordingly, the position at which the rotation state of the rotation member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and the position at which the rotation member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped is determined. It can change according to a game state etc., As a result, a production effect can be heightened.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since the role of performing and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

  That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is disposed on either one of the left and right sides of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other side in the left and right directions while the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

  Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied. The first driving state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated. Two drive states can be formed.

  Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a slide bar disposed on the base member 8410. Mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding the left slide member 8430 along the slide bar member 420. .

  The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. The base member 8410 is provided with a protruding plate portion 411, and a base-side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

  The base-side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear that extends along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first-side pinion gear 432 and the second-side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 8430 includes a first member 8431 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a base member 8431b that is vertically long when viewed from the front of the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. Front-side rectangular second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432, a second-side rack gear 433a meshed with the first side pinion gear 432, and a front-view rectangular longitudinal base member depending on the second member 8433 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 that is rectangular in a front view and has a third side rack gear 8445a that meshes with the second side pinion gear 8433d. , And a base member 8446 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front and that is suspended by the third member 8445.

  The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole having a circular inner peripheral surface that extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole. Thus, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  First side pinion gear 432 is meshed with base side rack gear 8412 of base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by receiving the action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

  The second member 8433 is disposed in the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, the second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 8433. Accordingly, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

  Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

  The third member 8445 is disposed in the second member 8433 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the lower surface of the third member 8445. The third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 receives the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. Relative to 8433.

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is A driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 8433 is accelerated relative to the first member 8431. Can do.

  Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the third member 8433 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can do.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, and illustrate a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid. 94A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93A, and FIG. 94B is a diagram of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. In FIG. 93, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

  93 (a) and 94 (a), in a state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. A third member 8445 is disposed on the inner side.

  In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is positioned in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed in front of the base member 8434. Is done.

  That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slid, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid without being interfered with each other. . Further, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  Further, the effect region K formed in the center portion of the game board (in FIG. 93 (a), the base member 8410) can be reduced by the amount of space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445. A region where the lower side of the base member 8446 overlaps with the left side of the base member 8446).

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed to face each other in a parallel attitude, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is provided in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433. The first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 with respect to the second member 8433, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432. The driving force accompanying the movement can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 8433 is accelerated relative to the first member 8431. Can do.

  Accordingly, the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 are slid to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracted from the effect area K (open state), thereby shortening the time required for shielding. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed in a mutually parallel posture, and the teeth are attached to both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the third member 8433 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can do.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second member 8433 can be slid relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

  This shortens the time required to slide the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retract from the effect area K (open state), thereby shielding the slide. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  93 (c) and 94 (c), in the state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the extended position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of the overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is disposed in a state of protruding from the inside of the second member 8433 leaving a partial overlap.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the left side surface of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431 and the right side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. Arranged at the same position. Further, the left side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed over the entire production area K.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98, a slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is suspended from the second member 433 has been described. However, in the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended from the first member 431 and the second member 8433 is suspended. A base member 9434 is provided depending on the base. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a slide bar disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly moving the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove.

  The left slide member 9430 includes a first member 8431 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a base member 9431b that is vertically long when viewed from the front of the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. Front-side rectangular second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432, a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-side rectangular longitudinal base member depending on the second member 9433 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a rectangular base member 9446 that is rectangular in front view connected to the slide rail 9443, and a thread-like wire 9444 that can be freely deformed. Configured.

  The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole having a circular inner peripheral surface that extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole. Thus, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  The base member 9431b has a concave groove formed from the back side on the side surface on the left side when viewed from the front at the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending upward and downward inside the concave groove. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

  The second member 9433 is disposed in the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the second member 9433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433. The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 9433 is accelerated more than the first member 8431. Can do.

  The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c in which a right side surface in front view on the upper end side is notched in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably disposed inside the notch 9434c. In addition, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is disposed on the base member 9434 in front of the upper end side in a state in which the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

  The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444, which will be described later, and the vertical position thereof is arranged at the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member so as to be slidable. The slide rail 9443 is formed of two plates and the plates can be slidably displaced. Further, the slide rail 9443 has a coil spring (not shown) disposed therein, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

  The base member 9437 is arranged to be slidable with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back side of the base member 9437 to the slide rail 9443.

  The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a that extends vertically is formed inside the concave groove. Is done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed from a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. The wire 9444 has a connection path for connecting one end and the other end between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. It arrange | positions in the state which a part and side contact | abutted (refer FIG. 9).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid and displaced is illustrated. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 along the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram of the slide unit 9400 along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. 97C. In FIG. 93, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

  97A and 98A, when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Accordingly, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. The space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced to reduce the size.

  Further, the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced, so that an effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

  Further, in a state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9446 is moved leftward with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446. Although a sliding force is applied, the base member 9434 connects the wire 9444 to the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434. It can suppress that 9446 slide-displaces to the left with respect to the base member 9434. FIG.

  That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a dimension obtained by combining the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and the left pinion gear is rotated. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

  In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 while being engaged with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 9433 is accelerated more than the first member 8431. Can do.

  Accordingly, the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 are slid to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracted from the effect area K (open state) to shorten the time required for the shield. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  In this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are disposed at positions where the positions in the front-rear direction are shifted. That is, the overlap dimension in the front-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from the overlap dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlap dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

  Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlap dimension in the front-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 as much as the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid with respect to the base member 9434 in a state where the base member 9446 is accelerated more than the base member 9434.

  This shortens the time required to slide and displace the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retreat from the effect area K (open state). The open state can be quickly switched.

  93 (c) and 94 (c), in a state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the extended position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b and the right side surface of the base member 9434 are The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the left side surface of the base member 9434 and the right side surface of the base member 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed over the entire production area K.

  In the ninth embodiment, since the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, the third member 8445 is disposed above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. There is no need to do. Accordingly, since the third member 8445 is not disposed, the distance between the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

  Next, an elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

  First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. It is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 10800. FIG.

  Although 1st Embodiment demonstrated each movable unit (slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the raising / lowering unit 800) arrange | positioned at the operation | movement unit 200 in the combined | combined (overhang | projection) position, it mutually disconnected. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 10800) disposed in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. These parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment includes an elevating member 10820 disposed on the base member 810 so as to be elevable. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 protruding to the back side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to protrude from the back side.

  The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged by the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state. It is formed to protrude from the back side of 10820. The engaging portion 10822 is set to have a left-right dimension that is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed in a state protruding to the back side. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 102A).

  Further, the engaging portion 10822 includes a through-hole 10822a that protrudes in a rectangular shape from the back side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the gravity direction. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the distal end portion of the protruding member 735 in a top view. Thereby, when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state, the tip of the protruding member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102B).

  Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 is an operation unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a diagram of CIIb- in FIG. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822 in the lifting unit 10800 (the lifting member 10820) of the operation unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

  Note that the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 99 (b)) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction as going downward.

  Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the protruding member 735 so that the protruding distance increases as it goes downward, so that the inner wall of the through-hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a can come into contact with each other. .

  Therefore, since the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700 can be brought into contact (connected) with the engaging portion 10822, each movable unit (the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit in the combined state) can be brought into contact. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

  More specifically, the lift member 10820 is displaced up and down (vibrates) at a relatively small distance by repeatedly applying a relatively small rotational drive to the drive motor 891 that drives the lift member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

  In this case, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the left and right side surfaces (FIG. 99 (b) left and right) of the engaging portion 10822, and therefore are engaged by the inclined shape of the left and right side surfaces. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

  The rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction that displaces the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 by the center of gravity toward the inner side in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 at the combined (extended) position. . Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, whereby the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

  On the other hand, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 has the inclined portion 10735a in contact with the through-hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, and thus the inclined member 10735 is given cyclic displacement to the elevating member 10820. The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface. Therefore, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (leftward in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced by the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a. As a result, the lifting member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, whereby the protruding member 735 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving energy because it is not necessary to apply a driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, and 476.

  In other words, the elevating member 10820 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the combined (extension) position, and the elevating member 10820 is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. The rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced using the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the staging effect. . In this case, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated (non-contacting) from each other, a periodic displacement can be applied from the elevating member 10820 without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

  Further, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not associated with each other and can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners. That is, since the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 have different configurations (the number of components and the shape of each component), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, it is vibrated in a different manner. Therefore, the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 in one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the base members 434 and 454, so that the circumferential direction about the rotation axis is caused by the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. The rotating member 730 can be configured to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed back and forth by the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

  In addition, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to a driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the driving force can be transmitted efficiently.

  That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted through each of the rotating members 435 and 455. In the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

  Further, the elevating member 10820 is disposed at a position in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the combined (extended) position, and thus is disposed closer to the player. The lifting member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by using the lifting member 10820 on the near side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that can easily convey the force of vibration to the player.

  Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

  First, the drive body 11761 in 11th Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the driving body 11761 in a state where the driving body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram illustrating the second rotation of the driving body 11761. It is a front view of the drive body 761 of the state arrange | positioned in the position.

  In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving body 761 is arranged such that the interposing member 733 descends with the rotation of the driving body 761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the protruding position (a state protruding from the rotating member 730). In the eleventh embodiment, the interposed member 733 is moved in accordance with the rotation of the driving body 11761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the protruding position (a state protruding from the rotating member 730). A cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to rise. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is placed on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the cam surface (position P1) to be abutted is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is disposed at the second rotational position. The cam diameter (radius R4) at the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously increased from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is the lowest from the lowermost position when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the drive body 761 is continuously raised from above and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  Accordingly, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the interposed member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104 to FIG. 107, the displacement state when each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 11700, and the elevating unit 800) is displaced into the combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 104 to 107 sequentially illustrate the displacement state when each movable unit is displaced into the combined (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of the rotational displacement, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 in the initial position is disposed in a state where the tip of the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central part of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state and to increase the amount of extension during the extension operation.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced in the first operation by sliding the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710. Thereby, the raising / lowering base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the united position. In addition, since detailed description of the displacement of the raising / lowering base 720 is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

  Due to the displacement of the second operation, the lifting base 720 of the projecting unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is The member 810 is displaced downward. In the third state, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

  Further, in this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is a lowered position that is close to the rotating member 11730. Accordingly, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is arranged at the united (extended position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the united position. It is possible to suppress the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

  Furthermore, since the tip of the swing member 732 is at a lowered position close to the rotation member 11730, the gap between the rotation members 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotation member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern (character) formed by combining the members (rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and the elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 11700 and elevating unit 800). ) Can be increased.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 along with the displacement.

  Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the combined (extension) position, the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) are separated by separating the tip of the swinging member 732 from the rotating member 11730. The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to contact the base member 410.

  In this case, the base member 410 is provided with a contact portion, and the contact portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions of the left drive motor 475 or variations in control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is contacted. The member is brought into contact with the member (that is, the member to be contacted is caused to function as a stopper for restricting the displacement of the left slide member 430). By causing the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 to contact the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened, and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), which is a contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (a member to which the first member 431 is contacted). Although the case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described. The contact object of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

  Thus, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the contact is made, the object to be contacted can be retracted (released) by the parallel displacement component described above, and the buffering action can be exhibited accordingly. Further, by displacing the contact target in the opposite direction to the contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting the slide displacement from the stop state) can be assisted.

  Note that the contact target need not be driven by the driving means. Instead of driving by the driving means, or in addition to driving by the driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring). Also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) is brought into contact, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-described buffering action can be exerted, and the elastic recovery force can be increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are disposed substantially simultaneously at the extended position in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first disposed in the overhang position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the overhang position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 is in contact with the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state). It may be a thing to be touched. Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebounded by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the upper displacement member that is the contact object of the lower displacement member 640 (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 is contacted (combined) at the extended position). Although the case where 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be stopped (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebounded by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position in the lower unit 600 is described as the extended rotation position. It is not limited.

  For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position may be set as the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is defined as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. May be.

  Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position is the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). Rotated rotational position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member at the extension position. You may form so that it may contact | abut to 530. FIG.

  In any of these configurations, a change (decrease) in the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 can weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin protrudes from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin can slide is provided. A structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove is exemplified.

  In the case of such a structure, at least the component of the displacement (speed) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target on which the lower displacement member 640 contacts (combines) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so as to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. Thus, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebound is suppressed by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. can do.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, only the lower unit 600 (the lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this, or in addition to this, the upper unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be. In this case, the upper united unit 500 may be disposed by vertically inverting the lower united unit 600.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the drive states (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 are constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the other party among the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 decreases in the vicinity of the overhang position, The form which reduces the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is illustrated. It should be noted that only one of the drive motors 543 and 672 may be reduced or both may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 are in contact with each other is the rotation of the driving body 761 in front view. Although the case where it is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface contact each other passes through the rotation center of the driving body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposed member are arranged so that the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the protruding member 735. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are raised. It is preferable to form the swing member 732 and the interposed member 733 so that the weight of the swing member 732 and the interposed member 733 is applied to the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weight of the swinging member 732, the interposed member 733, and the protruding member 735.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the protruding unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of the predetermined range is preferably set corresponding to an angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be made coincident with the timing at which the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 or the protrusion member 735 has a displacement (speed) component upward in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 has a downward (gravity) displacement (velocity) component, the other is vertical (gravity). ) The case where the load on the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (speed) component upward in the direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is not necessarily limited thereto. The load on the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the shape of the cam (cam diameter) and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (the distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761).

  In other words, in a region where the load required to act on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load necessary to act on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is increased. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in the region where the load required to act on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load necessary for exerting an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c becomes relatively small.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as the urging force in the direction of lowering the sliding member 735 (sliding downward) in the protruding unit 700 has been described. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may be applied as a biasing force in the direction in which the protruding member 735 is lifted (sliding upward). In this case, the initial speed when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased by the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example, the left of the rotation transmission member 2485 The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is performed.

  Furthermore, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since the bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second driving state to the first driving state, the first driving that meshes from the second driving state in which the meshing is released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

  Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions where the tooth thickness gradually decreases on both sides of the gear to be engaged, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (the gear width direction dimension) can be reduced.

  In the second and third embodiments, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position on the center of the gaming machine). Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position ( When displaced to the center of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small tooth portions formed in a small size, so that the rigidity is increased. Although the case where it makes high is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, You may make the dimension of the tooth | gear width of the tooth | gear adjacent to notch part 4413a, 4414a large, and may make the rigidity high.

  Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state. And the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that gives displacement to the operation element 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 in the slide unit 6400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is connected to the back case 300. And may be arranged so as to contact the operation element 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411 a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, but may be formed on a member on the displacement locus of the operation element 6438.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position on the center of the gaming machine). Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are in the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine). When it is displaced from the extended position to the overhanging position (position at the center of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second driving state to the first driving state.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 for displacing the operation element 6438 in the slide unit 7400 is disposed on the second slide member 7640 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the operation element 6438 is not necessarily limited thereto. A roller 7645 that displaces the roller 7645 is disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. There may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431 by forming the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance of relative displacement and the distance of relative displacement of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed substantially the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not limited to this. It is formed smaller than or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. The distance may be different.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slid to the effect area K in the slide units 8400 and 9400, the effect area Although the case where K is invisible has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a part or all of the first members 8431, 9431, the second members 8432, 9432, and the third members 8445, 9445 are included. Alternatively, it may be made of a light transmissive material so that part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the left side surface of the base members 8431b and 9431b and the right side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the left side of the front view and the side surface of the base members 8446 and 9446 on the right side of the front view are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The left side surface of the members 8431b and 9431b and the right side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side when viewed from the front may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In the first embodiment, the manner in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position is controlled and dimensioned. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both of them approach the reference position due to the variation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be positions where the two collide steadily.

  In this case, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly as much as the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced in accordance with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, so that the drive transmission path from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the displacement member 732 is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the stop is quickly stopped at the combined (extension) position. can do.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used, Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second members 436 and 456 disposed on the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. You may overhang.

  In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are disposed in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 so that the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 11730 (the lift base 720) are separated when the lift unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (extension) position. Although the case where it arrange | positions in the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The rotation members 435 and 455 and the rotation member 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arrange | positioned in the state contact | abutted. . In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 11730 (the lifting base 720), and the lifting member 820 are displaced to the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extension) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. In the above description, the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when the rotating members 732 collide with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lifting base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

  In this case, since the rotation member 730 is connected to a transmission path that transmits driving for rotating the lifting base 720, the rotating base 720 is not easily rotated with respect to the lifting base 720. By rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when coming into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to easily absorb the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

  In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 is contacted with the rotating member 435. Although it is disposed on the front side, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the entire portion where the rotating member 435 contacts the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged in such a manner as to cover the front side. Moreover, you may arrange | position in the front side of the area | region beyond this.

  In this case, the rotating member 435 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 are arranged in one pattern. Can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing as a pattern (character) of the second effect mode and losing interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central region of the game board 13, and a first winning port 64 is provided therebelow. Furthermore, in the right area (hereinafter referred to as the right area) of the game board 13 where the balls launched so as to jump over the variable display device unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flow down, a through gate 66, It is variable between a second winning port 140, an open state attached to the second winning port 140 and allowing a ball to enter the second winning port 140, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. Electric winning combination 140a, specific winning opening 65a, an open state associated with the specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state And a variable winning device 65 that is variable.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in which the game board 13 is configured, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, and based on the lottery result. The 3rd symbol display device 81 performs the variation display (dynamic display) of the 3rd symbol. Then, a big hit game (privilege game) that is advantageous to the player is executed when the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, “7.7.7”).

  When the jackpot game is executed, an operation is performed in which the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), so that the player aims at the right area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the game). , Called right-handed game), and the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out as a winning ball, so that the player can acquire many winning balls during the big hit game.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the big hit game is not executed, a game in which a ball enters the first winning port 64 is performed, and in the big hit game state in which the big hit game is executed, it is variable by a right-handed game. The winning device 65 is aimed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the game is being performed by changing the area in which the ball is launched according to the game state.

  Further, the variable winning device 65 in which the opening operation is executed during the jackpot game is provided with a probability changing switch 65e3 through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, but the variable winning device 65 is provided with two paths through which the ball that has entered can pass, and the ball that has flowed down one of the paths is provided. It is configured to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. In addition, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state (hereinafter, the probability change state) in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends. Called).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right area unit (not shown) into which a ball that has been launched by a right-handed game and passed through a through gate 66 provided in the right area of the game board 13 flows. Yes. This right region unit is provided with a cleon in which three discharge holes through which the spheres can pass are formed as distribution means for distributing the inflowing spheres into a plurality of paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in the croon, the ball passing through one discharge hole flows down the first path and is guided to the second winning port 140. The balls that have not entered the second winning opening 140 are guided to a specific general winning opening (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the other two discharge holes among the three discharge holes formed in the croon flows down the second path and is guided to the variable winning device 65. Then, the balls that have not entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are discharged as they are from the second path, pass through the first out opening 71, and discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  By configuring in this way, for example, during the jackpot game, a ball that can enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening and a ball that can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are generated simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the flow of the ball in the jackpot game and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, if the configuration is such that a winning ball is paid out for the winning at the second winning opening 140 or the specific general winning opening, the winning ball can be paid out for the winning at a plurality of winning holes during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player during the jackpot, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly.

  Furthermore, an effect based on a ball that has entered a specific general winning opening during a jackpot game may be executed. For example, the number of balls that have entered a specific general winning opening during a jackpot game has exceeded a predetermined number. It is advisable to execute the production based on the results. In this case, the number of balls that enter the specific general winning opening can be increased in the case of the big winning (the big winning with a large number of rounds or the big winning that is difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a) with a long period of time when the big winning game is executed. Even if a state in which it is difficult for the ball to win the special winning opening 65a occurs during the jackpot game, there is an effect that a privilege can be given to the player.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, during the period when the variable winning device 65 is closed (opening period, interval period or ending period), You may comprise so that an effect may be performed based on having entered. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game in which a ball is continuously fired during the jackpot game, and to suppress the operation of the gaming machine from being reduced.

  As described above, in addition to the production based on the ball entering the specific general winning opening during the big hit game, the production (notification) is executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning opening during the big hit game. For example, a right-handed game during a jackpot game can be entered at a predetermined rate (for example, 3 to 1) at a specific winning opening 65a and a specific general winning opening. If it is determined that a ball has not entered the specific general winning opening during a jackpot game or a single round game during a jackpot game when a sorting member is provided to which the ball is sorted May be notified. Thereby, when the big hit game is not executed by the normal right-handed game, or abnormalities of various devices (sorting members and the like) provided in the game board 13 can be detected early.

  In addition, the sphere can pass as a drop position changing means for making the position where the sphere falls to the cron undefined in the middle of the path until the sphere that has flowed into the right region unit (not shown) reaches the cron. A moving member having a simple path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate in a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left-right direction (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by a motor (not shown), and the timing when the ball flows into the moving member The position where it is discharged (the position where it falls to the croon) can be made different. As described above, by providing the moving member as the drop position changing means above the clune as the distributing means, it becomes possible to complicate the movement of the sphere on the clune. It should be noted that the moving speed of the moving member described above may be set to a speed at which the dropping position is 10 mm or more away when a continuously launched ball falls on the croon. By setting in this way, it becomes possible to suppress damage to the device due to the balls that have continuously dropped on the croon collide and bounce back. Furthermore, even if the separation distance between the croon and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball that has been dropped first and a ball that has been dropped later interfere with each other to cause a ball clogging. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the Kroon-shaped mechanism is used as the distributing means. However, any configuration that can distribute the spheres to a plurality of paths may be used. Alternatively, a flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the sphere to be switched may be used, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the sphere. Further, in this control example, the moving member is used as the drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls to the croon does not become a fixed place, but any configuration that can change the drop position of the ball may be used. You may make it the structure which moves the cron itself.

  Next, when the jackpot gaming state is over, when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the probability variation state described above is entered, while the variable winning device during the jackpot game. When the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 at 65, the normal gaming state is aimed at the first winning port 64.

  Here, in the probability variation state in the present control example, as described above, the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big win becomes high, and the lottery in which the normal symbol in which the lottery is executed by passing through the through gate 66 is a win. The probability is set to be high. Further, the time until the lottery result of the special symbol and the normal symbol is fixed (hereinafter referred to as a variation time) is set to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability variation state in this control example is set so that after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol lottery results continue for 100 consecutive times until a lottery result other than the jackpot is reached, and the special symbol lottery is 100. It is set to shift from the probable change state to the normal game state after the number of consecutive wins. In this way, by setting a limit on the period during which the probability variation state advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to cause the player to play the game ambiguously so as to be a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game There is an effect that can be done. The period during which the probability variation state continues may be set to other contents. For example, it may be continued until the next jackpot is won, or at the same timing as when the special symbol lottery is executed. You may perform the transfer lottery which transfers a probability change state to a normal game state. Moreover, you may set the period for which a probability change state continues with time.

  Furthermore, in the probability variation state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a that is driven to open when the winning symbol is won in the normal symbol lottery executed by passing the ball through the through gate 66 is the normal gaming state. It is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. However, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability change state has a ball at the second winning opening 140 rather than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the period of the open state in which the entry is possible becomes longer.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured to execute a right-handed game in the probability variation state and efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning opening. Has been. Therefore, the right-handed game only needs to be continuously executed during the period from the start of the jackpot game until the end of the probability change state, and it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gameability.

<Variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to project to the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d is disposed, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an open / close door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover The switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, the link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side, and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for this purpose.

  FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 109 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109 (b) is an Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided in the left direction of FIG. 109 (b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in a non-entry state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning port 140 side. It is configured. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning port 140 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability variation game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  109 (a) is a La-La cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 109 (b). As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 110, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

  FIG. 110 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged obliquely to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is done.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is set to 1 second at the shortest. The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. In addition, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured not to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Yes. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening 65 at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem of winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if the winning ball is B in the thirteenth round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 for one ball prize). Award balls). In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 111B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added is arranged. Further, if “big hit A”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added are arranged. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of predetermined main symbols indicating small hits (for example, the main symbol combinations “3” and “4” in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1). “1”) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  In the present control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to vary depending on the effect display to be executed. Therefore, in the description of each effect described later, the same reference numeral indicates that the display or area has the same function, and the place (display form) where the display or area is arranged is different. Are also described with the same reference numerals.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a display mode of effects executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of reach navigation effects that is executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol. ) And FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect display mode of reach navigation effects. This reach navigation effect allows the player to visually grasp the progress of the effect (main effect) executed by a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach), and notifies or suggests in stages. Production (secondary production). In this way, by displaying the contents of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (the description of the effect of the main effect, the variation time, and the expectation level that is a big hit) using the sub-effects, the player can be displayed. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112A, the reach navigation effect will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. The small effect is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5, and the main effect based on the fluctuation pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, a reach navigation effect as a sub-effect is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

  In this small area Dm4, as an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, a character Dm4b as a moving display unit visually indicating the progress degree of the main effect, and the main effect An informing part Dm4c for informing at least a part of the effect result and guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e for guiding at least a part of the effect result of the main effect are displayed.

  The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating a period during which the main effect is executed, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is a moving display unit, proceeds from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. The notification unit Dm4c is displayed at the right end of the time gauge Dm4a. When the character Dm4b that moves in response to the main effect executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the notification unit Dm4c is notified. Is stopped. In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as the period display unit for indicating the period during which the main effect is executed, but other displays may be used. For example, a predetermined finished product (for example, an architecture) It may be configured to be able to display a process of creating a product or dish.

  The character Dm4b is a movement display unit that moves in accordance with the progress of the main effect, and is displayed so as to move on the time gauge Dm4a from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 112 at a constant speed. In this way, by moving the character Dm4b on the time gauge Dm4a at a constant speed, the player can predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. In the figure shown in FIG. 112 (a), only an image simulating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but actually, a plurality of character images with different speeds moving on the time gauge Dm4a are stored. The length of the time gauge Dm4a and the character to be selected are controlled based on the length of the selected main effect (the length of the fluctuation time).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying a sub-effect in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of change patterns (main effects) with different change times. Note that the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display unit, or the effect associated with the character is a big hit May be indicated, or the progress destination of the main effect may be suggested depending on the display mode of the selected character. Thereby, it is possible to have both a function for notifying the progress degree of the main effect and a function for suggesting the result of the main effect, and there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect display with a high effect.

  The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the effect result of the main effect, and rotational display (see FIG. 112B) that rotates in the left-right direction on the small area Dm4 is performed. The notification unit Dm4c is configured to be able to display an index indicating the effect result of the main effect on both sides thereof, and when the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped, the effect result of the main effect is displayed by the index that is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4. Is notified.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as an index for informing the effect result of the main effect, “V” which is an index indicating that it is a big hit, “X” which is an index indicating that it has been lost, “Development”, which is an index indicating that the performance is further continued, and “?”, Which is an index indicating that the performance result of the main performance is not notified, are set. The index is selected and rotated in a state where one index (for example, “V”) is displayed on one side of the notification unit Dm4c and another index (for example, “?”) Is displayed on the multiple side.

  With this configuration, for example, when the notification unit Dm4c is rotated and displayed with the “V” index and the “x” index displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the character Dm4b is notified. When it reaches the part Dm4c, it will be notified in advance that there is no further development, that is, the current production time of the main production (the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the main production) is grasped in advance. Therefore, it is possible to display a main effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the notification unit Dm4c is displayed in a state where the “V” index and the “development” index are displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c, the big hit occurs when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c. Or the player will be notified in advance that the main production will develop further, so the player expects at a predetermined timing (a timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c). You can watch the main performance with peace of mind.

  In this control example, a configuration is used that allows a player to grasp a plurality of indicators by rotating them. However, other configurations may be used to cause a player to grasp a plurality of indicators. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are switched and displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which a plurality of indicators are displayed at the same time on the notification unit Dm4c, and the indicators that are desired to be selected in the current presentation are deleted over time is used. May be.

  The guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, guidance display suggesting the content of the main effect of this time is executed. When the character Dm4b arrives at the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the character “chance” is displayed or rotated as an effect suggesting that the result of the current main effect is a big hit. The indicator attached to the notification unit Dm4c is switched. In this way, by providing the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle of the progress of the main effect, it becomes possible to notify the player step by step information based on the result of the main effect. In contrast, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can always be watched.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the guidance display unit can notify the guidance display that suggests the result of the main effect and the guidance display that suggests the period of the main effect when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify information notified to the player at the guidance display unit. In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, although two guidance display parts are provided, one or three or more may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b) and FIGS. 113 (a) to (c), a display mode at each timing of the reach navigation effect described above will be described. FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation effect is started, and FIG. 113 (a) is a small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c in the reach navigation effect. 113 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the reach navigation effect is further continued, and FIG. 113 (c) is a diagram after the main effect is continued in the reach navigation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a movement display is executed in which the character Dm4b moves from the left side to the right side (from the start point to the end point) on the time gauge Dm4a. In addition, the notification unit Dm4c performs a rotation display that enables the player to visually recognize the indicators displayed on both sides thereof. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, information on the effect period of the main effect and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main effect is given to the player in the middle stage of the main effect executed in the main display area Dm. On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance (before the special symbol lottery result is displayed).

  Furthermore, in FIG. 112 (b), the character Dm4b has a chance below the guidance display section Dm4d! ! "Is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result this time is a big hit, and as described above, the character Dm4b is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when it reaches the guidance display section Dm4c. In this way, by providing the guidance display unit Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, the timing at which the display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a big hit will be executed for the player. It is possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the display content of the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, for example, at the timing when the reach navigation effect is executed, two indicators “V” and “×” are displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d, It is possible to switch the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c to display two indicators, “V” and “Development”. In this way, by changing the display content of the notification unit Dm4c at a predetermined timing (timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4d), it is possible to diversify the content of the effect of the reach navigation effect which is a sub-effect. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting tired early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the case where the character Dm4b reaches | attains the alerting | reporting part Dm4c among reach navigation effects is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c, the rotation display of the notification unit Dm4c is stopped, and the index “?” Displayed on one surface of the notification unit Dm4c is displayed in the small area Dm4. Stopped display. When this “?” Indicator is displayed, an effect is then performed in which the character Dm4b is flipped off and returned to the point where the guidance display portion Dm4d is provided on the timing gauge Dm4a, as shown in FIG. 113 (b). The

  The indicator “?” Displayed in the notification unit Dm4c is an indicator that prevents the player from grasping whether the main effect ends at this timing or continues. After the effect display of (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b rising. On the other hand, when the current main effect develops and continues further, as shown in FIG. 113C, the character Dm4b rises and the reach navigation effect of moving on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again. In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (the display mode of the peripheral effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can grasp that the reach navigation effect corresponding to the developed main effect is being executed.

  The position where the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113 (b) is returned is determined based on the period of the main effect after development. Specifically, when the time until the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a and reaches the notification unit Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time of the main effect after development (the remaining period of the main effect is 10 seconds), the time It returns to the middle position of the gauge Dm4a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the reach navigation effect corresponding to the main effect after development using the moving speeds of the time gauge Dm4a and the character Dm4b corresponding to the main effect before development. It is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing a certain reach navigation effect.

  Furthermore, it becomes possible for the player to predict the period of the main effect after the development depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery is won, the long variation time is easily selected. Therefore, the larger the character Dm4b is returned to the position closer to the start point side of the time gauge Dm4a, the larger the bonus. Can be thought of as having been won, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is “?”, The player has returned the character Dm4b because the player has not been notified whether or not the current main production will develop. After confirming the position (after predicting the production period when it develops), the production of whether or not the character Dm4b rises will be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the reach navigation effect.

  As described above, in the reach navigation effect used in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance of information related to the main effect, which is an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. Thus, there is an effect that the main effect can be watched in a state where the progress destination of the main effect is predicted. Moreover, since the information regarding the main effect can be displayed step by step, the effect can be further improved because the player can continuously watch the effect.

  Note that the reach navigation effects described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 are merely examples, and the reach navigation effects used in this control example are various other effect displays. For example, in the reach navigation effect described above, a character imitating a rabbit is used as the movement display unit, but as other characters, a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. As described above, when selecting a character to be used in the current reach navigation effect from a plurality of characters, the character is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the effect content of the main effect to be executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give relevance to the display contents of the main effect and the sub-effect, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of incongruity. In this case, the character may be displayed in the reach navigation effect that is the sub-effect before the character is displayed in the main effect. Accordingly, the contents of the main effect can be grasped in advance by viewing the reach navigation effect, and the effect of effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect before development may be different from the moving speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation effect executed in response to the main effect after development. . Thereby, since the period of the main effect after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the moving speed of the character Dm4b, the effect period of the main effect after development can be easily grasped. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may make it show the expectation degree which a main effect develops by the position where character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, a region with high and low development expectations is provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b is returned to a region with high development expectations, the main effect may be developed with high probability. Good. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position where the character Dm4b is returned, and there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at a high probability (a special symbol) that has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability and the first per random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is any of “0-9” If it is determined that there is any of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “9”, and if it is “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are low probability, and the random value “0” is for low probability Is stored in the first random number table. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  A duplicate value between the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the big hit stored in the first random number table for the high probability time In order to prevent this, a random value corresponding to each jackpot may be set. If there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value that is a big jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict random numbers, so that fraud can be suppressed.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 29” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the random value is any one of “30 to 99” is “jackpot B”. In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 140.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 129) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various types of “out (for a long time)”, “out (for a short time)”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” are specified as variation patterns for out. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is provided. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interruption process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. In this control example, the normal symbol is also set to a high probability when the special symbol shifts to the high probability state, and the normal symbol is also set to the low probability according to the timing when the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. It is stipulated that That is, there is no gaming state in which the special symbol has a low probability state and the normal symbol has a high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 among the total number of random number values, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is “0.2 seconds × 1 times. ”Is opened, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 200 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it accompanies the second winning opening 140. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is “one second × twice” when the normal symbol is hit. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in a second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) is a table in which the random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is defined as described above. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first per-random number table 202a includes a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at a low probability of the special symbol, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol. Jackpot judgment value (a jackpot judgment value at a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the number of judgment values (random numbers) each of which is a big jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of determination values (random numbers) that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected in accordance with the types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Has been. Specifically, in the special symbol 1, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, the “50 to 99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B, and in the special symbol 2, the big hit As the determination value of A, the value (0 to 99) of the first hit type counter C2 is set.

  Here, as described above, the “big hit A” is configured so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, whether or not the probability change state is entered). However, in “big hit B”, it is configured that it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (that is, it is not determined whether or not the probability change state is entered).

  Furthermore, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are defined so that the distribution of jackpot type is different. In special symbol 1, the ratio of “big hit A” in the big bonus is 50%, and in special symbol 2, the big bonus Among them, “big hit A” is selected 100%. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which a lottery is executed when a ball enters the second winning opening 140 as described above. In the normal gaming state, the lottery is hardly executed. The lottery is executed in a probability change state where the ball easily enters the winning opening 140. In this control example, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without making a big hit even after shifting to the probability changing state, it shifts to the normal gaming state, so the state shifts to the probability changing state. It is possible to repeatedly execute the game in the probability variation state by continuing to win the big hit again after the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. Therefore, since the player will eagerly play the game to win the next jackpot even after shifting to the probable state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 116 (c)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished, the symbol “○” is turned on as the stop symbol (second symbol). In addition to being displayed, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117 (a)) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117 (b)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117 (c)), The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117 (d)) is defined at least.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 117 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0-149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150-197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds) For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 117 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 115, the description will be continued. FIG. 115B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol. 2 retained ball counter 203e, normal symbol retained ball counter 203f, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, probability variation It has at least a valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a probability variation counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first winning opening 64 is provided. Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order from the smallest. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. This is a storage area for the second winning opening 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning opening 140 (for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a described above. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) to the second winning opening 140. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the second winning opening 140 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 122, and S405 and S411 in FIG. 124). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of held balls of the variable display held at 110 can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66. Is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 66 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 126: No).

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown, the probability variation counter 203t is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to discriminate fraudulent situations in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). . Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passing counter 203i is updated by incrementing by one when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit B, the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, for the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds, and for the big hit B, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, one is subtracted and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in the present control example, a voice “watch the liquid crystal”). In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated by the processing of S1302 of the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of the main control device 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to view the 3rd symbol display device 81. A character of “attention” which is a notification is displayed. In the thirteenth round, the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player having an expectation that the probable game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is performed. However, when the twelfth round is over, the player may watch the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, it is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by informing the player to show the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting so that a player's hand may be held over the apparatus 65. FIG. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 12 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the effect that distracts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, the malfunction which discriminate | determines whether it is jackpot A or jackpot B by alerting | reporting time can be suppressed.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round and that an abnormality process described later can be executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a later ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset round 1 ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this control example, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, the impact is given at the start timing of the 13th round, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the big hit B is In addition, it is possible to suppress the injustice of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the remaining ball timer 203p is set to be shorter than the interval time until the next round is started, the next round game is executed and a new one is executed before the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value. There will be no winnings.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. Indicates that the time has not passed. That is, it is a period during which a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Accordingly, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3 to pass the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud that misdetects passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

  The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. The probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting a jackpot random number table to be referred to when performing a special symbol lottery. (S213 in FIG. 123), 1 is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol stops (S221 in FIG. 122).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (electric decoration units 29 to 33, decoration lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation) Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, and other devices 228 are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119.

  As shown in FIG. 118A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for game control. .

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table for selecting effect information used in the reach navigation effect described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation effect selection table 222b is a table used to set a reach navigation effect that is executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the navigation effect selection table 222b is provided with a first navigation effect selection table 222b1 and a second navigation effect selection table 222b2. Here, the reach navigation effect will be briefly described. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation effect is an effect that suggests and informs the contents of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), and the small area Dm4 (FIG. 112). This is a sub-effect that is executed at the time of reference. This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a moving display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, an informing unit Dm4c for indicating and informing the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. It is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

  The reach navigation effect described above is set so that the character Dm4b can move a plurality of times on the time gauge Dm4a. Among them, the effect related to the first movement is the first navigation effect, and the effect related to the second transition is the second navigation. Set as production. The first navigation effect and the second navigation effect are configured such that different times can be selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b, and the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect selected by the navigation effect selection table 222b are combined. Various production patterns can be set.

  The first navigation effect selection table 222b1 is a table that is referred to when selecting the first navigation effect. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected as the remaining fluctuation time when the first navigation effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed 30 seconds after the start of the change, so that when the super reach (change time 60 seconds) is set as the change pattern of the special symbol, When the remaining navigation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds and special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining time when selecting the first navigation effect is selected. The variation time is 60 seconds.

  If the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, an effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and “100 to If it is “199”, an effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 69”, an effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect, and “70 to If it is “199”, an effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected as the first navigation effect.

  In this way, since the remaining navigation time when selecting the second navigation effect to be described later can be made different by configuring the effect pattern of different times in the first navigation effect, the reach navigation effect effect pattern Can be set more complicated. In addition, when a special reach with a high degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery is won as the special symbol variation pattern is set (when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), the super reach is set Since the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the rate of setting the variation pattern of 30 seconds as the first navigation effect is larger than (when the remaining change time is 30 seconds), the player is the first Isn't this change developed into special reach by looking at the degree of progress of the production navigation? Can be played while predicting.

  In the first navigation effect, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used, and the effect speed pattern of 20 seconds and the effect pattern of 30 seconds are set by changing the moving speed of the character Dm4b that is the moving display unit. It is possible. Specifically, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b in the effect pattern of 30 seconds, and a character imitating a rabbit is set in the effect pattern of 20 seconds. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the moving speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, a plurality of effect patterns can be set, thereby reducing the data capacity of reach navigation effects. be able to.

  In this control example, as described above, since the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the moving speed on the time gauge Dm4a, it is only necessary to look at the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the jackpot expectation degree is configured to be predictable, it may be set so that the moving speed is different using the same character. By configuring in this way, only the player who experienced the reach navigation effect a plurality of times can grasp that the character movement speed of the current reach navigation effect is different from the character movement speed of the previous reach navigation effect. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect for a player who has played a game for a long time.

  Further, in the present control example, it is set so that the moving speed of the character Dm4b is not changed during the first navigation effect. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation effect. Note that the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed during the first navigation effect without being limited thereto. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation effect.

  The second navigation effect selection table 222b2 is a table that is referred to when selecting the second navigation effect using the remaining variation time after the effect pattern of the first navigation effect is selected, and the remaining time storage area 223h. The effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected based on the remaining variation time stored in the and the last digit value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, that is, the super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. When the second effect pattern is selected, the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, so “second 10 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. In the second time, the character Dm4b arrives at the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first effect (see FIG. 113 (a)), and then the character Dm4b again moves on the time gauge Dm4a. This shows that the production starts (see FIG. 113 (b)). In this control example, a maximum of the third movement effect can be set.

  Next, when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 30 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. If the last digit value of the effect counter 223f is “0-3”, “second 10 seconds, third 20 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect, and if “4-6”, “Second time 20 seconds, third time 10 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect. If “7-9”, “second time 30 seconds” is selected.

  When the remaining variation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and further, the effect pattern of 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect, If the last digit value of the effect counter 223f is “0-3”, “second 10 seconds, third 30 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect, and if “4-6”, the second “2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds” is selected as the navigation effect. If “7-9”, “2nd 30 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds” is selected as the second navigation effect.

  As described above, when setting an effect pattern for a reach navigation effect, it is possible to easily create a complex effect pattern by dividing the effect period into a first navigation effect and a second navigation effect. Can do. Further, in this control example, when the effect pattern of the second navigation effect is selected, only the last digit value of the value of the effect counter 223f is referred to. Thereby, since it is possible to independently select a plurality of effect patterns within one process using one effect counter, the processing load when setting the effect patterns can be reduced. There is an effect.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, and the stop A type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Detailed description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 used for the notice effect and various lotteries. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during the jackpot game.

  The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining variation time referred to when selecting the effect pattern of reach navigation effects. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the change time based on the acquired change pattern is set (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is displayed. It is updated to the remaining fluctuation time after setting (S2104 in FIG. 141), and cleared when the setting of reach navigation effects is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

  By using this remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, first, information indicating that the remaining variation time is 60 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns having an effect period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds as the first effect. Then, when a production pattern of 40 seconds is selected as the production pattern of the first production, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated, and 20 seconds is set as the remaining variation time. Thereafter, the second effect can be selected using the remaining period based on the remaining variation time. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce processing when selecting an effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

  The variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the selected effect pattern in the reach navigation effect of selecting the change pattern in stages. In the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the main effect selected corresponding to the variation pattern is set (S2101 in FIG. 141) and is selected. An effect pattern for the first navigation effect is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then an effect pattern for the selected second navigation effect is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol ( Fluctuation effect) and notice effect are controlled.

  FIG. 120 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Yes. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (not shown) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all shown in the third symbol display device. 81. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in 81, and the image controller 237 displays the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling from left to right in the horizontal direction. Is drawn. As a result, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 has been entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a predetermined sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to the display related to the command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the more opportunities for the ball to pass through the normal symbol start port 66, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be more opportunities for winning the normal symbol. . Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the second winning opening 140 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol is released as a normal symbol jackpot and the ball becomes the second winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 140, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described instead. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Is described. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined.

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later is created, and the transfer data From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified by the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. The drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111 (b)) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 111 (b) S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 123B). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list, which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list describing the contents of drawing instructions is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list, which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 111 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later And the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created. Add to list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Details of the drawing list will be described here. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 111 (b ))), The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting display areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) for prohibiting the display of the character symbol and the point symbol during the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed in the point effect. . In the point effect, since the period in which the character symbol and the point symbol are displayed is set three times in total, the first to third prohibited areas corresponding to each period (first period to third period). A storage area 223m is provided. Thereby, since different prohibited areas can be set in each period, it is possible to increase production variations.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115 (a)). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115 (a)). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 135. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and a through associated with the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is executed. A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display and the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When the jackpot is B, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning opening scenario is set (S217). Is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

  On the other hand, if the current lottery result is out of the process of S216 (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter 203t (S221). When the process of S218 or S221 described above is completed, a stop command is set (S219), and this process ends.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S302).

  If the value of the probability variation counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is the probability variation state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and a special for high probability Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random values set in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 116 (a)). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  In this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited thereto, it is determined that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpots. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when the current state is not the probability variation state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. Since it is (low probability gaming state), based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116 (a)), A lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one “0” is set. It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

  In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A or big hit B). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117A) (S307).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S305 that the symbol is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display mode at the time of separation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Although illustration is omitted, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of each decided fluctuation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first winning port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning slot 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball. The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 129) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as that for the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140. The only difference with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 140 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), a pre-read process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role associated with the second winning opening 140 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning prize opening 140 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the second per random symbol table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 116 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 116 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit for the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls out The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second winning opening 140 Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hits of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the case of low probability of normal symbols, Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display on the second symbol display device is terminated when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 125, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is started. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, and the sphere has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 129), first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) or the start winning process (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, the ending command, the notification command, and the error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, execution of the big hit effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 123), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125) or the process of S521, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 125). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 127 has been executed, the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S98 is performed at the timing when the series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization process (S801) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed, and a special winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) S218 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). As for the special symbol jackpot, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1101. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In the processing of S1102, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the number of rounds command is set (S1105), and this process ends. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round is started is set as the round number command. The current number of rounds can be grasped by adding the number-of-rounds command every time the number-of-rounds command is received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. As a result, the amount of command data output from the main controller 110 can be reduced. The content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including the round number information of a newly started round may be set. In this way, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the number of rounds on the voice lamp control device 113 side (data stored due to a power failure or the like has been deleted), the latest information is obtained each time a new round is started. The round information of the player can be received, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. In the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variable solenoid 65k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1006 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game ends without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF just in case of the processing of S1009. In this control example, the start timing of the endin effect is set to be after the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example) after the game of the last round ends (the door 65f1 is closed), but the game of the last round ends. The ending effect may be executed immediately after the completion. In this case, it is only necessary to execute an abnormal process for the ball won in the variable winning device 65 during the ending period.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 132, the details of the ending process (S1010) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202). If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t (S1203), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing the probability variation switch 65e3, and to set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. In the process of S1008, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), a notification process is executed (S1011). Here, the details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1011).

  In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed when it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1305 processing that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this processing ends. Here, when the 2-second counter is set in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after the 12th round, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, since the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to suppress the jackpot type being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), a notification command is set. (S1304). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the winning process (S1012) will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1012).

  In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1401). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the open / close door 65f1 is opened to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is issued. Set. Thereafter, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1402: No), the processing of S1404 is executed.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). Thereafter, the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the open / close door 65f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the processing of S1408 is executed.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1409). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1411). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). Thereafter, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1415). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation is changed. The game can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present control example) (S1418). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to off (S1419). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1420), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball removal time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 130, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1013). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality process (S1013). In the abnormality process (S1013), a process for monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503). Thereafter, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is discriminated (S1507).

  If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the processing of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Thereafter, the process of S1509 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B is set.

  In the processing of S1509, the remaining sphere timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining sphere timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1716 (see FIG. 137) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), it executes a power-off process in S1716. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1714 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1714 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1716, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1716, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the decoration lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1716 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1608. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1611, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1609 is that when the process from S1604 to S1606 is reached via the process in S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1604. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1712 without performing the processes in S1702 to S1811. In S1701, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, since S1702 to S1811 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1712 and the command determination process of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the decoration lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1708 described later are set (S1703), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1704). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114. In addition, it monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the electrical decoration units 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1709, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110.

  When the processing of S1710 is completed, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In the process of S1712, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination processing (S1711) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 138, S1711), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110. It is further determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to the main process. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c to the display control device 114 is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning prize) or a special symbol lottery is performed. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1808. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when a start winning is detected or when a special symbol is drawn even if the value deviates from the value of the two reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1807, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received (S1809). In the process of S1809, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S1809: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the jackpot related process (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1809 that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process proceeds to S1811.

  In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  When it is determined that the notification command output from the main control device 110 has been received by the processing of S1811, the notification sound corresponding to the received command (in this control example, “see the liquid crystal”) is selected. A display command for notification is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot related processing (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1810). This jackpot related process (S1810) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot related command has been received.

  In the jackpot related process, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1901). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), a display opening command is set (S1902), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S1903). If it is determined in the processing of S1903 that a round number command has been received (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1903 that a round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that an ending command has been received (S1906: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this process is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in step S1906 that an ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether a V-pass command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2016: Yes), in order to execute an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and the probability change game state is given, A display V effect command is set (S1910), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and therefore the process proceeds to S2007. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 138). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004). If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004: Yes), then reach navigation effect setting processing is executed (S2005). The reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 141. However, when the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, the third symbol display device 81 is used. This is a process for setting a reach navigation effect (sub-effect) that guides the main variation effect (main effect) executed in step.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when the acquired variation pattern type is not a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, that is, when the acquired variation pattern type is out of range or a variation pattern type corresponding to normal reach (S2004). : No), based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Here, the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquired variation pattern type and the effect contents (expected degree, effect period) of the main effect are guided to the player. The secondary production to be set is set.

  When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the obtained change pattern type, the display change pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. The change pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2101). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. This is an effect performed in the central part of (see).

  When the processing of S2101 is completed, the remaining time storage area 223h is then set based on the obtained variation pattern (S2102). In the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005), a process of setting the sub effect in stages based on the variation time corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type is executed. Therefore, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern acquired this time by this process is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the currently obtained variation pattern type is the variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to the special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process.

  Although not shown, in this control example, since the timing at which the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of the change, a change pattern type with a change time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, processing for subtracting 30 seconds, which is a sub-effects execution impossible period, is performed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

  Next, the first navigation effect is selected from the first navigation effect selection table 222b1, and the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation effect is selected using the first navigation effect selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119 (b), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are displayed. A first navigation effect period is set based on the value, and variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the set first navigation effect period. Thus, the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation effect is 60 seconds and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “80”, the first “30 seconds” is selected as the navigation effect period. Then, the production pattern information corresponding to the first navigation production period “30 seconds” is selected and set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

  When the processing of S2103 is completed, the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is then updated based on the first navigation effect period selected in the first navigation effect (S2104). As a result, the remaining variation time for setting the reach navigation effect as the subsidiary effect is calculated. Specifically, when “60 seconds” is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h and the first navigation effect period “30 seconds” is selected, the remaining time storage area 223h is obtained by this process. The remaining fluctuation time is updated to “30 seconds”.

  Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation effect is produced. The setting is completed, and the process proceeds to S2107. That is, when the same period as the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period in which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is performed only by the first navigation effect. Will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is the variation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to super reach, and “30 seconds” is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. In this case, the first navigation effect period “30 seconds” is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2105 that the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table, and the variation pattern is selected. Update to the temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119 (c), and the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired effect counter 223f are selected. Based on the value, the variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the second navigation effect is selected, the remaining change time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds, and the acquired last digit of the effect counter 223f is “0”. In this case, as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period “30 seconds”, the effect pattern information “second time 10 seconds” and “third time 20 seconds” is selected, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

  As described above, the second navigation effect is configured to generate the effect pattern using the remaining fluctuation time after the first navigation effect is set. Therefore, rather than setting the production pattern for all the periods in which the reach navigation production can be set, the production pattern can be divided into the first navigation production period and the second navigation production period. By combining them after setting, it is possible to diversify the production pattern of reach navigation effects and to suppress the player from getting bored.

  In this control example, the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set is divided into the first navigation effect period and the other period, but it may be further divided. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation effect (S2016), it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period, and after executing the process of S2016, the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h. It may be configured to determine again whether S is 0 (S2105). Accordingly, it is possible to set a reach navigation effect corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time after setting the second navigation effect by the same process as the process of setting the second navigation effect, and the process can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 141, the description will be continued. When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 in the processing of S2105 (S2105: No) or when the processing of S2106 is finished, next, the variation pattern for display is based on the information of the variation pattern temporary storage area. A command is set (S2107). Here, as the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area, the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 set in the processing of S2101, and the sub-effect Corresponding to the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the first effect navigation set in the processing of S2103 constituting the reach navigation effect and the effect pattern of the second effect navigation set in the processing of S2106 This is a display variation pattern command.

  When the process of S2107 is completed, the information set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is cleared (S2108), the information regarding the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

  In this control example, the main effect and the sub-effect, which are executed by the third symbol display device 81 that is executed based on the acquired variation pattern, are set and output as one display variation pattern command. Although the configuration in which the number of commands is reduced is used, the display main effect change pattern command and the display sub effect change pattern command may be output as separate commands. Thereby, for example, the main effect is displayed on the layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114, and the sub-effect can be displayed on a layer on the near side of the layer on which the main effect is displayed. Thus, when the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to easily execute control such as displaying or deleting the sub-effect.

  Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily perform control such as outputting an additional command for the sub-effect and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main effect is variably displayed. Specifically, during the period from the execution of the main effect to the execution of the sub-effect (30 seconds in this control example), the sub-effect is used based on the operation content of the executed frame button 22. It is possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) to be displayed, or to change the contents of the index displayed on the notification unit Dm4c, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play.

<Control processing executed by display control apparatus in first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 142). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the boot program execution is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2302 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2301 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently setting the head address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2301. In addition, the processing of S2303 to S2305 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2302.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2203, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2204, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2205). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 154 (a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 154 (a)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. Can do. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2501: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2502) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2503) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2502), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2503), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2505) are used. Then, a drawing list is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). As a counter updated by the processing of S2507, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, Transition to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2603).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2604). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2706), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2704, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2604 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606). If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Details of the stop type command process (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2801), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the change effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2802).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2803), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2802 is described. In the task process (S2504) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2802 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2803, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2802.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2606 that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), it is then determined whether there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608). If there is a related command, display jackpot related command processing is executed (S2609), and the processing returns to S2601.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 147 to 149, the display jackpot related command processing (S 2609) described above, which is one processing of the command determination processing (see S 2502 and FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

  In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command ( (S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3003). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2901 that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903). If there is a round number command for use (S2903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

  Details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3102).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2903 that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905). If there is an ending command (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

  Details of the ending command process (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3202).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3201, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3204). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2905 that there is no display ending command (S2905: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2907). If there is a V effect command for use (S2907: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot related command processing is terminated.

  Here, the details of the V effect command process (S2908) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command process. This V effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command process, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3302).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2907 that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot related command processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2608 that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the back image change command is determined. If there is (S2610: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 150A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described. FIG. 150A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of a back image change accompanying reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S3401). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3402), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3401 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3402. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S3402, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2610 that there is no back image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2612), and there is an error command. If (S2612: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

  Details of the error command process (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (b). FIG. 150B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3502). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the error frame command process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3501, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3502 is determined and the error type is set. Processing is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3502, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  In the process of S2601, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), The processing of S2602 to S2613 is executed again. The processing of S2601 to S2613 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2601 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), the simple command determination process (S2508) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151 to FIG. 153, details of the above-described display setting process (S2503) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3602 to S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3602), and then S3603 to S3604. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3604).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3701).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3603: No), then the process proceeds to S3605.

  In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3801, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3803). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S3806), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3802: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3606 together with the warning image expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3608: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S3609).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d because the confirmed display effect has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect is performed. (S3610), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3611). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2504), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3615 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmation display flag 233z is not on but off (S3609: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S3617), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3618). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3621), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  If the demonstration display flag 233y is turned on in the process of S3616 (S3616: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, details of the transfer setting process (S2505) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3901, that is, if it is off (S3901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 154 (b). FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4001), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4001: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4002). In the process of S4002, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4002 that the transfer process has not ended (S4002: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Also, as a result of the process of S4001, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4003). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144 (b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144 (b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the display setting process (S2503) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102). If it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In addition, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

  In the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4102: No), the process of S4103 and S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4106).

  In the process of S4106, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4106 (S4106: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Also, as a result of the process of S4105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4105: No), the process proceeds to S4107.

  In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). If the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4103 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4109). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4110), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4111). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4113, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4113 (S4113: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4114). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4114, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2505), a drawing list is generated (S4201). That is, in the process of S4201, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information for instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S4202 (S4203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 144B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the reach navigation effect is executed as the effect display executed in the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

  On the other hand, in this control example, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect is advanced by an operation of continuously pressing (strikes) the frame button 22 and an operation of pressing the frame button 22 in a timely manner. The slot effect that stops the composite pressing effect to be displayed and the pseudo symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by pressing the frame button 22 is a continuous slot effect in a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). A predetermined value (points) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a point effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) is executed is executed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Thereby, various effects can be provided to the player, the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Here, among the effects executed in this control example, the composite pressing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time point when the composite press effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157 (b) shows that the composite press effect being executed is at the effect notification timing D3b. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the timing push period Db1, and FIG. 158 (b) FIG. 159A is a diagram illustrating another example of when the composite pressing effect being executed reaches the timing pressing period Db1, and FIG. 159 (a) shows that the frame button 22 is operated during the timing pressing period of the composite pressing effect being executed. FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a point in time when the currently executed composite press effect has reached the second consecutive hit period Dc.

  This combined press effect is a press effect in which three press effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left of the main display area Dm is based on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22 in each press effect period. The effect that the meter of the meter display part D1 displayed on the side accumulates is executed. A privilege advantageous to the player is given when a predetermined amount of meter is accumulated in the meter display portion D1.

  When the combined press effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the press effect corresponding to the first consecutive hit period is executed. The third symbol display device 81 displays the meter display unit D1 described above, a button display D2 that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 for guiding a composite press effect, A comment column for guiding the contents of the effect in characters is displayed in the area below the main display area Dm.

  The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the effect of the combined press effect, and is controlled so that the meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each press effect (see FIG. 157 (b)). . In the meter display portion D1, a comment “Pick up the meter” is displayed as a comment for prompting the player to participate in the game. This meter display portion D1 has “V” displayed at the right end of the meter in the initial stage, and the special symbol jackpot is won as a benefit that is advantageous to the player by collecting the meter up to this “V”. Is notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the combined press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159 (a)). When the meter area is extended as shown in FIG. 159 (a), “VV” is displayed on the right end of the meter area, and a benefit (eg, 2 It is informed that the winning prize is given to the jackpot of the times.

  In addition, as the privilege given by the composite pressing effect, it is not limited to the above-described contents, for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed or collected by the player. Value information (points) may be given. Further, the display mode displayed with “V” and “VV” is not limited to this, and it is only necessary to display the condition for giving the privilege to the player so as to be visible. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set the degree of advantage for the privilege granted when reaching “V” and the privilege granted when reaching “VV”, and different benefits may be set. That's fine.

  The button display D2 is a display unit for informing the player of the operation content for the frame button 22, and is a schematic for repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 in the first continuous hitting period shown in FIG. 157 (a). A display and a comment of “continuous hits !!” are displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operation state of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, the button display blinks. If the player is operating the frame button 22, the display is changed to a display that does not emphasize by reducing or erasing. Thereby, it can suppress that the game guidance display to a player is made excessive. Furthermore, the button display D2 may be changed to a display that does not emphasize even when a period during which the player does not operate the frame button 22 has elapsed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to perform the frame button operation from being continuously highlighted, and to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  The effect gauge D3 is a display unit showing the overall flow of the composite press effect, and the composite press effect is displayed in a time series from the left side to the right side of the effect gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 157 (a)). it's shown. This effect gauge D3 is divided and displayed as a first continuous hit period Da, a timing press period Db1, and a second continuous hit period Dc in the order in which the press effects are executed, and the present is determined by the position of the moving body D3a moving on the effect gauge D3. It is configured so that the player can grasp the situation. In this way, in the composite press effect in which the press effects having different operation methods of the frame button 22 are continuously executed, by displaying the overall composite press effect and the state of each press effect so that the player can grasp the game, Production that is easy to understand for a person.

  In addition, since the moving body D3a is configured to move on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed, it is possible to grasp the period of the entire combined press effect based on the moving state of the moving body D3a. .

  Further, in the effect gauge D3, the effect notification timing D3b is set within the first continuous hit period Da. This effect notification timing D3b notifies in advance the content of the press effect that is executed during the timing push period Db1 that is executed after the first consecutive hit period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a arrives at the effect notification timing D3b during the combined press effect, guidance for the press effect executed in the next press effect period is displayed in the comment field described later. Thereby, the mode of the pressing effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the composite pressing effect, and a problem that an unintended operation is performed is suppressed. Note that the player's operation status with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, and the effect mode of the next press effect period may be set.

  In the comment field provided in the area below the main display area Dm, a comment explaining the game content of the combined press effect and a comment notifying the effect result are displayed. In FIG. 157 (a), a comment “Automatic striking is executed by long-pressing the button” is displayed. In the automatic continuous hitting, it is assumed that the frame button 22 is hit in a pseudo manner by a player performing a predetermined operation (long press operation for 2 seconds or more) during a pressing effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22. It is a control process. By executing this automatic continuous hitting, it is possible to entertain a continuous hitting effect even for a player who has difficulty in pressing the frame button 22 multiple times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (b), a description will be given of a case where the combined press effect has reached the effect notification timing D3b. When the combined press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the game guidance for the timing press period Db1, which is the next press effect period, is started while continuing the press effect in the first continuous hit period Da. Specifically, the timing gauge Db2 in which the area of the timing push period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be aimed at the timing push effect is displayed in the timing gauge. In the comment field, “Aim at the center of the x mark…” is displayed as a part of the game guidance in the timing push period Db1, which is the next push effect period.

  The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by extending the same period as the timing pushing period Db1. Therefore, it is displayed that the moving body D3a moves the timing gauge Db2 at the same time as the moving body D3a moves on the timing pushing period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing pressing period Db1, the speed at which the moving body D3a moves can be set faster than the speed at which the moving body D3a moves on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, the moving speed of the moving body D3a can be varied. By configuring in this way, the player can use the effect gauge D3 and the moving body D3a that moves on the effect gauge D3 at a constant speed to display to the player the period of the combined press effect. There is an effect that the presentation of timing display can be diversified without giving a sense of incongruity.

  Further, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 at the time when the effect notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing push effect that is executed this time, and it is possible to make it easier to plan the timing. There is.

  In FIG. 157 (b), the target Db3 that is the target of operating the frame button in the timing push effect is displayed at the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the timing is pushed by moving the displayed position to the end of the timing gauge Db2. You may enable it to set the difficulty of production. In addition, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) and (b), the case where the combined press effect has reached the timing press effect period will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where automatic continuous hitting is not performed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts to move in the right direction from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. Note that, as described above, the timing gauge Db2 is a display in which the region of the timing push period Db1 is extended. Therefore, the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing push period Db1 and the moving body D3a pass through the timing gauge Db2. The time required to do is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length approximately eight times as long as the timing push period Db1, so the speed of the moving body that passes through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing push period Db1. The speed of the moving body D3a is about 8 times.

  Further, the target Db3 indicating the timing of pressing the frame button 22 in the timing pressing effect flashes and is highlighted. Further, in the comment column, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed as a timing push effect and a diagram schematically showing pressing the frame button 22 are displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic continuous hitting is executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from FIG. 158 (a) described above is that the third symbol display device 81 has a display indicating that the current automatic hitting is in progress, and a comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment column. This is a change to “Hanase”. That is, in the case of automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing push effect while pressing the button, and therefore cannot perform the action of pressing the button in that state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the automatic repeated hitting is executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing push effect period is reached, the content of the game guidance displayed in the comment column is changed from “Press”. In addition to changing to “Hanase”, the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing push effect is separated from the pressed timing (the timing at which the operation signal of the frame button 22 is turned on) (the operation signal of the frame button 22). Change to the timing when is turned off. As a result, in the combined press effect, even if the timing press effect is executed in a state in which the automatic press operation is performed in the previous press effect (first continuous hit effect Da), the effect is executed without causing any trouble to the player. can do.

  In the timing push effect period Db1 described in FIG. 158 (a) or FIG. 158 (b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158 (a)). When a pressing operation, or a releasing operation in FIG. 158 (b), is performed, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the target Db3, and the timing is displayed in the comment column. A comment of “perfect!” Is displayed to notify that the frame button 22 is operated well. Further, the meter display unit D1 is extended and displayed as a privilege for which the timing pushing effect has been successful, and this is notified in the comment column.

  Even at this timing, the moving body D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. Accordingly, the progress of the combined press effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3 while the result of the timing press effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the result of the timing push effect and the progress of the composite press effect.

  Next, the case where the timing push effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second consecutive hit period Dc has been reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). When the second consecutive hit period Dc is reached, a display for repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as in the first consecutive hit period. The difference from the display of the first continuous hit period described above is that the game result of the timing push effect is displayed in the area of the timing push period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display unit D1 is the game result of the timing push effect. It is a point in which a privilege based on is given. Since other display contents are the same, description thereof is omitted.

  And if the 2nd continuous hitting period passes, it will arrive at the composite press effect result alerting | reporting period D3d, and the result of this composite press effect will be alert | reported. As a result, the composite pressing effect ends. As described above, in the combined pressing effect of the present embodiment, as the operation of the frame button 22, the continuous hit effect for performing the continuous hitting operation for pressing the frame button 22 continuously, and the timing pressing for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner. The timing push effect for performing the operation is set to be executed continuously, and the result of the entire combined press effect is set based on the result of each press effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to make the result of the effect sufficient, there is an effect that the player can actively participate in the game.

  In addition, since the player has an automatic continuous hitting function for assisting the continuous hitting operation, the player can easily perform the frame button operation. Here, if the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function during the continuous hit effect enters the timing push effect while pressing the frame button 22, the frame button is automatically pressed repeatedly immediately after the timing push effect is started. The problem that the situation where 22 was pushed down occurred. Therefore, a period in which the automatic continuous hitting function is valid and an invalid period are provided, and the automatic continuous hitting function is set to invalid during the timing push effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed due to automatic striking during the timing push effect, and there is an effect that an effect unintended by the player can be generated.

  Furthermore, with the above-described solution alone, it is possible to prevent erroneous pressing due to automatic repeated hitting for a player who has entered the timing push effect while the automatic continuous hitting function is being executed, that is, with the frame button 22 being pressed. However, there was a problem that it was not possible to participate in the timing push production. Specifically, when the same timing push effect is executed simply by disabling the automatic continuous hitting function, a game with a content such as “Press the button with good timing” for a player who has already pressed the frame button 22 The guidance will be displayed, and the player will be confused by the displayed content, and there is a problem that the timing push effect cannot be enjoyed.

  Therefore, in this control example, the operation state of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing when the timing push effect is executed, and when the automatic continuous hitting function is set to ON, the content of the timing push effect is set with good timing. Changed to the effect of releasing the button. Thus, a player who has already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be released in a timely manner, and can participate in an effect in which the operation of the frame button 22 is executed in time. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this control example, the pressing effect is switched in a state where the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is continued in the composite pressing effect, but the operation invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the pressing effect is switched. May be provided. In this case, it is preferable to inform the player of the content of the next press effect within the operation invalid period. Thereby, since it is possible to suppress the simultaneous display of the information display related to the pressing effect being executed and the information display related to the pressing effect to be executed next, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect for the player. There is an effect.

  Next, among the effects executed in this control example, a continuous slot effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous slot effect executed in this control example. The continuous slot effect is an effect in which a slot effect in which a pseudo symbol that is rotated and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 is stopped and executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (30 seconds). The effect result is displayed by combining the combinations of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the slot effects that are executed a plurality of times. Specifically, during the continuous slot production, all the combinations of predetermined symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) are stopped and displayed, thereby giving the player a bonus (big hit game). .

  As shown in FIG. 160, when the continuous slot effect is executed, first, slot effect 1 (initial slot effect) is executed. This slot effect 1 (first slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 11 seconds (2 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). Is set as a frame button operation effective period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-) in the second half of the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). 2) When the frame button operation effective period (BT) of slot effect 1 has elapsed (13 to 15 seconds after the execution of the continuous slot effect), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop of one row of effective lines) Display), then, the process shifts to slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), and the second slot effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) for the first 6 seconds (between 2 seconds and 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first time slot effect). 1-1), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed within 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) ) Is executed. Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the slot button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 1 (first time slot effect), the process shifts to the special slot effect as it is without displaying the pseudo symbol stopped. To do.

  This special slot effect is an effect in which the frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set, and an effect is executed in which the pseudo symbol that has been rotated and displayed is stopped regardless of the player's operation, The display mode of any one of the effective lines 1 to 3 is determined at random (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot effect ends.

  The frame button operation effective period (BT) is not set in the special slot effect described above, although the frame button operation effective period of 11 seconds is set in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). A player who does not operate the button 22 may be a player who dislikes the operation of the frame button 22, so that the effect of operating the frame button 22 again during the slot continuous effect is not displayed. It is. By setting such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  In this control example, a special slot effect in which the rotation display of the pseudo symbol is automatically stopped is performed as an effect in which the frame button operation valid period is not set. However, the operation of the frame button 22 is not necessary. For example, the slot effect may be ended and a different effect may be executed.

  Next, slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) the operation of the frame button 22 is performed. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) is performed only when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the slot effect 1 (first slot effect). It is a slot effect to be executed.

  If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed). 18-20 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and thereafter, the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is entered.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect), the extended slot effect is executed without stopping the pseudo symbol. This extended slot effect is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, and a frame button operation in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 6 seconds (22 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). It is set as a valid period (BT).

  When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) during the extended slot effect, after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of two rows of valid lines), and the continuous slot effect ends.

  Next, slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (22 to 28 seconds after the execution of the continuous slot effect) is the operation of the frame button 22. It is set as a valid frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) in the slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect). is there.

  If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (after the continuous slot effect is executed). 28-30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and the continuous slot effect ends.

  Also, even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (continuous slot effect is executed). 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one effective line), and the continuous slot effect ends. In slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), the combination of pseudo symbols that are displayed in a stopped state when the frame button 22 is operated or not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) is a predetermined combination ( The ratio of “AAA”, “BBB”, and “CCC”) is set to be different, and the predetermined combination described above is set to be more easily stopped when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Finally, slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) will be described. Slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is an effect with an effect period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 11 seconds (17 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). Is set as a frame button operation effective period (BT). This slot effect 4 (normal slot effect) is the second half of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot effect 1 (first slot effect) (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed). This is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated.

  When the frame button 22 is operated in the second half 9 seconds (19 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect). After the frame button operation valid period (BT) elapses (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one or two valid lines), and the continuous slot effect is displayed. Ends.

  On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first two seconds (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed) in the frame button operation effective period (BT), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after the elapse of 19 seconds, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and the process proceeds to the slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect) described above.

  Further, even when the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of the slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), after the frame button operation effective period (BT) elapses (the continuous slot effect is executed). 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (stop display of one row of effective lines), and the continuous slot effect ends. In slot effect 4 (normal slot effect), when the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT), whether the stop display of the pseudo symbol becomes one line or two lines of the effective line. It is set to be determined by lottery, and one is selected at a ratio of 1: 1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the display mode of the above-described continuous slot effect will be described. 161 (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in a continuous slot effect. First, with reference to FIG. 161 (a), the first slot effect executed first among the continuous slot effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the first slot effect, a pseudo symbol sequence having a plurality of pseudo symbols is displayed by rotating three rows, and a frame button 22 for guiding the press of the frame button 22 is schematically displayed below the pseudo symbol sequence. And a time gauge indicating the frame button effective operation period are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display unit for displaying a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols (“AAA”, “BBB”, “CCC”) stopped and displayed in the current continuous slot effect is displayed.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 161 (b). FIG. 161 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol sequences are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161 (b), the three pseudo symbol sequences that have been rotated and displayed are stopped ("AAA"), and the guide map and the time gauge are deleted. When the symbol stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the predetermined pseudo symbols described above, “Get” is displayed at a corresponding position in the history display unit.

  Next, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the first slot effect is within the range of the operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (c), and the normal slot effect is started. In the normal slot effect, similar to the first slot effect described above, three pseudo symbol sequences are rotated and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol sequences are displayed in a stopped manner. It is. A difference from the first slot effect is that a stop display mode in which there are two effective lines as shown in FIG. 161 (c) is selected as a stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol sequence stops. Specifically, the left and right symbol sequences of the three pseudo symbol sequences are stopped two seconds after the normal slot effect is started, and the player stops the middle symbol sequence by operating the frame button 22.

  When the combination of pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot effect is a predetermined pseudo symbol combination, “GET” is displayed on the history display section. Here, when all of “A”, “B”, and “C” displayed in the history display section are acquired, a privilege (big hit game) is given after the end of the continuous slot effect.

  As described above, when the continuous slot effect is executed by a normal frame button operation, two slot effects (first slot effect and normal slot effect) are performed, and three combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols are generated by the slot effect. The game nature to acquire is provided.

  On the other hand, when the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot effect is within the range of the operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process proceeds to FIG. 161 (d) and the first shortened slot effect is started. The In the first shortened slot effect, as in the case of the first slot effect described above, the three pseudo symbol rows are rotated and displayed by rotating the frame button 22 by the player. This is an effect in which the columns are stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol columns are stopped and displayed on one effective line ("BBB"). Thereafter, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161 (e) is executed.

  Since the second shortened slot effect is the same effect as the first shortened slot effect described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the next time the player operates the frame button 22, An effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. Thereby, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect of the effect of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the multiple slot effects that are executed during the effect of the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the effect of the continuous slot effect. The result of the continuous slot effect is more advantageous to the player as the number of slot effects is increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can be more motivated to operate the frame button 22, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in a single slot effect. You can have expectations until the end.

  Note that a player who refuses to operate the frame button 22 will be dissatisfied with the player because a special slot effect that does not require a frame button operation is executed after the end of the first slot effect. Absent.

  Next, among the effects executed in this control example, the point effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when the “normal mode” is selected, and FIG. 162 (b) shows the “dice roller mode” being selected. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the case.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this control example will not be described in detail, but in this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for shifting the game mode is performed, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the game mode. In the case of winning the transition lottery), it is configured to shift between two game modes (“normal mode” and “dice mode”) having different display modes on the third symbol display device 81.

  The “normal mode” is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol becomes reach, a predetermined character (“rabbit”, “turtle”, “hero”). ) Is a game mode in which an effect in which any or all of them appear is executed. In the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) for accumulating and displaying the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example are displayed. In any one of P1, P2 and P3), when the accumulated points become a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a privilege (reach effect) is given to the player.

  On the other hand, in the “Dice Roll Mode”, the variation display of the 3rd symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player by the progress of the game (not shown) using the dice in the main display area. This is a game mode in which an effect is performed. Then, similarly to the above-described “normal mode”, two indicators (P4 to P5) are displayed, which are displayed by accumulating points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example, and any one of the indicators (P4 to P5) is displayed. In P4 or P5), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points), a privilege (reach effect) is given to the player.

  First, the point effect executed in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162A shows a display example in the “normal mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the “normal mode”, three indicators are displayed, and “rabbit”, “turtle”, and “hero” are associated with each indicator. This is because a point associated with each character is set to the point (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) given to the player in the point effect, and the type of point given to the player Points are given to each indicator (P1 to P3) in accordance with.

  The characters “Rabbit”, “Kame”, and “Hero” associated with each indicator (P1 to P3) are displayed in the third symbol variation effect or on-hold symbol display (not shown) executed in the “normal mode”. The point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed based on the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation effect with the situation where the points in the point effect are accumulated. Note that it is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point effect with the third symbol effect display, and the point type may be determined at random. Thereby, the point matched with characters other than the character displayed by the 3rd design effect display reaches | attains predetermined amount (7 points), and it becomes possible to give a player an unexpectedness.

  Furthermore, in this control example, any one of a plurality of characters (“Rabbit”, “Kame”, “Hero”) appearing in the third symbol variation effect is displayed as a point effect, and the displayed character is displayed at that time. Is set so that a high point is awarded when the character matches the character displayed as the subject of the third symbol variation display.

  In addition, the period for displaying the character as the point effect is set three times during one point effect, and the point is set to be given at each timing. This makes it possible to further associate the progress of the third symbol variation effect (the presence or absence of the main character or the type of the character) with the point effect, and make it easier for the player to understand the complex effect. There is an effect.

  In this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect is displayed in the point effect, but other than that, it is associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation effect. A display object (for example, “sword” related to “hero”) may be used. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that a player can play a game, comparing the display thing displayed with a point effect with the content of the 3rd symbol fluctuation effect, and predicting the presence or absence of a relevance.

  The point effect may be associated with other than the third symbol variation effect. For example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, the point effect may be associated with the character displayed after the change or output from the audio output device. You may associate with the voice of a character. In this way, by associating some effect provided to the player with the point effect, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

  Further, in this control example, it is configured such that points are accumulated on the indicator at various timings during the special symbol variation display (during the third symbol variation), and the number of points is the maximum value (in FIG. 162, the seventh level). ), An effect with a higher jackpot expectation is executed than at least the variation effect of the third symbol being executed at that time.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not any indicator reaches the maximum value by the point effect and can execute the game while expecting the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

  A mode in which points are displayed in the point effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in this control example, the “normal mode” and the “dice roller mode” are set as the plurality of presentation modes by the sound lamp control device 114 as the presentation mode setting means. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating an effect mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process (described later) executed by the sound lamp control device 114. In addition, you may comprise so that a some production | presentation aspect can be set by operating the frame button 22. FIG.

  Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as step information of a plurality of steps, and the step information is variably displayed by displaying points as variable information on the third symbol display device 81. The

  Next, referring to FIG. 162 (b), the point effect executed in the “dice roller mode” will be described. FIG. 162B is a diagram showing a display example in the “dice mode”. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the “dice mode”, two indicators simulating the dice are displayed, and the accumulated value of the points is displayed by the dice eyes. The two dice associated with each indicator are configured in a display manner similar to that of the dice used in the “dice effect” executed in the “dice mode”.

  As described above, since the indicator is displayed in the display mode related to the game mode being executed in the point effect of this control example, it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a sense of discomfort in each effect. be able to.

  Moreover, in each game mode, since the types of points accumulated by the point effects and the upper limit value are set differently, different point effects can be enjoyed for each game mode. In addition, about the point given in point production, the point standard value given beforehand is determined, the point standard value is converted so that it corresponds to the indicator display of the game mode currently being performed, and the converted point is converted. It is good to comprise so that it may give to a player. Thereby, the control which gives a point can be simplified.

  Further, when the game mode is switched while the point effect is being executed, the points already stored in the indicator may be converted into points corresponding to the game mode of the transfer destination and displayed. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already given during the point effect is stored in a storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 114 which is the stage information storage means, and the game mode It is preferable to convert the point reference value stored at the timing of the shift to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode of the transfer destination and to control the display. Thereby, the indicator display corresponding to game mode can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point effect will be described. FIG. 163 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm, and FIG. 163 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) to be given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect being executed in the main display area Dm. Has been decided. Thereby, it is suppressed that the point displayed on the main display area Dm overlaps with the third symbol variation effect and gives the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  First, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. Has been. The point where the point is displayed is determined in units of the divided small areas. In this control example, since the display mode for displaying the points in units of each small area is stored in advance, the small area where the current point display is executed is determined based on the effect mode of the third symbol variation effect. The point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, it is only necessary to execute the process of determining the display location, and there is an effect that the process can be simplified.

  Note that a method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, first, a point display image to be executed in the current point display is determined, and then a small region in which point display is performed is determined. Good.

  Further, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine. However, the main display area Dm may be divided into a larger number, and instead of executing point display within one small area, a plurality of small areas are displayed. Point display may be executed using.

  Next, a specific example of the point display will be described with reference to FIG. When the point display is performed while the effect shown in FIG. 163 (b) is executed as the third symbol variation effect, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small not used. As a result of the determination, a small area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) that is not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, an allowable area that allows point display is set.

  Then, an image related to “the hero” is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which the current point is given to the selected small region Dm12 among the small regions (small regions Dm11 to Dm13) set as the allowable region. Then, display of 2 points is executed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as an image that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect, two of the indicator points corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162 (a) are accumulated.

  In this control example, an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect is displayed, so that the player can earn more points than other images are displayed. Is set. Therefore, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect before the point is displayed with the character image that is the main body of the third symbol variation effect, and determines whether or not the points that can be acquired in the current point effect are high. Can be predicted. Therefore, it can be seen while expecting the continuation of the production, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the character image is displayed in the point effect, and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the point display timing. The points may be accumulated in an indicator corresponding to the character that is the main subject of the third symbol variation effect.

  Furthermore, for example, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the cause of the change in the reserved image is due to the point effect or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed reserved image indicates a big win. The effect performed later can be watched.

  As described above, the point display location is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and further, the points are distributed based on the characters displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Point production that is easy to understand.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which point display is possible, the point display point can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect of the third symbol variation effect (the special symbol lottery result). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), when the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, Point display is performed on the small area Dm13 in the vicinity of the enemy “monster” as the subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol wins In this case, it is preferable to perform point display on the small area Dm11 that is in the vicinity of the “hero” who is the leading role as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points. Thereby, it becomes possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit by grasping the place where the player displays the points. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as a region where no point is displayed. For example, in one small region, When the ratio of the image to be occupied is calculated and the ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (less than 10%), the small area may be determined as an area that can display points. This makes it possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, the malfunction that the player who is gazing at the 3rd symbol change production misses a point display can be controlled.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

  FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a pressing scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added. Other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the pressed scenario table 222c will be described. FIG. 165 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressed scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), a normal press scenario 222c1, a long press press scenario 222c2, and a composite press scenario 222c3 are set in the press scenario table 222c.

  FIG. 165 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pressing scenario 222c1. In the normal pressing scenario 222c1, a period (normal pressing period) in which the normal button pressing is valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). It is a scenario. The information of the normal pressing scenario 222c1 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the normal pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is the normal pressing period based on the set information of the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

  In addition, a timing type is set for each period in which the button press is valid. By executing (displaying) the effect according to the timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22.

  Specifically, in the normal pressing scenario 222c1, the normal pressing period is set as the pressing period type for the value “5001 to 9000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. “OK” is set as the timing type. As will be described in detail later, the value of the push-down effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display is started and thereafter is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Therefore, a period of 5001 to 9000 ms from the start of the change is determined as the normal press period. Will be.

  Then, “END” information indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value “15001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this “END” information is acquired, and the pressing effect end processing is executed.

  In the case of the values “0 to 5000” and “9001 to 15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing becomes an invalid period.

  Next, FIG. 165 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the long press and hold scenario 222c2. In the long press press scenario 222c2, a period (long press press period) in which the long press button is enabled is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). Scenario. The information of the long press press scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the long press press effect is selected as the variation pattern, and the long press press period is set based on the set information of the press scenario storage area 223m. Is determined.

  Specifically, in the long press press scenario 222c2, the long press press period is set as the press period type and “OK” is set as the timing type for the value “5001 to 12000” of the press effect scenario counter 223k. Yes. That is, a period of 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the long press-pressing period. The long press pressing period is a period for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (long pressed) for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the long press depressing effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a character “Long press successful!” Is displayed) is executed based on a long press operation performed during the long press depressing period.

  Then, “END” information indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value “15001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, this “END” information is acquired, and the pressing effect end processing is executed.

  In the case of the values “0 to 5000” and “9001 to 15000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, there is no setting of the pressing period type, and the button pressing becomes an invalid period.

  Next, FIG. 165 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the composite press-down scenario 222c3. The composite pressing scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which a plurality of types of button pressings are valid is determined according to the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). The information of the combined pressing scenario 222c3 is set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m when the combined pressing effect is selected as the variation pattern, and is various pressing periods based on the set information of the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Is determined. In the present embodiment, only one type of composite pressing scenario is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

  Specifically, in the combined pressing scenario 222c3, for the value “5001 to 12000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the automatic pressing period is set as the pressing period type, and “OK” is set as the timing type. That is, a period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of fluctuation is determined as the auto-pressing period. The auto-pressing period is a period for executing auto-pressing based on the pressing of the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the auto-pressing effect, the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long-pressing operation is continued based on the long-pressing operation being performed during the auto-pressing period (for example, the frame button The effect of increasing the gauge by 22 consecutive hits) is executed.

  For the value “12001 to 13200” of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the press period type when the auto press is being performed, and the normal press effect is set when the non-auto press is being set, “NG” is set as the timing type.

  For the value “13201-13800” of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the press period type when the auto press is being performed, and the normal press effect is set when the non-auto press is being set, “OK” is set as the timing type.

  For the value “13801 to 15000” of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the release period is set as the press period type when the auto press is being performed, and the normal press effect is set when the non-auto press is being set, “NG” is set as the timing type.

  That is, when the auto is being pressed, a release effect that is an effect of releasing the frame button 22 is displayed. By releasing the frame button 22 during a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, an effect based on the timing type of “OK” ( For example, “Good timing!” Is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, a character “bad timing!”) Is displayed.

  When non-automatic pressing is in progress, a normal pressing effect that is an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 during a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of fluctuation, the timing type of “OK” is used. An effect (for example, a character “Good timing!”) Is displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed between 12001 ms to 13200 ms or 13801 ms to 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of “NG” (for example, a character “bad timing!”) Is displayed.

  For the value “15001-18000” of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the auto press effect is set, and “OK” is set as the timing type.

  Then, “END” information indicating the end of the pressing scenario is stored for the value “20001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms elapses from the start of fluctuation, the information of “END” is acquired, and the composite press effect end processing is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 166 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

  As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the character selection table 222d is provided with a hit character selection table 222d1 and an outlier character selection table 222d2.

  First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (b). FIG. 166 (b) is a table for determining a character to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and the character corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is a specified table.

  Although the illustration counter 223f is not shown, it has three types of independent counters, and when a character is selected in each period, selection is performed using a different counter. Thereby, the variation of the character displayed in the 1st period-the 3rd period can be increased, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, “hero” is defined as the character corresponding to the value “0 to 49” of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value “50 to 100” of the effect counter 223f. “Rabbit” is defined as the character, and “Kame” is defined as the character corresponding to the values “101 to 149” of the effect counter 223f. As the character corresponding to the value “150 to 199” of the effect counter 223f, “the same character as the type of point effect” is defined, and a character (hero, rabbit, turtle) that performs the main effect in the point effect. The same character is selected.

  That is, in the point effect that is executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the same character as the character that performs the main effect in the point effect is easily displayed in the first to third periods. Since the player plays the game in expectation that the same character as the character performing the main effect in the point effect is displayed in the first to third periods, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166 (c), the contents of the detachment character selection table will be described. FIG. 166 (c) is a table for determining a character to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is out, and the character corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is a specified table.

  Specifically, the character selection table 222d2 defines “hero” as the character corresponding to the value “0 to 65” of the effect counter 223f, and corresponds to the value “66 to 132” of the effect counter 223f. “Rabbit” is defined as the character, and “Kame” is defined as the character corresponding to the value “133-199” of the effect counter 223f.

  Next, the details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the point selection table 222e is provided with a winning point selection table 222e1 and an outlier point selection table 222e2.

  First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a table for determining points to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point effect when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot, and points corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f Is a specified table. When selecting points in each period, selection is performed using different counters as in the case of character selection. Thereby, the variation of the point displayed in the 1st period-the 3rd period can be increased, and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, “1” is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value “0 to 2” of the effect counter 223f, and the last digit value of the effect counter 223f. “2” is defined as a point corresponding to “3-6”, and “3” is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value “7-9” of the effect counter 223f.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), “1” is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit value “0 to 4” of the effect counter 223f in the point selection table 222e1 for removal. “2” is defined as a point corresponding to the last digit value “5-7” of the counter 223f, and “3” is designated as a point corresponding to the last digit value “8-9” of the effect counter 223f. It is prescribed.

  Therefore, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured such that a higher point is more easily selected than the outlier point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, high points are more easily displayed in the first to third periods of the point effect. Thereby, since a player plays a game in expectation that a high point is displayed in the 1st-3rd period of a point production, it can improve a player's interest.

  Returning to FIG. 164, the description will be continued. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in the pressing effect flag 223j, the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the pressing scenario storage area 223m, the slot effect flag 223n, and the slot effect counter 223p. The difference is that a slot effect state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The pressing effect flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). When the flag is turned on, the pressing effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the performance is not being executed (displayed). This pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is the pressing effect in the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170) (FIG. 170). S2031). Then, it is referred to in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) to determine whether or not the press effect is being performed (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to OFF when the press effect ends (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

  The pressing effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting an elapsed time since the start of the variable display in which the pressing effect is set. This press-down effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined that the press-down effect is being set in the press-down effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 at the end of the press-down effect. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the press effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Whether the button pressing is valid based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k (elapsed time since the start of change display) and the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m described later. It is determined whether or not.

  The pressed scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressed scenario stored in the pressed scenario table 222c described above. In this pressing scenario storage area 223m, when a variation pattern in which a pressing effect is set in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) is acquired, a pressing scenario corresponding to the set pressing effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button pressing is in a valid period.

  The slot effect flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When the slot effect is on, the slot effect is being executed (displayed). When the slot effect is off, the slot effect is being displayed. Indicates that the performance is not being executed (displayed). This slot effect flag 223n is set to ON when the acquired change pattern is determined to be a slot effect in the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172) (FIG. 170). S2305). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to to determine whether or not the slot effect is being performed (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to OFF when the slot effect is ended (see FIG. 174). (See S4617 in FIG. 174).

  The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display in which the slot effect is set. This slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4603 in FIG. 174) when it is determined in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) that the slot effect is being performed (S4601: Yes in FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The values of the slot effect counter 223p are the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), the initial slot effect process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect process (see FIG. 176), and the first shortened slot effect process (see FIG. 177). Reference), the second shortened slot effect processing (see FIG. 178), and the extended slot effect processing (see FIG. 179).

  The slot effect state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot effect is stored. During the initial slot effect, during the normal slot effect, during the first shortened slot effect, during the second shortened slot effect, and during the extended slot effect. The corresponding value is stored. In the slot effect state 223q, the first slot effect is set when it is determined in the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the slot effect is set in the acquired change pattern (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170). (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the first slot effect processing (see FIG. 175), the normal slot effect is set when the normal slot effect is selected (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and the first shortened slot effect is selected when the first shortened slot effect is selected. When the effect is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175) and the special slot effect is selected, the special slot effect is set (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176), when a display slot stop command in a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, the end waiting state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and the second shortened slot effect is displayed. When the display slot effect command corresponding to is set, the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). When the second shortened slot effect is selected in the first shortened slot effect process (see FIG. 177), the second shortened slot effect is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and the extended slot effect is selected. An extension slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178), when setting a display slot stop effect command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned, the process is set to the end waiting state (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extended slot effect processing (see FIG. 179), when setting a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned, the process is set to the end waiting state (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referred to to determine which slot effect is being executed (displayed), and is cleared when the slot effect ends (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the present control example will be described. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233m added to the first control example. The forbidden area storage area 233m is a small area of the display area composed of a total of nine areas (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163), that is, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically divided into three and left and right Is stored, and control is performed so that the character symbol and the point symbol are not displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, for example, when Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating the display area in the prohibited area storage area 233m, the information does not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (Dm11, Dm12 and Dm13 (not displayed on Dm12) select a character symbol and point symbol, and execute a point effect. Further, after the character symbol is selected, the prohibited region storage area 233m is updated based on the display area where the selected character symbol is displayed, and then the point symbol is selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the character symbol and the point symbol from being displayed in the same display area. When all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m when selecting a point symbol, overlapping display is performed by combining (or reducing) the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol. You may make it prevent, You may make it not display either one of a character design and a point design.

  In the character ROM 234 in this control example, a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 are added to the first control example.

  The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying a character design in the point effect described above is stored. This character data table 234a3 stores display information of character symbols displayed in the first period to the third period in the point effect, and in the character information of the received command in the point effect command process (see FIG. 186). Display information of the corresponding character design is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The character symbol display information includes information related to the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so as not to be selected. This prevents the character symbol from being displayed in the display region stored in the prohibited region storage area 233m. For example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in duplicate. Can be avoided.

  The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying a point symbol in the above-described point effect is stored. The point data table 234a4 stores display information of point symbols displayed in the first period to the third period in the point effect. In the point effect command process (see FIG. 186), the point data of the received command is stored in the point information. The corresponding point symbol display information is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The point symbol display information includes information on small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so as not to be selected. This prevents the point symbol from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. For example, the point symbol and the character symbol displayed in the point effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Can be avoided.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the pressing effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732) are executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169). It is different in that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1710 is completed, a press effect setting process is executed (S1731), a slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process proceeds to S1711. Then, a command determination process is executed (S1711), a variable display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1713. After S1713, the processing of S1713 to S1717 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

  Details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this variable display setting process 2 (S1712), a process for executing a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect instead of the reach navigation effect is added to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) of the first control example. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and thereafter, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set (S2006).

  When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is to execute a press effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the pressing effect is to be executed (S2031), the pressing effect flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the pressing effect scenario corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is pressed scenario storage area 223m. (S2033), and the process proceeds to S2007.

  In the process of S2033, for example, if the obtained variation pattern is to execute a normal pressing effect, the normal pressing scenario is acquired from the pressing scenario table 222c and set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, based on the pressing scenario storage area 223m and the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, the button valid period can be matched with the display of the effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2031 that the press effect is not to be executed (S2031: No), it is then determined whether the slot effect is to be executed (S2034).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2034 that the set variation pattern command is to execute the slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q is set. Is set as the first slot effect (S2036), and the process proceeds to S2007.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2034 that the slot effect is not to be executed (S2034: No), it is then determined whether or not the point effect is to be executed (S2037).

  In the process of S2037, when it is determined that the set variation pattern command is to execute the point effect (S2037: Yes), the point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process proceeds to S2007. . On the other hand, in the process of S2037, when it is determined that the point effect is not executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2007.

  In S2007, similar to the first control example, the processing from S2007 to S2011 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described with reference to FIG. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. is there.

  In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (S4301). Then, first to third character information is determined based on the point effect type, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying the character symbol in the three periods in which the character symbol set for the point effect and the point symbol are displayed. The first character information is the character symbol information displayed in the first period, which is the earliest (the shortest elapsed time from the start of the variable display) among the three periods, and the second character information is the first period. The character design information is displayed in the second period, which is the next period, and the third character information is the character design information displayed in the third period, which is the next period of the second period.

  The winning character selection table 222d1, as described above, is configured such that the same character symbol as that of the character predetermined in the point effect is easily selected. Thereby, when the character mainly displayed in the point effect and the character design displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, the player is expected to be a big hit after that. Can do.

  When the process of S4302 is finished, the first to third point information is determined based on the last digit value of the effect counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The first to third point information is information for displaying a point symbol in the first to third periods set for the point effect, similarly to the first to third character information described above.

  As described above, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured such that a point symbol having a higher point is more easily selected than the winning point selection table 222e2. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that it will be a big hit after that many point symbols of high points are displayed in the point effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the result of the determination is wrong (S4301: No), the first to third characters are based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the character selection table for removal 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the last digit value of the effect counter 223f and the off-point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

  When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is finished, a point effect command for display is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the point effect command for display, and based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. And the point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, the details of the press effect setting process (S1731) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. This press effect setting process (S1731) detects the press of the frame button 22 (normal press, long press press, etc.) according to the press effect being executed (displayed), and controls the display of commands corresponding to the press. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

  In the press effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the press effect flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the press effect is being performed) (S4401). If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing effect flag 223j is off (S4401: No), it is not necessary to make a setting related to the pressing effect, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the pressing effect flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to S4402 in order to execute a process related to the pressing effect.

  In the process of S4402, the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4403. Since the press effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is set every 1 ms while the press effect is being executed. One is added.

  In the process of S4403, based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m, the current period indicates that the normal frame button 22 is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is a detection period (normal pressing period) (S4403).

  In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is the normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404). If it is determined in step S4404 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the pressing scenario set in the pressing scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, and a display pressing command corresponding to the timing type is set. As a result, when an effect different depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is executed, it is possible to determine at which timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the pressing timing.

  In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current period is not the normal pressing period (S4403: No), it is then determined whether or not it is a period for detecting a long press of the frame button 22 (long press pressing period). (S4406). In the process of S4406, if it is determined that the current period is the long press-pressing period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed long (S4407). Specifically, when the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time.

  In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been long pressed (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been long pressed during the long press pressing period is set ( S4408), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed long (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the current period is not the long press pressing period (S4406: No), it is then determined whether or not the current period is the auto pressing period (S4409). In the process of S4409, when it is determined that the current period is the auto-pressing period (S4409: Yes), the auto-press effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process is terminated. Details of the auto-press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is not the auto-pressing period (S4409: No), it is then determined whether the current period is a release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. If it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been released (whether or not it has changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state) (S4412). .

  If it is determined in step S4412 that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command indicating that the frame button 22 has been released during the release period is set, and the process ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the process of S4413 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S4411, if it is determined that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (obtained based on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k) It is determined whether or not the pressing period type of the pressing scenario is information of “END” (S4414).

  In the process of S4414, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the pressing effect flag 223j is set to OFF. In step S4416, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4414 that it is not the end timing of the pressing effect period (S4414: No), the processing of S4415 and S4416 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173, the details of the auto-pressing effect setting process (S4410) executed when it is determined that the auto-pressing period is set in the pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 172). . This auto-pressing effect setting process (S4410) is based on the fact that the frame button 22 is long pressed and pressed during the auto-pressing period, and the long-pressed period is a frame button at regular intervals (every second). This is a process for transmitting a command indicating that 22 is pressed to the display control apparatus 114. That is, in the auto-pressing effect, the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (automatically) by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time.

  In the auto-press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has been started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 is started. If it is determined in step S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 has been started (S4501: Yes), the pressed scenario stored in the pressed scenario storage area 223m is changed to a pressed scenario for auto-pressing ( S4502). Then, an auto press start command indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 has been started in the auto press period (auto press has been started) is set (S4503), and this process ends. By changing the pressing scenario to the pressing scenario for auto-pressing in the processing of S4502, the effect mode displayed after that is changed to the effect mode assuming that the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed. (For example, the effect of pressing a button can be changed to the effect of releasing a button).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4501 that the long press of the frame button 22 has not been started (S4501: No), it is determined whether the long press of the frame button 22 is being performed (S4504). If it is determined in step S4504 that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4504: Yes), the previous auto-press is performed during the period in which the auto-press started by the long press of the frame button 22 is executed. It is determined whether or not a certain period (1 second in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the execution of (S4505).

  In the processing of S4504, when it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has elapsed since the previous auto-pressing was executed (S4504: Yes), a display auto-pressing command is set (S4506). The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4504, when it is determined that a certain period (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and this process is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in step S4504 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed long (S4504: No), it is then determined whether the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507). Specifically, after the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended when the frame button 22 has not been pressed for 5 ms or longer. As a result, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended. it can.

  If it is determined in step S4507 that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507: Yes), the pressing scenario stored in the pressing scenario storage area 223m is changed to a pressing scenario for non-automatic pressing. (S4508). Then, a display auto-pressing end command is set to indicate that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended during the auto-pressing period (auto-pressing has started) (S4509), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4507 that the long press of the frame button 22 is not completed (S4507: No), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510).

  In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), this is a case where the frame button 22 is manually pressed (continuous hit) during the automatic continuous hitting period. A pressing command for display is set (S4511), and this process ends.

  In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179, details of the slot effect setting process (S1732) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described. This slot effect setting process (S1732) is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the slot effect.

  In the slot effect setting process (S1732), it is first determined whether or not the slot effect flag 223n is on (whether or not the slot effect is being performed) (S4601). In the process of S4601, when it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S4601: No), this is the case where the slot effect is not executed (displayed), and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot effect flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 to execute (display) the slot effect. In the process of S4602, 1 is added to the value of the slot effect counter 223p (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during the execution (display) of the slot effect. The

  In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the slot effect state 223q is a value indicating the first slot effect (S4603), since the first slot effect (first slot effect) is being executed in the slot effect, In order to execute the process in the first slot effect, the process in the first slot effect is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 175, the details of the first slot effect processing (S4604) will be described. The first slot effect processing (S4604) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first slot effect of the slot effect. is there.

  In the first slot effect in-process (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is in an effective button press effective period (S4701). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 13000 (that is, from 2 seconds to 13 seconds after the slot effect is started), it is determined that it is the button pressing effective period. To do.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the button pressing valid period is reached (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). If it is determined in step S4702 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4702: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4701 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). . In the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value of 2000 to 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press effective period (between 2 seconds and 13 seconds) is early (from 2 seconds). Since the frame button 22 is pressed for 8 seconds) and the remaining effect time of the slot press effect is long, the process proceeds to S4706 to execute the first shortened slot effect.

  In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot effect is selected (S4706), the slot effect state 223q is set to the first shortened slot effect (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value between 2000 and 8000 (that is, a value equal to or greater than 80001) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 for executing a normal slot effect. Transition.

  In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4708.

  In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command of a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that it is not the button pressing effective period (S4701: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

  In the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 13000 (S4701: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press effective period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end wait state (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4709.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 13000 or less (S4710: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the first slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4603: No), it is then determined whether or not the normal slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4605). If it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to the normal slot effect processing (S4606).

  This normal slot effect process is a process for performing a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during the normal slot effect. In the normal slot effect in-process (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not it is an effective button press effective period in which the frame button 22 is pressed (S4801). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value between 17000 and 28000 (that is, the period from the start of the slot effect until the elapse of 17 seconds to 28 seconds), the button press valid period Determine.

  If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the button pressing valid period is not reached (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the button pressing effective period is reached (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802).

  If it is determined in the process of S4802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4802: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4802 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803).

  In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of the normal slot effect, and then the effect This is a case where the second shortened slot effect having a time of 10 seconds can be executed. In this case, a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809), and the display corresponding to the second shortened slot effect is performed. A slot effect command is set (S4810), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process proceeds to S4804 to end the slot effect.

  In the process of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804). If it is determined that the value is an even number (S4804: Yes), the display slot in the stop mode in which two symbols are aligned. A stop effect command is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4804, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), the display slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process proceeds to S4807. Transition.

  In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4807), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the normal slot effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, one symbol is stopped and displayed in the second shortened slot effect. Three symbols are stopped and displayed together with the stop display in the slot effect. On the other hand, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed, it is determined whether 2 symbols are stopped or 1 symbol is stopped according to the value of the effect counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 at an early stage, there is a high possibility that the two symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4605: No), it is then determined whether or not the first shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. (S4607).

  If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first shortened slot effect is being set (S4607: Yes), the first shortened slot effect is executed (S4608), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 177, the details of the process during the first shortened slot effect will be described. The first shortened slot effect in-process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs a process corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot effect of the slot effect. Process.

  In the processing during the first shortened slot effect (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing effective period in the first shortened slot effect (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value from 12000 to 18000, it is determined that it is the button pressing effective period in the first shortened slot effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the button pressing effective period is in the first shortened slot effect (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902).

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4902: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4902 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is selected (S4902), and the slot effect state 223q is set to the second shortened slot effect. (S4904). Then, a display slot stop effect command in a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that it is not the button pressing effective period (S4901: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 18000 (S4906).

  In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18000 or less (S4906: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button pressing effective period in the first shortened slot effect. is there. In this case, the extension slot effect is selected (S4907), the slot effect state 223q is set to the extension slot effect (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  When the process of S4905 or S4908 is completed, a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4909), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the first shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4607: No), then, whether or not the second shortened slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. Is determined (S4609).

  If it is determined in the process of S4609 that the second shortened slot effect is being performed (S4609: Yes), the second shortened slot effect is performed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178, the details of the second shortened slot effect processing (S4610) will be described. The second shortened slot effect in-process (S4610) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) and corresponds to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the second shortened slot effect. This is a process for performing the process.

  In the second shortened slot effect in-process (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing effective period in the second shortened slot effect (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value from 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached.

  In the process of S5001, when it is determined that it is not the button pressing effective period (S5001: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5002).

  If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5002: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is set. An end waiting state is set (S5004), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4609: No), then, whether or not the extended slot effect is set in the slot effect state 223q. It is determined (S4611).

  If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extension slot effect is being set (S4611: Yes), the extension slot effect is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179, the details of the extension slot effect processing (S4612) will be described. The extended slot effect in-process (S4612) is a process executed in the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs a process corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the extended slot effect. It is processing of.

  In the extension slot effect processing (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not it is the button pressing effective period in the extension slot effect (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is a value from 22000 to 28000, it is determined that the button pressing valid period is reached.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5101 that it is not the button pressing effective period (S5101: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the button pressing valid period is reached (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102).

  If it is determined in step S5102 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5102: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is set. An end waiting state is set (S5104), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 174, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4611 that the extended slot effect is not set in the slot effect state 223q (S4611: No), the process proceeds to S4613.

  In the process of S4613, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 in order to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the slot effect (S4613). In the process of S4613, when it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), this process is ended as it is because it is not the end timing of the slot effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4613 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the slot effect end timing. It is determined whether or not there is (S4614).

  In the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is waiting for completion (S4614: Yes), the slot effect has already been stopped by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. This is a case where a special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set, and the process proceeds to S4617.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4614, when the slot effect state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), the effect mode in the slot effect is not stopped. In this case, in order to end the slot effect after stopping the effect mode in the slot effect, a display slot effect forced end command is set (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617.

  In the process of S4617, the slot effect flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot effect state 223q is cleared (S4619), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by display control apparatus in second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that a command effect processing command, a slot effect command process, and a point effect command process are added in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180). The point is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not a command related to pressing effects has been received (S2631).

  In the process of S2631, if it is determined that a command related to the press effect has been received (S2631: Yes), the command process related to the press effect is executed (S2632), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2631 that a command related to the press effect has not been received (S2631: No), it is then determined whether a slot effect command has been received (S2633).

  If it is determined in the process of S2633 that the slot effect command has been received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2633 that no slot effect command has been received (S2633: No), it is then determined whether or not a point effect command has been received (S2635).

  In the process of S2635, when it is determined that the point effect command has been received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2635 that a point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S2614), and processing in step S2601 is performed. Return to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184, the details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described. The press effect related command process (S2632) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) the press effect.

  In the press effect related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that a display pressing command has been received (S5201: Yes), the pressing command process is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), details of the pressing command process (S5202) will be described. FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the press command process. This press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display press command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the press command processing, first, a press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5301). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5302).

  Then, based on the push-down display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5305), the pressing command process is terminated, and the process returns to the pressing effect related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the display press command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether a display long press command has been received (S5203).

  In the process of S5203, when it is determined that the display long press command has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  Here, the details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing long press command processing. This long press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the long press command processing, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5402).

  Then, based on the long press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5405), the long press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5203 that the display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether a display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

  If it is determined in the process of S5205 that the display auto-pressing start command has been received (S5205: Yes), the auto-pressing start command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), the details of the auto press start command processing (S5206) will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a flowchart showing auto-pressing start command processing. This auto-pressing start command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-pressing start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the auto press start command processing, first, an auto press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press start command is determined, and the determined auto press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S5501). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502).

  Then, based on the auto-pressing start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5505), the automatic pressing start command process is ended, and the process returns to the pressing effect related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5205 that the display auto-pressing start command has not been received (S5205: No), it is then determined whether a display auto-pressing command has been received (S5207).

  If it is determined in step S5207 that a display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), auto-press command processing is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), details of the auto-press command process (S5208) will be described. FIG. 183 (b) is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. This auto-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the auto press command processing, first, an auto press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press command is determined, and the determined auto press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602).

  Then, based on the auto-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5605), the automatic press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5207 that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), it is then determined whether a display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

  In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display auto press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto press end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 184 (a), the details of the auto press end command processing (S5210) will be described. FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing auto-pressing end command processing. This auto-pressing end command process executes a process corresponding to the display auto-pressing end command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the auto press end command processing, first, an auto press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press end command is determined, and the determined auto press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5702).

  Then, based on the auto-pressing end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5705), the automatic press end command processing is ended, and the press effect related command processing is returned.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5209 that the display auto-press end command has not been received (S5209: No), it is then determined whether a display release command has been received (S5211).

  If it is determined in step S5211 that a display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), release command processing is executed (S5212), and the processing ends.

  Here, details of the release command process (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display release command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the release command process, first, a release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, and the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5802).

  Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5805), the release command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press effect related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 181, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5211 that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot effect command processing. This slot effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display slot effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the slot effect command processing, first, a slot effect display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot effect command is determined, the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5902).

  Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5905), the slot effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing point effect command processing. This point effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display point effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S6001).

  Next, information on the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

  Character pattern character data to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the processing of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the prohibited area information corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

  Point data of point symbols to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

  Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6005).

  Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6008), the point effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

  As described above, the composite pressing effect described in the second control example is an effect in which the player continuously executes different operation modes (sequential hitting, timing pressing) with respect to the frame button 22. It is possible to increase the willingness to participate. Furthermore, when the player determines that the auto-pressing function was being executed during the composite pressing effect, the player can provide a player with a sense of incongruity in order to switch the pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect to be executed. Can do.

  Note that, in this control example, if the composite pressing effect is normal, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 in a timely manner (timing pressing effect) is executed after the pressing effect of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 (continuous hit effect). In the case where the auto-pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the continuous hit effect to the timing push effect, the timing push effect is configured to be switched to the release effect that releases the button in a timely manner. Other configurations may be used.

  For example, when the automatic pressing function is executed at the timing when the effect is switched from the repeated hit effect to the timing push effect, the timing of the pressing operation during the timing press effect may be automatically determined. The production may be executed continuously. Even if configured in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player who is executing the auto-pressing function.

  Further, in the second control example, the normal pressing effect, the timing pressing effect, and the release effect are configured to be displayed as the composite pressing effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period in which the long press effect is executed may be provided as part of the composite press effect.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, the timing of changing each pressing effect mode of the composite pressing effect is set as the timing at which the pressing effect is switched, but the next pressing effect effect mode is the timing at which the previous pressing effect is executed. May be determined. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the composite press effect.

  In addition, the frame button 22 operation is continuously received during the production period of the composite press effect executed in the second control example, but an invalid period is provided during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted. May be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite press effect using the invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period in which the composite press effect is being executed. Production can be provided.

  The composite press effect described above in the second control example is configured to display the result of the composite press effect based on all the operation results for each press effect executed during the composite press effect. By comprising in this way, the game motivation for the player with respect to each pressing effect can be heightened. Note that the method of displaying the effect result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the effect result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the composite press effect.

  As described above, in the continuous slot effect in this control example, in the slot effect that is continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the next time the player operates the frame button 22, An effect mode of the slot effect to be executed is selected. Specifically, the number of slot effects executed during the continuous slot effect is changed. Thereby, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect of the effect of the continuous slot effect is displayed with the combined content of the pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in each of the multiple slot effects that are executed during the effect of the continuous slot effect, and is further executed during the effect of the continuous slot effect. The result of the continuous slot effect is more advantageous to the player as the number of slot effects is increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player can be more motivated to operate the frame button 22, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the slot effect (first slot effect) executed for the first time in the continuous slot effect, even if the player cannot operate the frame button 22 early, the slot effect can be executed three times. It is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly. Furthermore, even if the number of slot effects executed during continuous slot effects is small, a plurality of combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in a single slot effect. You can have expectations until the end.

  Furthermore, for a player who refuses to operate the frame button 22, a special slot effect that does not require a frame button operation is executed after the end of the first slot effect, which may give the player dissatisfaction. Absent.

  In the second control example, a slot effect is used as a plurality of operation effects executed during a continuous effect executed for a specific period, but based on an operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. In addition, as long as it is a configuration that can change the effect mode and the number of times of other operation effects executed during the continuous effect, an effect other than the effect using the slot may be used.

  As described above, according to the point effect of the second control example, the point display location is set according to the effect display mode of the third symbol variation effect, and is further displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Since points are distributed based on the character to be played, it is possible to execute a point effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of small areas in which point display is possible, the point display point can be selected based on the number of points given and the effect of the third symbol variation effect (the special symbol lottery result). Good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163 (b), when the point displayed this time is 1 point (low point) or the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, Point display is performed on the small area Dm13 in the vicinity of the enemy “monster” as the subject of the third symbol variation production, and the point displayed this time is 2 points (high point) or the lottery result of this special symbol wins In this case, it is preferable to perform point display on the small area Dm11 that is in the vicinity of the “hero” who is the leading role as the main subject of the third symbol variation effect among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points. Thereby, it becomes possible to predict in advance whether or not the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit by grasping the place where the player displays the points. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed on Dm12 in FIG. 163 (b)) may be set to a display mode that guides a point display location (small area) to be executed later. Specifically, a display mode in which a point display location (small area) is guided by the character's line of sight is preferable.

  Further, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as a region where no point is displayed. For example, in one small region, When the ratio of the image to be occupied is calculated and the ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined amount (less than 10%), the small area may be determined as an area that can display points. This makes it possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, the malfunction that the player who is gazing at the 3rd symbol change production misses a point display can be controlled.

  In addition, as a structure which sets the display location of a point effect based on the location where the 3rd symbol fluctuation effect is displayed, you may use the following structures. In other words, when the display control device 114 receives a command for displaying points, the display control device 114 performs control so that points are displayed in all the small areas, and the small areas other than the small areas that actually allow the player to visually recognize the point display are displayed. You may perform control which masks the point display displayed on an area | region so that a player cannot visually recognize. With this configuration, for example, during the third symbol variation effect, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect moves to various small regions, and the prohibited region and the allowable region are switched. Case processing can be facilitated.

  In addition, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying points displays points in all small areas, and the effect display image layer displays the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. It is good to perform the process which permeate | transmits one of the small area | regions which are not used by the 3rd symbol fluctuation effect with respect to the effect display image layer.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, a small area where the third symbol variation effect is executed is set as the prohibited area where the point display is prohibited, but the small area where the other display is executed is prohibited area. For example, a small area where game information is displayed, such as a display of the number of holds, or a pachinko machine 10 is provided, and is driven when a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection) is established. In a gaming machine having a decorative accessory covering a part of the front surface (specific small area) of the 3 symbol display device 81, an abnormality occurs when the specific small area described above when a predetermined condition is satisfied, or when an abnormality is detected. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area in which information is displayed, the predetermined small area when an abnormality is detected may be set as a prohibited area.

  Furthermore, although the control example using the display area of one display device (the third symbol display device 81) is described in the second control example, the same control may be executed using a plurality of display devices. For example, when a sub display device that can be moved (rotated) is arranged at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and when it is arranged at any other position, it may be set as an allowable area.

<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. The first modified example of the second control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the ROM 203 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and slot effect setting processing (see FIG. 174). The slot production setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first modification of the second control example, three types of auto-pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing interval is different in each auto-pressing period. Thereby, for example, an effect that requires pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the button pressing period (continuous hit effect), or a time when the frame button 22 is pressed only once at a good timing during the button pressing period (timing pressing effect), etc. Appropriate pressing can be performed according to the type of pressing effect.

  In the first modification, an effect mode in which a rotation effect in which a slot is rotated / stopped is displayed three times as a slot effect, and the rotation of the slot is stopped when the frame button 22 is pressed. If the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation effect, the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes slow, and the rotation speed of the next rotation effect becomes faster as the press of the frame button 22 becomes slower. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect is slowed down, and it becomes easy to align the target pattern. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed slowly, The rotation speed in the rotation effect becomes faster, and it becomes difficult to align the target pattern. Thereby, the privilege that it becomes easy to align the target symbols by pressing the frame button 22 early to the player can be given, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Electric Configuration in First Modification of Second Control Example>
First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that the content of the pressing scenario table 222c is changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pressed scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the pressing scenario table 222c in the first modified example is different from the pressing scenario table 222c in the second control example described above in place of the combined pressing scenario 222c3, and the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 and The difference is that the second combined pressing scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 187 (b), the contents of the first combined pressing scenario 222c4 will be described. FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first composite pressing scenario 222c4. The first combined pressing scenario 222c4 is different from the above-described combined pressing scenario 222c3 of the second control example in that the pressing interval during the automatic pressing period is different, and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

  In the first combined press scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the auto press period A (press interval 1 second) is set as the press period type for the value “5001 to 12000” of the press effect scenario counter 223k. For the value “15001-18000” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k, an automatic pressing period B (pressing interval 0.5 seconds) is set.

  As described above, the auto-pressing function is executed by the player who is executing the auto-pressing function by changing the press-down interval for the auto-pressing period set in a different period depending on the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k. It is possible to suppress getting tired of the production based on what is being done at an early stage.

  In this modification, the pressing interval is set in advance for each auto pressing period, but other configurations may be used, for example, the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the auto-pressing period is reached, one auto-pressing pattern is selected from the auto-pressing pattern selection table in which a plurality of auto-pressing patterns with different pressing intervals are stored, and the pressing interval is based on the selected auto-pressing pattern. May be set. By configuring in this way, even if a composite press effect based on the same composite press scenario is executed, an auto press function with a different press interval is executed, so that the player gets bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Also, a predetermined auto-pressing pattern may be selected from the above-described auto-pressing pattern selection table based on the special symbol discrimination result. Specifically, in the case where an effect whose degree of progress increases according to the number of times of pressing is performed, if it is determined that the special symbol determination result is a big win, it is stored in the automatic pressing pattern selection table. It is preferable to select an auto press pattern having the shortest press interval among the auto press patterns. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the effect when the determination result of the special symbol is a win. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player who is executing the auto-pressing function to predict the determination result of the special symbol based on the progress of the effect.

  Furthermore, it may be configured to notify the third symbol display device 81 of the pressing interval while the automatic pressing function is being executed. As a result, the player can visually grasp the pressing interval of the automatic pressing function currently being executed.

  Next, the contents of the second composite press-down scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (c). FIG. 187 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second composite pressing scenario 222c5. The second combined pressing scenario 222c5 is different from the above-described first combined pressing scenario 222c4 in the values “12001” to “12000” to “12001” of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k that are periods corresponding to the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)). 15000 "is different in that the auto-pressing period is set, and the other points are the same. The description of the same points is omitted.

  In the second combined press scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the auto press period C (press interval 2 seconds) is set for the values “12001” to “15000” of the press effect scenario counter 223k. . As described above, the auto-pressing function with the pressing interval of 2 seconds is executed during the period in which the period of 3 seconds is set as the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)), so that the predetermined time within the predetermined period is A situation where the button is pressed at the timing can be realized.

  Specifically, for example, when an effect pressed by the auto pressing function is executed at the timing when the value of the pressing effect scenario counter 223k during the auto pressing period A is “14000”, the pressing effect during the auto pressing period C is executed. The next pressing effect is executed at the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is “16000”, that is, at the timing two seconds after the previous pressing effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the pressing effect is executed at a timing one second after the start of the timing pressing period Db1 (see FIG. 157 (a)).

  In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during auto-pressing, it is possible to suitably execute different button press effects with different gaming characteristics while the auto-pressing function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is being held down for a long time). It becomes possible.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the above-described second control example in that a pressing number counter 223r is provided, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The number-of-presses counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (display) of the slot effect. The number-of-presses counter 223r is incremented by 1 in the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press effective period comes (FIG. 189). (See S6108). If the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 2 or less, the next rotation effect is set. If the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot effect is set. Further, the button pressing effective period is set based on the value of the pressing number counter 223r.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modification is different from the second control example described above in that slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732). This slot effect setting process 2 (S1732) displays an effect mode in which a rotation effect in which the slot is rotated and stopped is executed three times as the slot effect, and stops the rotation of the slot based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Process. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed early so that the number of rotations in each rotation effect is the same, processing is performed so as to slow down the rotation speed in the next rotation effect. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect is slowed down, and it becomes easy to align the target symbols.

  In the slot effect setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot effect is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot effect flag 223n is on (S6101).

  If it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the slot effect flag 223n is off (S6101: No), this is the case where the slot effect is not being executed (displayed), and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6101 that the slot effect flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), since the slot effect is being executed (displayed), 1 is added to the slot effect counter 223p ( S6102) and the process proceeds to S6103.

  In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is a button pressing effective period (S6103). Specifically, the button press effective period is set by the processing of S6115 described later. For example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation effect in the slot effect), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is When the value is from 2001 to 8000 (that is, from when the slot effect is started until 2001 ms elapses until 8000 ms elapses), the button pressing effective period is set.

  In the process of S6103, when it is determined that it is not the button valid period (S6103: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6103 that it is the button valid period (S6103: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). If it is determined in step S6104 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the rotating symbol in the rotation effect is set (S6105). , The process proceeds to S6108.

  If it is determined in step S6104 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button pressing effective period (S6106). Specifically, when the number-of-presses counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 8000.

  In the process of S6106, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the button press effective period (S6106: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6106 that it is the end timing of the button pressing effective period (S6106: Yes), the display slot stop effect command is forcibly stopped in the rotation effect. Is set (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

  In the process of S6108, 1 is added to the number-of-presses counter 223r (S6108), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

  If it is determined in the process of S6109 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), the rotation effect in the slot effect is not executed three times, so the next rotation effect is displayed. The process proceeds to S6113 for setting.

  In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot effect counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot. The value of the effect counter 223p is 28000, and the value obtained by subtracting the value of the current slot effect counter 223p from the value of the slot effect counter 223p that is the upper limit time is the remaining time.

  A display slot effect command having a display mode that provides a rotation speed of 10 rotations in the remaining time calculated in the process of S6113 is set (S6114), and a button press effective period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is set. (S6115), this process is terminated.

  Specifically, in the process of S6115, when the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 1, a period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 12001 and 18000 is set as the button-pressing effective period, and the number-of-presses counter 223r. When the value of 2 is 2, a period in which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 22001 and 18000 is set as the button pressing effective period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6109 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 is pressed in the last rotation effect of the slot effect (or the button press valid) This is the case when the period has passed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set (S6110), the value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), and the value of the slot effect counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112). This process ends.

  As described above, in the first modification, in the slot effect in which the rotation effect is performed three times, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect becomes slow, and the target pattern is displayed. However, if the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed, the rotation speed in the next rotation effect is increased, and it becomes difficult to align the target symbols. Thereby, the privilege that it becomes easy to align the target symbols by pressing the frame button 22 early to the player can be given, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above, and the short length of the button pressing effective period to be set next may be changed according to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the button pressing effective period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotation effect, the button pressing period may be extended in the next rotation effect. As a result, since the button pressing period is set to be longer in the next rotation effect, even when the rotation speed of the rotation effect does not change, a privilege that the target symbol stops frequently (that is, the chance increases). Can be given, so the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modification, in contrast to the above-described second control example, when the pressing state of the frame button 22 is auto-pressing, a pressing signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at regular intervals. When the pressed state of the button 22 is non-automatically pressed, there is a difference in that a frame button control device 290 that outputs a press signal based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is provided to the sound lamp control device 113. Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second modified example, in the above-described frame button control device 290, an auto-pressing state is entered based on a predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During auto-pressing, without pressing the frame button 22, a pressing signal output based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at regular intervals. Therefore, even when the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, and the operation burden on the player can be reduced. Can do.

<Electric Configuration in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 189 and FIG. 190, an electrical configuration in the second modification will be described. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second modified example via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the press of the frame button 22 is detected by the processing of the MPU 291, and the detection result is notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293 and stores information for determining whether the frame button 22 is pressed. Here, the details of the RAM 293 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification.

  The RAM 293 is provided with at least an auto-pressing flag 293a, a pressing time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

  The auto-pressing flag 293a is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (a state in which a press signal is output at regular intervals regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed). If it is, it is determined that it is in an auto-pressed state (automatically pressed), and if it is off, it is determined that it is in a state where it is not autopressed (non-automatically pressed).

  This auto-pressing flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 2 seconds or more. The auto-pressing flag 293a is referred to when it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing state is in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192).

  The pressed time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. The pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. When the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the auto pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been completed.

  The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during auto-pressing. This period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, when the auto-pressing state is in effect). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during auto depression. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c is counted, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button pressing signal is an audio lamp control. To the device 113. Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches a predetermined value (1000), each time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time one second elapses) Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Note that by changing the above-described predetermined value, it is possible to vary the interval at which the button press signal is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during auto press. For example, the predetermined value may be 500 or 2000, and the variable timing may be a timing at which a predetermined operation (such as long press again, repeated hits, other button presses, etc.) is performed, It may be set as the timing at which is switched. The timing at which the effect is switched may be notified from the sound lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding Control Process by Frame Button Control Device in Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, control processing executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process periodically executed by the MPU 291 (every 1 ms in this modification). This timer interrupt process is a process for detecting the pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (pressing signal) indicating the pressing of the frame button 22 to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. When a long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the auto-press function is executed, and a press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modification). It is processing to do.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). If it is determined in step S6201 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the value of the added pressing time counter 293b is Whether it is 2000 or not is discriminated (S6203).

  In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), since 2 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed, the auto-pressing flag 293a It is determined whether or not is on (S6204).

  In the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), the auto-pressing function is not executed. The auto-pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. A press signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S6206, and the effect based on the reception of the press signal is executed by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the auto-press is set for the player. It can be easily recognized. Note that the present invention is not limited to outputting a press signal, and notifies that auto press has been set, and based on the notification, the sound lamp control device 113 performs an effect indicating that auto press has been set. May be.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6204, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), since the auto-pressing function is being executed, the execution of the auto-pressing function is terminated. Then, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to OFF (S6207), and the process proceeds to S6212.

  In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the value of the pressed time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the process from S6204 to S6207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6212.

  If it is determined in step S6201 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208).

  In the process of S6208, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208: Yes), it is a case where the frame button 22 is pressed. In order to output, the process proceeds to S6209. If the value of the pressed time counter 293b is larger than 5 (when the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms) by the processing of S6208, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Even if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed for an interval (for example, 1 ms), it is possible to accurately detect the pressing of the frame button 22.

  The processing of S6209 determines whether or not the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the process of S6209, if it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), it is a case where the frame button 22 is normally pressed. (S6210), and the process proceeds to S6211.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), it is a case where the frame button 22 is pressed long, so the process of S6210 is skipped. , The process proceeds to S6211.

  In the process of S6211, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6212.

  In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). If it is determined in the processing of S6212 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), the auto-pressing function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by 1. (S6213), it is determined whether or not the value of the added period counter 293c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (1000 in the present modification) (S6214).

  In the process of S6214, when it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a press signal indicating the press of the frame button 22 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 ( In step S6215, the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S6212, when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6212: No), this is a case where the auto-pressing function is not executed, so the processes of S6213 to S6216 are executed. The process ends.

  As described above, in the second modification of the second control example, it is possible to switch on / off of the automatic pressing function by executing a predetermined operation (long pressing of the frame button 22). Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 in order to execute the automatic pressing function, so that the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the second modification, the pressing signal is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 even when the execution of the auto pressing function is started. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the auto-press has been set. Note that the present invention is not limited to outputting a press signal, and notifies that auto press has been set, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs an effect indicating that auto press has been set based on the notification. May be.

  In the second modification, even when the automatic pressing function is being executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and a pressing signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, even when the auto-pressing function is executed, the player can arbitrarily operate the frame button 22 to change the production mode, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the auto-pressing function is executed, the normal pressing of the frame button 22 may not be detected. Further, when the auto-pressing function is being executed, the execution of the auto-pressing function may be terminated based on the normal pressing of the frame button 22. Thereby, the execution of the auto-pressing function can be easily terminated, and a gaming machine that can be easily operated by the player can be provided.

  In the second modification, the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the MPU process, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that the capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is determined that the capacitor has been pressed for a long time when the voltage of the capacitor exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 5 V). May be.

<Other production examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each control example described above will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same point as the structure used in each control example mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Mission production>
In each control example described above, the mission effect is executed when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the sound lamp control device 113. This mission effect is an effect that gives a privilege (for example, a big hit) when a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the content of the effect executed thereafter satisfies the command.

  In each control example described above, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of command content (first command information) and commander (second command information). The past command display can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when the mission effect is executed, the current command display and the previous (previous) command display are displayed at the same time. Here, based on the relationship between the current command display and the previous (previous) command display, it is configured to indicate to the player whether or not the current mission effect is successful.

  Specifically, if the current command display and the previous command display (the first command information and the second command information) are the same, this indicates that there is a high possibility that the current mission effect will be successful. This suggests that the mission direction is unlikely to succeed. Furthermore, when a part of the command display matches (for example, the commander that is the second command information matches), it is set to indicate that the possibility of success is high if the mission effect progresses to the second half. The

  In this way, because the contents of the past mission production and the current mission production overlap, the expectation of jackpot is set high, so the same production is repeatedly executed and the player gets bored with the game It becomes possible to make it easy to expect big wins. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Furthermore, in this mission effect, for example, when the command “Collect people” is displayed as the command content, if the result of the effect is “0”, the command fails, and “1” to “100” When the command is successful and the command is successful, the command achievement rate (for example, “1 person” is 1% command achievement rate and “100 people” is command achievement rate 100%) is set. By providing this command achievement rate, it is possible to set the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in more detail. In addition, when the command content that is the first command information is the same and the commander that is the second command information is different between the current command display and the previous command display, the effect is executed with the command achievement rate inherited. Has been. Thereby, even if the effect of the same command content is repeatedly executed, the content of the effect can be changed. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  In the above description, the presentation based on the previous command display history and the current command display is executed. For example, a means capable of storing a plurality of command displays displayed in the past is provided. A selection means for the player to select an arbitrary command display is provided. The instruction display selected by the selection means is displayed on the display screen (the third symbol display device 81), and the effect is executed based on the instruction display selected by the selection means and the current instruction display. Good. In addition, information corresponding to the past instruction display is displayed in a two-dimensional code on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 so that the player can acquire the information, and the pachinko machine is executed when the acquired information is executed next time. By allowing the input to 10, the command instruction executed in the past (for example, the previous day) may be taken over and displayed.

<Chance up production>
In each control example described above, in order to indicate the expectation that the changing special symbol is won by the jackpot, a partial display mode of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display or reach) The effect of changing the color pattern of the title name display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern is executed. As a result, when the same effect is executed, the player gets bored early in the game because he / she watches the effect while expecting which color pattern the partial display mode of the effect is displayed in. That is restrained.

  However, since the partial display mode described above is displayed at various timings in one production (for example, 60 seconds), the player does not notice the change of the partial display mode or expects the production. As a result, there was a problem that the user was dissatisfied because the color pattern with a high expectation level of jackpot was not displayed.

  On the other hand, in each control example described above, when the effect is executed, the color pattern pre-notification means that can notify the player in advance of the color pattern displayed in the present effect is provided. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain beforehand the color pattern provided by this production.

  Moreover, in each control example mentioned above, it was set as the structure in which a specific color design is automatically selected from several displayed color designs as a color design prior alerting | reporting means. As a result, the color design by the color design advance notification means is selected with the expectation that the color design will be selected by displaying the color design with a high jackpot expectation degree among the plurality of color designs that have been displayed once. It is possible to watch the production to be performed.

  Further, the color pattern prior notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the partial display mode described above. As a result, when a plurality of color patterns with a high expectation level for big hits are notified in advance, the player only has to pay attention to the performance, and suppresses the distrust of the game that occurs due to excessive expectations in each performance. be able to.

  In addition, since the plurality of partial display modes described above differ in the jackpot expectation when changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern previously notified by the color pattern prior notification means You can watch the production while enjoying it.

<On-hold change production>
In each control example described above, an area (hereinafter referred to as a hold display area) in which information (hereinafter referred to as hold number information) indicating the number of rights for which the special symbol change is executed in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. And an area (hereinafter referred to as an execution display area) in which information (hereinafter referred to as execution information) corresponding to a special symbol for which variation is currently being executed is displayed. And the so-called hold pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the hold symbol representing the hold number information displayed in the hold display area based on the information obtained by pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol Is configured to be executable.

  This reserved pre-reading effect has been conventionally configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbol when a new variation of the special symbol is started. In this case, it was possible to entertain the pre-reading effect on the player as long as a predetermined number or more of the on-hold number information is displayed. However, if the number of reservations is small, the effect should be fully enjoyed. There was a problem that could not.

  On the other hand, in the hold change effect of each control example described above, based on information obtained by pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol, the time required for the hold symbol to move to the execution display area is used. The display mode of the reserved symbols is changed. Thereby, even if the number of holdings is small, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the holding symbols using at least the time until the change of the currently executed special symbol is completed.

  Specifically, the reserved symbol (for example, the reserved symbol displayed on the reserved 3) to be changed is changed to a character, and the changed reserved symbol is displayed on a predetermined reserved display area (for example, the reserved 2 is displayed). When the display is made (shifted) in the area, the hold change effect is started (for example, battle effect). The longer the time until the hold change effect ends, the longer the hold change proceeds.

  That is, when the reserved symbol that is subject to the hold change has shifted to hold 2, the length of the hold change effect based on the fluctuation time of the special symbol being executed and the change time of the hold symbol displayed in hold 1 Is determined. Thereby, even if the hold change effect is started in the state of the hold 1, if the change time of the special symbol that is currently changing is long, the hold change can be sufficiently advanced by the hold change effect.

  Further, the end of the on-hold change effect may be the timing at which the on-hold symbol that is the target of the on-hold change effect moves to the execution display area, or may end before that.

  Further, each control example described above is configured to display a character image in the vicinity of the execution display area when the reservation symbol that is the target of the change change effect moves to the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for pre-reading effects of the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display area in a state where the reserved symbols that are the target of the reserved change effect are displayed in the execution display area.

  Specifically, the character whose reserved symbol that is the target of the hold change effect and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the battle effect described above. By configuring in this way, when the reserved symbol is changed to a character in a state where the number of reserved symbols is small, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the character is used for the pending change effect of the subsequent reserved symbol. Become.

  In the battle production described above, the expectation may be suggested by a combination of characters to confront. Moreover, it is good to set so that the frequency of a hold prefetching effect and the expectation degree of jackpot may differ with the kind of character displayed near the execution display area.

<Button production settings>
In each control example described above, a plurality of frame button operation effects capable of operating the frame button 22 can be executed as a variation pattern set by the sound lamp control device 114. Furthermore, although detailed description is omitted, in each control example described above, more various frame button operation effects are set (for example, by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). An effect of notifying the player of the expectation of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol that has been changed this time by changing the color emitted by the plurality of light emitting units provided in the pachinko machine 10, or an audio lamp The effect of changing the decoration mode by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). Thus, in the case where a plurality of frame button operation effects can be executed, the frame button effects are frequently executed, and there is a problem that the act of the player operating the frame buttons 22 becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a plurality of frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a plurality of frame button operation effects are set, An interval discriminating unit that discriminates the interval between the frame button operation effects, and when the intervals between the plurality of frame button operation effects become a predetermined interval by the interval discriminating unit, the operation of the frame button 22 is validated even at the predetermined interval Frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Thereby, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, it is possible to set a period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 so as to straddle the plurality of frame button operation effects. Therefore, the player can continue to operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to suppress the player's operation on the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

  As the interval discriminating means described above, specifically, a period in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and the intervals of the plurality of frame button operation effects are set based on the set periods. A storage unit is provided for storing a combination of frame button operation effects to be discriminated and a frame button operation effect in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed at a time interval less than a predetermined amount, and combinations of frame button operation effects stored in the storage unit Some of them determine whether or not is set.

  Furthermore, as the above-described frame button operation effect setting means, specifically, when setting the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect that is executed first to be extended, and the frame button operation that is executed later There are a case where the operation valid period of the production is set to be advanced and a case where a new frame button operation production is set.

  In the case where the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect that has been executed first is set to be extended, the frame symbol operation effect that has been executed first is displayed in the third pattern in a manner in which the operation effective period has been extended in advance. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which the normal operation effective period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation effective period is predetermined. When the period (remaining 2 seconds or remaining 0 seconds) is reached, a display in which the operation valid period is extended may be executed. In this way, it is possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has been set until immediately before the frame button operation effect that has been executed previously ends. The button 22 can be operated continuously, and the player's operation on the frame button 22 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In addition, the effect result of the frame button operation effect previously executed at the timing when the normal operation valid period is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by the operation of the frame button 22 during the extended operation valid period, You may make it change the display mode of the production result of the frame button operation effect performed previously displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  When the operation effective period of the frame button operation effect to be executed later is set to be advanced, the frame button operation effect to be executed later may be executed in advance or the frame button operation effect to be executed later. As it is, the operation effective period set in advance may be used as a preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when a frame button operation effect for repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, a display indicating the degree of the continuous hit operation is performed by executing the continuous hit operation during the preparation period, During the preparation period, it is possible to turn on the automatic continuous hitting function.

  Furthermore, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is not related to the frame button operation effect that is executed first or the frame button operation effect that is executed later is executed.

  As described above, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation valid period set in the plurality of frame button operation effects continues. Thus, since the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from performing complicated operations on the frame button 22.

  In addition, as a setting method of the frame button operation effect, a method of setting a plurality of frame button operation effects when setting one effect may be used. A frame button operation effect may be set. For example, it is expected that the special symbol of this time is a big hit by operating the frame button 22 repeatedly until the variation of the third symbol based on the variation of the special symbol becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach). In the case where the degree is displayed in the luminescent color of a decorative lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and when a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach) is set, the third symbol is a predetermined dynamic When a pattern to be displayed (for example, SP reach) is configured to be selectable from a plurality (for example, three), and a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, 2 The interval at which the two frame button operation effects are executed may be a predetermined interval.

  In each control example described above, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation of providing a proximity sensor that can be operated by bringing the player closer to the hand. The player may be able to respond by touching the player, operating means that reacts when touched by the player (detects changes in pressure or capacitance), tilting the player back and forth, left and right, and operating means that can be rotated. Any configuration that can be operated is acceptable. Furthermore, in the above description, the operation means is configured by the frame button 22 alone, but the operation means may be configured by using a plurality of devices.

  Further, in each control described above, a setting method in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period or more is used as a setting method for automatically operating the operating means. The operation may be set when the operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operation means is operated in a predetermined procedure. Also, a dedicated device for automatically switching to a state where the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the indicators P1 to P5 are displayed. A point effect in which a specific effect (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display mode becomes a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode in which the indicator P3 indicates MAX), and the display mode of each indicator is changed in the point effect. The point display control for displaying the predetermined value (for example, points) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

  On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the point effect and another example of the point display described in the second control example described above will be described. In the third control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the second control example, and the contents of the RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partly changed. The difference is that the changed point, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Here, the difference between the point effect executed in this control example and the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, there are two types of modes used for the point effect (“normal mode” and “dice roller mode”), whereas in this control example, four modes are used for the point effect (FIG. 195). It is different in the point of reference).

  Furthermore, in the second control example described above, points are equally allocated to the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in the “normal mode”, whereas in the present control example, “normal mode A”. The points P1 to P3 are different from each other in that the points are distributed according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in the present control example, a detailed description is added regarding the process regarding the mode transition during the point effect, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197, the point effect of this control example will be described in detail. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram for explaining each mode used for the point effect in the third control example. Here, the point effect of this control example is an effect that is performed while the variation of the special symbol is executed 1 to 4 times, and the indicator display mode is the same as the point effect that is executed in the second control example described above. This is an effect of notifying the player that a privilege (a performance with a high jackpot expectation or a jackpot) is to be given to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the point effect in this control example is composed of four types of modes: “normal mode A”, “normal mode B”, “dice roller mode”, and “bingo mode”. In each mode, a different indicator is displayed, and the indicator is displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator that was displayed in the mode before the transition when the mode transition is performed during the point production. It is comprised so that. Specifically, it corresponds to a rabbit in a display mode (for example, “normal mode A”) in which it is determined that a privilege 2 (for example, an effect with a high jackpot expectation level) is given before the mode transition of the point effect. In the case where the indicator P1 is the display mode indicating the maximum value (MAX)), the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also determined to be given the privilege 2 (effect with high expectation of jackpot) (for example, In the “dice mode”, a display mode showing a double eye) is displayed.

  Specifically, it is confirmed that the display mode displayed by the indicator is provided in a plurality of stages (a privilege 1 display mode (a jackpot confirmed display mode), a privilege 2 display mode (an effect with a high jackpot expectation is given). Display mode) and high-standard display mode (display mode showing a high-standard state to which any privilege is given a little more)) are configured to be discriminable and memorized. The display mode corresponding to the mode stage is the initial display mode after the mode transition.

  With this configuration, when a mode transition occurs during a point effect, the player can easily grasp that the benefits acquired in the previous point effect are not lost, and the point effect By shifting to a different indicator, it is possible to diversify the production and prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Here, details of each mode used for the point effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic diagram showing “normal mode A” used for the point effect in the third control example. This “normal mode A” is the same display mode as the “normal mode” of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and only the difference from the above “normal mode” will be described here. Other explanations are omitted.

  In the “normal mode A”, three indicators P1 to P3 are used as in the “normal mode” used in the point effect of the second control example described above. Unlike the above-described second control example, this control example is set so that the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to “Hero” is higher than the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to “rabbit” and “turtle”. . Specifically, the benefits given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) are different, and the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to “Rabbit” and “Kame” have different indicator values. When the maximum (MAX) is reached, the bonus 2 is notified of the transition to the production with a high expectation level of the jackpot (main production), and when the value of the indicator P3 corresponding to “Hero” becomes the maximum (MAX), the bonus 1 , It is configured to notify that the special symbol that is fluctuating has won the jackpot.

  In addition, as a display mode (high reference display mode) indicating a high standard state to which a privilege is given a little more, a display mode in which any one of the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 is set to the sixth stage is set. Thereby, when the mode transition is performed when any of the indicators P1 to P3 is the display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. It will be.

  When “normal mode A” is set as the point effect, an effect is displayed in which “Rabbit”, “Kame”, and “Hero” are displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main production (the third symbol variation production) and the sub-production (point production) are made relevant to the content of the production of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be displayed (executed).

  Next, the “dice mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “dice mode” used for the point effect in the third control example. This “dice roller mode” is a display form similar to the “dice roller mode” of the point effect described in the second control example described above, and here, only the differences from the “dice roller mode” described above will be described. Other explanations are omitted.

  In the “dice mode”, two indicators P4 and P5 simulating a dice are used in the same way as the “dice mode” used in the point effect of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, a doublet), the player is granted a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2). . Specifically, when a display mode (that is, a doublet display mode) in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate the same number is displayed, an effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is given as privilege 2, and a doublet display mode In the case of “6.6”, it is informed that the bonus is won as the bonus 1.

  In the "dice mode", when the indicator P4 and P5 imitating the die are rotated and the double-sided display mode is stopped, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotation display. The display mode (i.e., the non-flat eye display mode) is not displayed, and a rotation display that suggests whether or not the number that is stopped and displayed in the flat eye display mode is raised is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the non-zero-eyes display mode from being stopped and displayed once after the stop-eye display mode is stopped and displayed, so that the privilege given to the player is easily notified. be able to.

  Further, in the “dice mode”, the case where the number of the indicator P4 is “5” is set as the high reference display mode. For example, when the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, the display mode of the indicator P4 is changed. The display mode is fixed to “5”, and an effect in which only the indicator P5 is rotated and displayed is executed. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  Further, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed as “5”, “5.5” is stopped and displayed when the double-eye display mode is displayed. Therefore, it can be predicted that the close-eye display mode “6.6” for notifying that the jackpot has been won after the double-eye display mode is stopped and displayed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  When the “dice roller mode” is set as the point effect, the effect using the dice is executed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect). As a result, the main production (the third symbol variation production) and the sub-production (point production) are made relevant to the content of the production of the main production and the display mode of the indicator in the point production without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be displayed (executed).

  Next, the “normal mode B” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a “normal mode B” used for the point effect in the third control example. This "normal mode B" uses one indicator P6 that represents the whole in 100%, and the display mode of the indicator P6 has become a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode indicating 50% or 100%). In this case, it is set so that a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2) is given to the player. Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 50% is displayed, an effect with a high expectation of jackpot is given as the benefit 2, and a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 100% is displayed In addition, the bonus 1 is notified that the jackpot is won.

  In the “normal mode B”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to the “normal mode B” in the state where the display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to a display mode indicating 40%. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  Next, the “bingo mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a “bingo mode” used for a point effect in the third control example. In this “bingo mode”, a nine square indicator P7 with numbers 1 to 9 is used, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point effect is erased (designated). Production is performed. And it is set so that a privilege (privilege 1, privilege 2) may be given to a player when a display mode in which erased (designated) numbers are arranged in a straight line is displayed.

  Specifically, when a display mode indicating that two lines of the indicator P7 are aligned is displayed, as the benefit 2, an effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot is given, and the indicator P7 indicates that three or more lines are aligned. When the display mode is displayed, it is informed that the bonus is won as the bonus 1.

  Further, in the “bingo mode”, a display mode indicating that one line of the indicator P7 is aligned is set as the high reference display mode. For example, in the case of shifting to the “bingo mode” in the state where the display mode of the high reference (for example, the value of the indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is “6”) is displayed in the “normal mode A”, The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to a high reference display mode indicating that one line is aligned. Thereby, even if the mode transition is performed during the point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

  As described above, indicators having different display forms (appearance and number) and display forms (display forms for notifying the player of giving a privilege) are used for the plurality of modes used for the point effect in the present control example. (P1 to P7) are used, and the effect of the point effect that was monotonous can be enhanced by shifting the mode during execution of the point effect.

  In addition, even when the mode is changed during the point effect, the point effect after the mode change is executed in the display mode corresponding to the display mode before the mode change, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand point effect. Can do.

  Furthermore, although details will be described later, in a predetermined mode (for example, “normal mode A”), a display mode (for example, indicators P1 to P3 indicating “4. 4.4 ”), but by changing to a different mode (for example,“ dice mode ”) while the display mode is displayed, the player can use the indicator display mode after the mode transition. The display mode (for example, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “4.4”) indicating that the privilege (for example, the privilege 2) is provided is set to be displayed.

  Thus, a privilege is provided from the display mode which shows the low reference value with the low expectation degree to which a privilege is provided by making it transfer to the mode from which the display mode of the indicator which shows giving a privilege with respect to a player differs. To a display mode (or a high standard display mode with a high degree of expectation to which a privilege is given).

  Further, in the final stage of the point production (for example, a state in which the special symbol fluctuates three times during the point production), the current mode has a low expectation of a display mode in which a privilege is given (for example, “normal mode A”) Display mode in which a privilege is given from a display mode showing a low reference value with a low degree of expectation to which a privilege is given (or even if each indicator P1 to P3 is a display mode showing a low numerical value) Since there is a possibility that the mode shifts to a high standard display mode in which the degree of expectation to which a privilege is given is high, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

  Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point effect in this control example will be described. The point effect of this control example is set to start from “normal mode A”, and the mode transition is executed when it is determined that the mode is shifted as a result of the mode transition lottery executed during the point effect. (Hereinafter referred to as first mode transition). In addition to the above-described determination of mode transition, mode transition is executed based on the determination result and the indicator display mode (hereinafter referred to as second mode transition).

  Furthermore, with respect to the mode transition destination, restrictions (that is, prohibition processing) are set based on the determination result or the display mode of the indicator, and the effect of the point effect is reduced by executing the mode transition. Suppresses the occurrence of a situation.

  First, in the “normal mode A”, as shown in FIG. 195, “dice mode”, “normal mode B”, and “bingo mode” are set as the destinations of the first mode transition, and the mode transition lottery is won. To the mode set as the migration destination. That is, the “normal mode A” set as the first mode when the point effect is executed is set to be able to shift to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode shift.

  In the case of the display mode in which the first mode transition described above is performed and the display mode before the mode transition gives the privilege 2 is notified, the display mode after the mode transition is also notified that the privilege 2 is given. When the display mode is displayed in the display mode and the display mode before the mode transition is a display mode (high reference display mode) indicating the high standard, the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in the display mode (high standard display mode) indicating the high standard. Is done. Thereby, even if it is a case where mode transfer is performed in the middle of point production, the situation (display mode) of an indicator can be notified to a player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the “normal mode A” is a “dice mode” in the case of a predetermined display mode (for example, “4.4.4”) in which all the indicators P1 to P3 have the same display mode as the second mode transition. It is configured to be able to migrate to. In this case, in the “dice mode” after the mode transition, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same appearance (that is, a “double”) display mode (for example, “3.3”). As described above, the mode transition is executed in various situations in the point effect by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the “normal mode A”, when the transition condition for the first mode transition and the transition condition for the second mode transition are satisfied at the same time, the second mode transition is prioritized and executed. This is because, in contrast to the first mode transition for enhancing the effect, the second mode transition is easily set to the mode transition based on the determination result of the special symbol. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, in the “normal mode A”, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the special symbol is won, the transition condition for the second mode transition is likely to be satisfied. It is configured. In other words, since the state in which the second mode transition condition is satisfied becomes a state where expectation can be expected for the jackpot, by executing the second mode transition condition in preference to the first mode transition condition, It is possible to execute a mode transition that gives expectation.

  In this way, in the point effect that can be transferred to multiple modes, the conditions for establishing the multiple mode transition conditions are set so that the winning expectations for winning the jackpot are different, and if multiple mode transition conditions are satisfied at the same time, By executing the mode transition based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher expectation of winning, it is possible to execute the mode transition during the point effect as an effect that the player expects a big hit, enhancing the effect of the effect There is an effect that can be.

  Next, when the mode set during the point effect is “dice roller mode”, “normal mode A” or “bingo mode” is set as the first mode transition. That is, it is set so as not to shift from the “dice mode” to the “normal mode B”. This is a forbidden process set in advance, and is the first mode for a mode in which it is difficult for the player to relate the indicator display mode before the mode transition to the indicator display mode after the mode transition. Even if the transition condition for transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won), the mode transition is set so as not to be performed. Thereby, even if the mode transition is executed during the point effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in the case of shifting from “dice mode” to “normal mode A”, “normal mode A” displayed when shifting from “normal mode A” to “dice mode” in the current point effect. The display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 are set so as not to be lower than the display modes of the indicators P1 to P3 (so that the numerical value of each indicator does not decrease). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the mode transition destination display mode can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode transition is executed a plurality of times during one point effect and the mode is shifted again to the originally set mode. It should be noted that a limit (for example, once) may be set for the number of mode transitions executed during one point effect so that the mode is not shifted to a mode already displayed during one point effect.

  When “normal mode B” is set, only “normal mode A” is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for the first mode transition is satisfied (when the mode transition lottery is won). When “bingo mode” is set, only “normal mode B” is set as the transition destination when the transition condition for transition to the first mode is satisfied.

  As described above, the mode transition executed for the point effect in the present control example is easy to understand for the player due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and further provides an expectation.

  In this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the result of special symbol determination and the indicator display mode) is set to “normal mode A” only, but it may be set in other modes. Good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, and an upper limit (for example, once) may be provided for the number of mode transitions executed in one point effect. By comprising in this way, there exists an effect that the production | presentation effect of the mode transition in point production can be heightened more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the display mode of the indicator in the point effect will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a point display method. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of layers are overlaid (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer displaying a character image of the third symbol variation effect (main effect) among a plurality of layers, and FIG. 198 (b) is a diagram showing a plurality of layers. FIG. 198 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer that displays a point image (sub-effect), and FIG. 198 (c) combines a plurality of layers (a layer that displays a character image and a layer that displays a point image). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the done image.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the layer displaying the character image is divided into a plurality of small regions (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small region where the character is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) and a small area (Dm11) in which no character is displayed are discriminated, and image processing is performed so that the small area (Dm11) in which no character is displayed is transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the layer displaying the point image is also divided into a plurality of small regions (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, like the layer displaying the character image. A point display process for displaying points for all small areas is performed. In this point display process, when a command indicating the number of points output from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

  Then, by creating an image of each layer, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), only a small region (Dm11) in which no character is displayed is combined with the back of the layer displaying the character image. The layer displaying the point image can be visually recognized, and the point can be displayed at a position that does not interfere with the character image.

  By executing the above-described image creation processing, it is not necessary to execute processing for determining the point display position when executing point display, so that the control load can be reduced.

  In the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198, since there is one small area (Dm11) in which no character is displayed, that is, one permissible area in which point display is possible, processing for transmitting the small area as it is. When there are a plurality of small areas where no character is displayed, a process of selecting one small area from the small areas may be executed. For example, the type of a character image (main image) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (main effect) is determined, and a character imitating a hero as a character associated with a specific character (for example, a point effect indicator) One of the allowable areas adjacent to the small area where Dc1) is displayed (in the case of FIG. 198 (a), small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32) may be selected. This makes it possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (main effect). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player who is gazing at the third symbol variation effect (main effect) misses the point display.

  Further, the point display is made visible to the player by allowing one of the allowable areas, which are small areas in which the character image is not displayed, to pass through the layer displaying the character image, but other control methods may be used. . For example, in the image created this time, a small area where a character is displayed but the character is not displayed later is determined, and the transparent process may be performed at a timing when the character is not displayed in the small area. By configuring in this way, a time lag can be provided from when a command for point display is received until the point is actually displayed, and the effect of displaying the point can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the point display is made based on the movement of the character moving in the third symbol variation effect, a display (relationship between the third symbol variation effect which is the main effect and the point effect which is the sub-effect) ( Production) can be executed, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

  When such a control method is used, in the third symbol variation effect (main effect), an effect in which two types of characters confront each other is executed, and a character who becomes a friend (for example, the character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. If it does, points will be displayed, and if an enemy character (for example, the character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, points will not be displayed, or the value will be lower than the points displayed when an ally attacks (numerical value) It is better to display the points. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third design variation effect that is the main effect and the point effect that is the sub-effect are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In the control example described above, the same number of points is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Further, the point display method described in the second control example described above may be used.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in each control example described above in that the internal level selection table 222aa, the internal score selection table 222ab, the number selection table 222ac, the use score selection table 222ad, and the final The display mode selection table 222ae, the character selection table 222af, the mode selection table 222ag, and the display form selection table 222ae are different, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200 (a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the current determination variation determination result, the currently stored winning determination result determination result, and the value of the effect counter 223f. A table for selecting an internal level. The determination result of the current special figure fluctuation is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the determination result of the winning information currently stored on hold is output from the main controller 110. Judgment is made based on a winning command.

  This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in a point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in a point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the current success / failure determination result is “winning”, the on-hold determination result is “winning”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “3” ”Is selected and“ 150 to 198 ”is selected, the internal level“ 2 ”is selected, the current determination result is“ winning ”, and the on-hold determination result is“ out ”. If the value of the counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “2” is selected, and if it is “150 to 198”, the internal level “1” is selected. Also, if the current success / failure determination result is “out”, the on-hold determination result is “winning”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level “2” is selected. If it is “150 to 198”, the internal level “1” is selected, the current success / failure determination result is “out”, and the on / off determination result is “out”, and the production counter 223f If the value is “0-149”, the internal level “1” is selected, and if it is “150-198”, the internal level “2” is selected.

  As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is selected to be a high numerical value according to an advantageous state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the game (for example, a state in which the jackpot is won). It is configured. In this way, by providing an index (internal level) according to the gaming state, and executing an effect based on the index, the expectation that the gaming state is advantageous for each effect to be executed is easily set. be able to.

  Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referred to when selecting an internal score to be used when executing a point effect based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is.

  Specifically, when the value of the internal level is “3” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 198”, “7” is selected as the internal score used in the point effect, and the internal level If the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 99”, “5” is selected as the internal score, and if it is “100 to 198”, “6” is selected as the internal score. . Further, when the value of the internal level is “1” and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “4” is set as the internal score, and when “150” is “150 to 198”, “5” is set as the internal score. Is selected.

  As described above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point effect is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set corresponding to the gaming state. A point effect can be executed.

  Next, the number selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number of times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), in the number selection table 222ac, a winning number selection table 222ac1 and a removal number selection table 222ac2 are set. The number selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times that the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is changed continuously). Different selection tables are referred to depending on the determination result or the determination result for the winning information stored on hold.

  FIG. 201B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit count selection table 222ac1. This winning number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be executed when the determination result is a win, and the point effect ends when the special symbol changes that the determination result is a hit. The number of point effects is selected. Specifically, if the result of determining whether or not the current special symbol variation is correct is “1” as the number of point effects, the special symbol variation after one rotation (that is, after the completion of the current special symbol variation) is executed. “2 times” is selected as the number of point effects when the determination result of whether or not (holding storage) is successful, and “3 times” is selected when the determination result of special symbol fluctuation after two rotations is positive.

  In this way, by setting the number of point effects based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that wins is executed, it is possible to suppress the start of a winning game in the middle of the point effects, and the point effects The production effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 201 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the miss count selection table 222ac2. This missed number selection table 222ac2 is executed when the result of the judgment is wrong (that is, when the result of the special symbol change this time is not the winning judgment result corresponding to the winning information stored on hold). The number of point effects is selected on the basis of the number of winning information stored on hold (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved balls).

  Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is “0”, “−” is set as the number of point effects. This is for preventing the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command for executing the point effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a point effect that can be executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations in a state where the result of determination of success / failure is unacceptable and the number of reserved balls is “0”. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the point effect that is executed. In this control example, the result of the determination is not good, and the point effect is not executed when the number of reserved balls is “0”. However, other configurations may be used, for example, The point effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (10%).

  When the number of reserved balls is “1”, “2” is the number of point effects, and when the number of reserved balls is “2”, the number of point effects is “3” and the number of reserved balls is “3”. "4" is set as the number of point effects. In this way, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, the point effect when the determination result is wrong and the point effect when the result is correct Can be prevented from being determined by the number of point effects for the player.

  In addition, in this control example, when the success / failure determination result is a win for the number of point effects, it is selected based on the timing of execution of the special symbol variation in which the success / failure determination result is a win. Although it is configured to be selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the point effect in the case where the result of determining whether or not the result is correct, the number of reserved balls may be set as the maximum number of point effects, and the number may be selected by lottery within the range. With this configuration, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

  Next, the use score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the use score selection table 222ad. The use score selection table 222ad is for selecting a score to be used at each point effect, and as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the use score selection table 222ad is the number of point effects (remaining times). And the use score is selected based on the remaining score of the internal score.

  Specifically, when the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is “4” and the remaining score is “4”, the use score is “1”, and when the remaining score is “5”, the use score is “2” is selected, “3” is selected as the use score when the remaining score is “6”, and “−” is selected as the use score when the remaining score is “7”. When the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is “3” and the remaining score is “3”, “1” is used as the use score, and when the remaining score is “4”, the use score is “2”. ”, When the remaining score is“ 5 ”,“ 3 ”is selected as the use score, and when the remaining score is“ 6 ”,“ 4 ”is selected as the use score, and when the remaining score is“ 7 ” “−” Is selected as the use score.

  Further, when the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is “2” and the remaining score is “2”, “1” is used as the use score, and when the remaining score is “3”, the use score is “2”. ", When the remaining score is" 4 "," 3 "as the use score, when the remaining score is" 5 "," 4 "as the use score, and when the remaining score is" 6 " When the score is “5” and the remaining score is “7”, “−” is selected as the use score. If the counter value of the production counter 223ac is “1” and the remaining score is “1”, “1” is used as the use score, and “2” is used as the use score when the remaining score is “2”. ”, When the remaining score is“ 3 ”,“ 3 ”is selected as the use score, and when the remaining score is“ 4 ”,“ 4 ”is selected as the use score, and when the remaining score is“ 5 ” When the use score is “5” and the remaining score is “6”, “6” is selected as the use score, and when the remaining score is “7”, “7” is selected as the use score.

  In this way, by selecting the use score to be used for the point effect executed during the current special symbol change based on the remaining number of point effect and the remaining score, the number of times the point effect continues (the number of special symbol changes) ) Is suppressed by the player in advance.

  Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display. A mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

  This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point effect, and the final display mode of each mode when the point effect is executed. The final display mode corresponding to the mode set in advance at the final stage of the point effect (change in the last special symbol in which the point effect is executed) is displayed.

  FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. This final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “normal mode A”, and includes the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of each indicator P1-P3 is selected.

  Specifically, when the internal score is “7” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.7.7” is selected. In the case of “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6. 7” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P1 to P3 are set to “4.4. .4 ”is selected. In the case of“ 150 to 198 ”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate“ 7.7.7 ”is selected. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation of this time is won, is higher than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2) as the final display mode. The final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which the score is given becomes the maximum value is selected.

  Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “7.6.5” is selected. In the case of “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.7.4” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P1 to P3 are “5.4.7”. Is selected. When the display mode is “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4” is selected, the internal score is “5”, When the value of the counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “6.3.1” is selected, and when the value is “50 to 99”, the indicators P1 to P3 are A display mode indicating “5.5.3” is selected, and “100 to 1” is selected. In the case of “9”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “5.6.2” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4”. The display mode to be shown is selected.

  When the internal score is “4” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.3.2” is selected, and “50 ˜99 ”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate“ 5.5.1 ”is selected, and in the case of“ 100 to 149 ”, the indicators P1 to P3 are“ 5.4.3 ”. In the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4” is selected.

  In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of each indicator in “normal mode A” is changed in a different manner. It becomes possible, and the expectation degree can be increased by changing to a display mode in which a specific indicator (indicator P3) shows a high value.

  In the point effect of this control example, the display mode of the indicator in the middle stage is the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point effects, and this time. Since it is selected according to the score, the value of the final display mode is high (as the display mode is closer to the maximum value), the value of the indicator is likely to increase in the middle. Therefore, since the final display mode can be predicted by grasping the rise of the indicator in the middle stage of the point effect, the point effect can be continuously watched.

  FIG. 203B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. The final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “dice mode” and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Thus, the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected.

  Specifically, when the internal score is “7” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “5.5” is selected, and “ In the case of “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “3.3” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “4.4”. When the mode is selected and “150 to 198” is selected, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “6.6” is selected. That is, when the internal score “7” that is selected only when the special symbol variation of this time is won is a jackpot, it is a display mode of an indicator that is given a high value score as the final display mode. “6.6” is set to be selected.

  Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0-49”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “5.3” is selected, and “50- 99, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “6.3” is selected. In the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “1.1” is selected. When “150 to 198” is selected, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “2.2” is selected, the internal score is “5”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 0”. 49, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “3.2” is selected. In the case of “50 to 99”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “6.2” is selected. Selected, "100-1 In the case of “9”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “2.4” is selected. In the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “1.1” is selected. Selected.

  When the internal score is “4” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “1.4” is selected, and “50 to 99”. ", The display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 2.3 "is selected, and in the case of" 100 to 149 ", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate" 3.2 "is selected. In the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “4.1” is selected.

  In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the combination of the display modes of the indicators in the “dice mode” according to the internal score is zero. It becomes possible to make a difference in whether or not it becomes an eye.

  FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. This final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the “normal mode B”, and includes the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of the indicator P6 is selected.

  Specifically, when the internal score is “7” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “100%” is selected, and “150 to 198”. ", The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates" 90% "is selected. That is, when the internal score “7” that is selected only when the special symbol variation of this time is won is a jackpot, it is a display mode of an indicator that is given a high value score as the final display mode. “100%” is set to be selected.

  Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “70%” is selected, and “50 to 149” is selected. In this case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “80%” is selected. In the case of “150 to 198”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “90%” is selected, and the internal score is “5”. When the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected, and in the case of “50 to 99”, the indicator P6 is “60”. The display mode indicating “%” is selected. When “100 to 149”, the display mode indicating “70%” is selected, and when “150 to 198”, the indicator P6 is “80”. % " There is selected.

  When the internal score is “4” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “40%” is selected, and the case is “50 to 99”. The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “50%” is selected. In the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “60%” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198” The display mode in which the indicator P6 indicates “80%” is selected.

  Thus, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, the display mode of the indicator in the “normal mode B” is finally set according to the internal score. It becomes possible to make a difference in how far it rises.

  Next, the character display selection table 222af will be described with reference to FIG. This character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point effect is executed in the “normal mode A”, and is made to appear in order to suggest an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3. It is a table for selecting a character (secondary effect mini character (see FIG. 163)).

  Specifically, when the internal score is “7” and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “Hero” is selected as the character, and when “150 to 198” is selected, “Kame” is selected as the character. In other words, when the internal score “7”, which is selected only when the special symbol variation of this time is a big win, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero always changes, "Is set to be easy to select.

  Next, when the internal score is “6” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, “Hero” is selected as the character, and when “100 to 149”, the character is selected. When “Rabbit” is selected and “150-198” is selected, “Kame” is selected as the character, the internal score is “5”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0-49”. “Hero” is selected as the character, “Rabbit” is selected as the character in the case of “50 to 99”, and “Kame” is selected as the character in the case of “100 to 198”.

  Further, when the internal score is “4” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, “Rabbit” is selected as the character, and when “100 to 198”, the character “ “Kame” is selected.

  In this way, by selecting the character that suggests the indicator whose display mode changes from the indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, this time, depending on the character to be displayed It is possible to predict whether or not the point effect is a point effect that is executed when the determination result is a win, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In the middle of the point effect in which “normal mode A” is set, when the indicator display mode is changed, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. Yes. Thereby, it becomes possible to relate the display of a character and the change of the display mode of an indicator, and can improve an effect.

  Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when a mode transition destination is selected during a point effect. The mode selection table 222ag is referred to when the mode transition flag 223ai is determined to be on in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212) (S6406 in FIG. 212).

  In the mode selection table 222ag, the mode to be transferred is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, the mode forbidden as the mode transition destination is set not to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the mode transition between the modes in which it is difficult to find the relationship in the display mode of the indicator displayed corresponding to each mode.

  The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, design, etc.) of the mode transition destination indicator displayed at the time of mode transition. This display form selection table 222ah is referred to when determining the display form in the display mode selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6451 in FIG. 213).

  In the display form selection table 222ah, it is selected whether or not to change the display form to the “high expectation form” based on the internal score set in the current point effect and the value of the effect counter. This "high expectation degree form" is a display form for notifying the player that the current point effect is a point effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot.

  Specifically, it is a display form in which the external shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to “special color (red)” or “special pattern (fish pattern)”. . In addition, it is good for this "high expectation form" to set the content common to each indicator (P1-P7). This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the “highly expected form” is displayed, regardless of which mode the point effect is made in which mode.

  Thus, by allowing the display mode to be changed only for the indicator displayed when the mode transition is executed, the player is expected to perform the mode transition during the point effect. Can be produced and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. 199, the description will be continued. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that the internal level storage area 223aa, the continuous effect start flag 223ab, the effect number counter 223ac, the score information storage area 223ad, and the remaining score. The information storage area 223ae, the display information storage area 223af, the scoring effect temporary storage area 223ag, the mode information storage area 223ah, the mode transition flag 223ai, and the character information storage area 223aj are added, and the other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. In this control example, the production counter 223f has a plurality of counters, and each counter independently updates the value. However, the explanation is omitted, and the production counter 223f is used as a generic name. do. Therefore, even if processing for referencing the value of the effect counter 223f is executed at a plurality of locations in one control processing routine, different counter values are actually acquired in each processing.

  The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing an internal level set for the point effect. In the internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). The set internal level is referred to when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when the point effect ends in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210). If it is determined (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored internal level information is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

  The continuous effect start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the point effect that is a continuous effect is being executed. When the effect is on, the point effect is being executed. Indicates that it has not been executed. The continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) after the next time, it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed when starting the continuous effect. (S6301 in FIG. 210), when it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), it is set to off (S6313 in FIG. 210).

  The effect number counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of continuous effects (point effects) executed this time. In this effect number counter 223ac, a value corresponding to the number of effects determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211), and in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) to be executed is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of the effect number counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether the point effect is a continuous effect (S2051 in FIG. 209), and the point effect setting process (S2051). 210) (refer to FIG. 210) when determining whether or not the continuous effect ends (S6307 in FIG. 210), and in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the use score to be used in the current variation is determined. Is referred to (S6501 in FIG. 214).

  The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected by the internal score selection table 222ab described above and the use score selected by the use score selection table 222ad described above. In the score information storage area 223ad, the internal score determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211), and determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). A use score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when determining the final display mode in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211). This is referred to when determining (S6356 in FIG. 211), and is referred to when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition processing (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). The use score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when the remaining score information is updated in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214). Reference is made when determining the display mode when the value of the performance counter 223ac is greater than 1 (S6503: No in FIG. 214) (S6507 in FIG. 214). When it is determined that the point effect is ended (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

  The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used score already used from the internal score set for the continuous performance (point effect) being executed this time. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when the use score is determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point effect is ended (FIG. 210). S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

  The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point effect which is a continuous effect and the display mode displayed this time. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). When it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is configured so that display modes for modes other than the currently set mode can be set, and even if the mode transition is executed during the point effect, the indicator can be smoothly displayed. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

  The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect to be output to the display control device 114 with a single display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag temporarily stores information related to the display form (the color, pattern, etc. of the indicator) determined in the display mode changing process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information regarding the display mode (display mode displayed after the mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and the information regarding the display mode determined in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). Is temporarily stored (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214), and is referred to when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information related to various effects is initialized ( S6506 in FIG. 214).

  The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. The mode information storage area 223ah is updated to information corresponding to the mode after the transition when the mode transition is performed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6409 in FIG. 212), and the display background command is set. It is referred to (S6410 in FIG. 212) and is referred to in determining the display mode in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6504 and S6507 in FIG. 214). If it is determined that the point effect ends (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point effect is set in advance to start from “normal mode A”, when the point effect is executed, information corresponding to “normal mode A” is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. Is stored.

  The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether or not a mode transition condition (a condition for satisfying the first mode transition) is established during a point effect that is a continuous performance. When the mode transition flag 223ai is on, the mode transition condition is satisfied. In the case of OFF, it indicates that the mode transition condition is not satisfied. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that there is a mode transition in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6510 in FIG. 214). In the process (see FIG. 212), it is referred to to determine whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the process regarding the mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Is set.

  Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be described. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in the current special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). Thereafter, a lottery for determining whether or not to perform mode transition is performed (S6509 in FIG. 214). If it is determined that mode transition is to be performed (winning the mode transition lottery) (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes), the mode is selected. The transition flag 223ai is set on. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special symbol fluctuation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. (S6406 in FIG. 212), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), processing related to mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

  That is, in the point effect in this control example, the mode transition is performed when the next special symbol variation is executed. For example, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the mode transition is selected as the current special symbol variation. By making a lottery based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by the above, the player can recognize the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol change, and shift to the mode with the next special symbol change Can be expected to be executed.

  The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information relating to the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in the character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to indicate which indicator P1 to P3 display mode changes in the state where the “normal mode A” is set. It is. In the character information storage area 223aj, information related to the character determined in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set, and when the point effect command for display is set in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 in FIG. 214) and when it is determined that the point effect is finished (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, only the “normal mode A” is configured to display a character for suggesting whether the indicator display mode changes. However, does the indicator display mode change for each mode? May be executed, or character information may be used to indicate whether or not to change the mode. In this case, for example, when a mode other than the “normal mode A” is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point effect shifts to “normal mode A”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206 to FIG. 208, a description will be given of differences in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example from the above-described control examples. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same location as each control example mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example generates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to the point is described on the back side of the character in the image for one frame. It is different in that it is set as follows. By generating the drawing list in this way, the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198 can be created.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. It is. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in the third control example. In the variable display setting process 3, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above.

  When the process of S2006 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the production counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (0) (S2051: No), it is set. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is to execute a point effect (S2052). If it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), the point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is completed, the process proceeds to S2007.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2051, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, when the point effect is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed and S2053 is performed. Move on to processing. This prevents a situation in which a new point effect is executed while the point effect is being executed.

  Further, when it is determined in the process of S2052 that the change pattern command does not execute the point effect (S2052: No), and when the process of S2053 is completed, the change in the second control example described above. Similar to the display setting process 2, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) determines the display mode of the point effect and transmits a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114. It is processing.

  In the point effect setting process 2 (S2053), it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined that it is off (S6301: No), the continuous production start flag 223ab is set to on (S6302), and the point production initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: Yes), since the point effect that is a continuous effect has already been executed, the point effect is performed. The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 211, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). In the point effect initial setting process (S6303), it is determined that the change pattern command set in the change display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) is to execute the point effect, and various kinds of cases in which the point effect is executed. This is a process for executing the initial setting.

  When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined with reference to the internal level selection table 222aa and set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the point effect to be executed this time is a point effect that leads to a special symbol.

  Next, based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa in S6351 and the value of the effect counter 223f, the internal score used in the point effect executed this time is determined with reference to the internal score selection table 222ab. The score information storage area 223ad is set (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used for setting the final display mode in the point effect and setting the character as described above. It is also used for setting a use score and setting a remaining score each time a special symbol change is started while the point effect continues.

  When the process of S6352 is completed, the number of effects of the current point effect is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of effects is set in the effect number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number selection table 222ac refers to different tables depending on whether the determination result is a win or not.

  Specifically, when the winning information corresponding to the hold storage executed after the third rotation is winning, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to and “4” is determined as the number of effects. Then, 4 is set to the effect number counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the effect number “4”. The value of the effect number counter 223ac is decremented by 1 every time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and is subtracted until the counter value becomes “0”.

  Next, based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, the display mode of each indicator that is finally displayed in the current point effect is determined, and is displayed in the display information storage area 223af. The setting is made (S6355).

  This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to the four modes (“normal mode A”, “dice mode”, “normal mode B”, “bingo mode”) that are shifted during the point effect. In this process, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. As a result, an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score can be displayed regardless of which mode the point effect is ended in.

  When the process of S6355 is completed, the character used when the point effect mode is set to “normal mode A” is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and character information is determined. The storage area 223aj is set (S6356), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most aspects including the final display aspect of the point effect that is executed this time are set. By setting the point effect mode in advance in this way, it becomes possible to advance the point effect mode in the middle stage according to the final display mode, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable. Can be executed.

  In this control example, the final display mode of all the indicators is set as the final display mode. However, for example, the final display mode is set only for the indicator related to the display mode that informs the player that the privilege is to be given. However, the display mode of other indicators may be set at random. Thereby, the display mode of each indicator in a point effect can be made more diverse, and it can suppress getting tired of a game early. In this case, the prohibition process may be executed so that a notification that gives a privilege that is not actually given a display mode set at random is not given. Thereby, the point effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be executed.

  In this control example, when the point effect is executed, the internal level is set based on the determination result, but the internal level based on the determination result is always set by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It may be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the internal level even when setting the production mode of the production other than the point production, and the effect that the production corresponding to the gaming state of the special symbol can be easily set. is there.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the winning / failing determination result is determined with reference to not only the special symbol executed this time but also the stored winning information, but the determination is made based only on the lottery result of the special symbol executed this time. The determination result may be determined and an internal level may be set.

  Returning to FIG. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is completed, a mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process for determining whether or not the mode is shifted during the point effect and a process for changing the display mode of the indicator when the mode is shifted are executed.

  Here, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process (S6304). In the point effect in this control example, when it is determined that the mode is changed as a result of predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point effect mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) described later) (the mode change flag 223ai is turned on). When the mode is changed), when the mode is changed based on the set mode, the current display mode, and the internal score, there are two mode change conditions.

  As described above, the mode executed during the point effect by performing the mode transition randomly performed by the lottery and the mode transition performed when the mode transition condition (for example, the display mode) is satisfied. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the result of the determination is high (internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is “Zero” in “normal mode A”. When it becomes the eye (“2.2.2” or “4.4.4”), it is configured to shift to the “dice roller mode”. This is a situation in which it is difficult to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player in “normal mode A” (for example, notification that an effect with high expectation of jackpot is executed, notification of winning of jackpot). Even if the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 does not reach the maximum value, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is easily given when the display mode becomes a predetermined display mode (both eyes display mode). It is for making it into a state. Thereby, even in a situation where the display mode of the indicator is not good in the point effect (for example, in the case of “normal mode A”, the situation where the points are not increased), the privilege that is advantageous to the player by the mode transition is obtained. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation given, it is possible to entertain the player to the end.

  Further, in this control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 becomes a doublet in the “normal mode A”, a privilege that gives the player an advantage of the doublet display mode is given. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation without giving the player a sense of incongruity with respect to the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode transition.

  Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the mode information currently set is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is “normal mode A”. (S6402). If it is determined that the currently set mode is “normal mode A” (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is “2.2. Whether it is “2” or “4.4.4” is determined (S6403).

  In the process of S6403, when it is determined that the current display mode is “2.2.2” or “4.4.4” (S6403: Yes), whether the internal score is “6” or more. If it is determined (S6404) that it is “6” or more (S6404: Yes), “dice mode” is set (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6404 that it is not “6” or more (“5” or less) (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends. To do.

  If it is determined in the process of S6402 that the currently set mode is not “normal mode A” (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, the current display mode is “2.2.2. ”Or“ 4.4.4 ”(S6403: No), it is next determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

  This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag that is set in a point effect mode setting process (S6305) described later. When this mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON, the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210). ) Mode transition processing (S6304 in FIG. 212), the mode transition is executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process ends.

  Here, the mode selection table 222ag referred to in the processing of S6407 will be described. In the mode selection table 222ag, the mode to be transferred to is selected based on the currently set mode and the effect counter 223f. This mode transition is provided with a prohibition for restricting the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, in the state where “the dice mode” is set, the mode transition to the “normal mode B” is not performed. In such a state that the “bingo mode” is set, the mode is set so as not to shift to the “dice mode”.

  This prohibition process is intended to prevent the display mode of the indicator from being changed by shifting to the mode during the point effect, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. By configuring in this way, we can take advantage of the merits of mode transition in point effects (the point that the player can have an expectation until the end of the effect by changing the display mode of the indicator in accordance with the mode transition) However, it is possible to suppress demerits (points that are difficult to understand for the player due to the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition).

  Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the process of S6405 or the process of S6407 is finished, a display mode change process (S6408) is executed. This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

  Next, the display mode changing process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode changing process (S6408). This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for setting the indicator display mode displayed after the mode transition based on the indicator display mode before the mode transition, and the indicator display mode before the mode transition is predetermined. Are displayed (a display mode for notifying that a privilege is granted to a player or a display mode similar to a display mode for notifying that a privilege is granted to a player). The display mode after the mode transition is set based on the above.

  When the display mode changing process (S6408) is executed, the display mode is first determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). This display form selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display form (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the value of the internal score set in the current point effect and the effect counter 223f. Thereby, when the mode is changed in the point effect, the player can be watched not only in the display mode of the indicator after the mode change but also in the display form (color, pattern), and the effect can be further enhanced. .

  Moreover, even if the mode transition is executed in the early stage of the point effect, that is, when the indicator display mode is far from the final display mode, the indicator display is based on the internal score set in the point effect. Since the display form is set, it is possible to execute an effect that increases the expectation level of the jackpot.

  When the processing of S6451 is completed, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453). The SP reach correspondence is a display mode for notifying that an effect (SP reach) with a high expectation degree of jackpot is executed. Specifically, if it is “normal mode A”, one of the indicators P1 and P2 is used. If the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), the indicator P4 and P5 are “Solo (excluding 6.6)” if the “die roller mode” and the “normal mode B”. In the display mode in which the indicator P6 is “50% to 90%”, the indicator P7 is in the display mode in which “2 lines are established” in the “bingo mode”.

  In the process of S6453, when it is determined that the current display mode is SP reach compatible (S6453: Yes), the SP reach compatible display mode is determined and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454). This process ends. That is, when the display mode before the mode transition is a display mode corresponding to the SP reach, the display mode after the mode transition is also set to the display mode corresponding to the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege displayed before the mode transition (notification that SP reach is executed) disappears after the mode transition (display mode not compatible with SP reach is displayed). It is possible to execute a suitable effect that does not give dissatisfaction with the image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6453 that the current display mode is not SP reach compatible (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode corresponding to the high standard. (S6455). As described above, the high standard is not a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator gives a privilege to the player, but is set as a display mode that approximates it.

  Specifically, if it is “normal mode A”, the display mode of any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is “6”, and if it is “during the dice mode”, the number of the indicator P4 is “5”. If the display mode is “normal mode B”, the indicator P6 is “40%”.

  By configuring in this way, even if a mode shift occurs during a point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode shift is significantly different from the indicator display mode displayed in the previous point effect. It can be suppressed.

  For example, in “normal mode A”, when the mode transition is executed in a state where the display mode in which the indicator P1 indicates “6” is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the high standard, and the mode shifts to “bingo mode” Is a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode shift indicates “one line established”. Therefore, the point effect after the mode transition can be executed while maintaining the expectation that the privilege before the mode transition is given to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 213, the description will be continued. In the process of S6455, when it is determined that the current display mode is the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag. (S6456), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the current display mode is not the display mode indicating the high standard (S6455: No), the display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined, set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag, and the process ends.

  As described above, when the mode transition is executed in the point effect in this control example, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation for the player. And when the mode change is performed when the display mode informing that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the aspect, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

  Further, the display mode that approximates the display mode for notifying that a privilege is given to the player is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in a state in which the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In such a case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, when the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be given a little more. Even if the mode transition is executed while watching the point effect while expecting, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the expectation can be maintained.

  In this control example, when the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that a privilege is given, the display mode is stored so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two levels. The display mode may be stored. By comprising in this way, the dissatisfaction of the player by the difference in the display mode of the indicator before mode transfer and the display mode of the indicator after mode transfer can be suppressed.

  In this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where a display mode corresponding to the high standard or a display mode that does not reach the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is performed. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode having, for example, the indicator display mode before the mode transition based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed Alternatively, the display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for mode transition.

  Returning to FIG. 212, the description will be continued. When the display mode changing process (S6408 in FIG. 213) ends, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is then updated to the mode information corresponding to the mode set this time (S6409), and the set mode is set. The display background command corresponding to is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. When the mode transition process (S6304) is completed, a point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed next. This point effect mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator to be changed in the currently executed variable display.

  Here, the point effect mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point effect mode setting process (S6305). When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the use score selection table 222ad is referred to this time using the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the effect counter 223ac. The use score to be used in the fluctuation of is determined (S6501).

  Based on the determined use score, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated (S6502). Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the used score used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the performance counter 223ac is 1 (S6503). If it is determined that the value is 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, if it is the last point effect, the display information storage area 223af. The final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in the current mode information and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and is set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6503, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the use score determined in S6501 and the display information storage area 223af are set. The current display mode is determined based on the current final display mode and the current display mode, and is set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

  Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508). Next, it is determined whether or not the mode shift is executed (S6509). If it is determined that the mode shift is present (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed without setting the mode transition flag 223ai on, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) ends, next, the value of the effect count counter 223ac is decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac after the subtraction is “0” or less. (S6307). When it is determined that it is not “0” or less (1 or more) (S6307: No), since the point effect continues, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the effect number counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), since the point effect ends at this time, the score information storage area 223ad is stored. Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa (S6312), the continuous production start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by display control 114 in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. This control example is different from the above-described second control example in that a point effect-related command process is added in the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 215), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether a display point effect-related command has been received (S2637).

  When it is determined that the display point effect-related command has not been received in the process of S2737 (S2637: No), the various processes described in the control examples described above are executed as other command processes (S2614). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2537 that the display point effect-related command has been received (S2537: Yes), the point effect-related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

  Next, the point effect related command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 (a) is a flowchart showing the point effect related command processing (S2638). This point effect related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to the point effect are output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the point effect related command process (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command is determined. A process (S6602) is performed and it transfers to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command process (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603). If it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), the indicator command process (S6604) is executed, and the display indicator is displayed. If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, the point command process (S6602) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 (b) is a flowchart showing the point command processing (S6602). This point command processing (S6602) executes processing corresponding to the point command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and points that indicate the change in the display mode of each indicator during the point effect (see FIG. 198). ) On the third symbol display device 81.

  In the point command processing (S6602), first, an effect display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, the number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. The data is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6702).

  Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

  Next, an indicator command process (S6604) executed in the point effect related command process (see FIG. 216 (a)) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). The indicator command process (S6604) is a process for executing a process corresponding to the indicator command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point effect.

  In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to display mode information (for example, display mode and set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined. The determined presentation display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6752).

  Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. (S6754). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6755), the point command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process 3.

  Next, a modification of the point display method described with reference to FIG. 198 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram illustrating a modification of point display in the third control example. FIG. 218 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer that displays a point image (sub-effect) among a plurality of layers in the present modification, and FIG. 218 (b) shows a plurality of layers in the present modification. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image obtained by combining layers, and FIG. 218 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218 (b) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (a), a plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) displaying character images have points at different display positions (display positions in each small area). Data that can be displayed is stored, and among them, a small area corresponding to the main effect to be executed this time is set, and a point display process for displaying the points of the set small area is executed. Then, an image obtained by combining the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 218 (b), in the image in which two characters (Dc1, Dc2) displayed in the state where the main effect is started are facing each other, the points (displayed in the small area Dm31) executed in the point display processing are displayed. Display point) overlaps with the character Dc1, and display processing is performed so that the player cannot visually recognize the display of the point.

  Thereafter, the main effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218 (c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, as the main effect, a plurality of action patterns such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) are set from the state shown in FIG. 218 (b). It is good to comprise so that it may be determined whether a point is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to progress content. As a result, it is possible to execute a display in which the third design variation effect that is the main effect and the point effect that is the sub-effect are associated with each other, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  In this control example, the small area where the point display is performed is specified based on the effect pattern of the main effect. For example, as described above, a plurality of motion patterns (each of a plurality of characters move as the main effect). Point) may be displayed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of operation patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218 (b), display processing is executed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping with the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping with the character Dc2. A point corresponding to the operation pattern set as may be displayed. In this case, the value (number) of the point displayed when the character Dc1 as the ally character moves is different from the value (number) of the point displayed when the character Dc2 as the enemy character moves. It is good to execute the display setting.

  By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to match | combine the value of the point to display with the operation pattern in a main effect, and can improve an effect more.

  As described above, in this control example, when the display contents of the point effects are determined by the sound lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Thus, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been executed, each command is displayed when the point display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 or the indicator display mode is changed. It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

  Therefore, when a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output each time, and a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since it is not necessary for the display control device 114 to perform processing such as rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them are set as a common display command. The sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to output to the display control device 114.

  As described above, when the mode transition is executed in the point effect in the third control example, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player. And when the mode change is performed when the display mode informing that the privilege is given to the player is displayed, the display informing that the privilege is given to the player Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the aspect, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player.

  Further, the display mode that approximates the display mode for notifying that a privilege is given to the player is discriminated and stored as the high reference value, and the mode transition is executed in a state in which the display mode showing the high reference value is displayed. In such a case, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, when the player is in a display mode informing that the privilege will be given a little more. Even if the mode transition is executed while watching the point effect while expecting, since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode showing the high reference value, the expectation can be maintained.

  In this control example, when the display mode is not a display mode for notifying that a privilege is given, the display mode is stored so that it can be discriminated between the high standard and the other two levels. The display mode may be stored. By comprising in this way, the dissatisfaction of the player by the difference in the display mode of the indicator before mode transfer and the display mode of the indicator after mode transfer can be suppressed.

  In this control example, when the mode transition is executed in a state where a display mode corresponding to the high standard or a display mode that does not reach the high standard is displayed, the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition is performed. The display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode having, for example, the indicator display mode before the mode transition based on the internal level and the internal score set when the point effect is executed Alternatively, the display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for mode transition.

  It should be noted that the configuration used for the point effect of the present control example and the configuration used for the point effect of the second control example described above may be used in combination. Similarly to the third control example, four modes may be set, and the configuration of the mode transition process of the present control example may be added. In the second control, the method for determining the point to be displayed in the present control example is described above. You may make it respond | correspond to the display content of the 3rd symbol fluctuation effect (main effect) like an example. Moreover, you may switch the structure which determines the position which displays a point among this control examples to the structure used in the 2nd control example mentioned above. Thereby, a more various production | presentation can be provided to a player.

  Furthermore, in “normal mode A”, the “privilege 1” given when the indicator P1 becomes MAX and the “privilege 2” given when the indicator P2 or P3 becomes MAX are expected to be a big hit Among the contents of the third symbol variation effect that is set stepwise, it is a privilege notifying that the level is raised with respect to the currently executed effect content, and “privilege 1” has, for example, a jackpot expectation The privilege that informs that the number of steps (two steps) is increased, and “privilege 2” may be, for example, a privilege that informs that the degree of expectation of jackpot is increased by one step.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the contents of the effect executed in the third symbol variation effect and the timing when the indicator becomes MAX, and the player pays attention to the effect. It becomes possible to make it. In this case, the timing when the indicator becomes MAX may be different from the timing when the privilege is given. Thus, in a state where the indicator becomes MAX and it is determined that the privilege is granted, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting which effect content is being executed and in which state the privilege is granted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the above-described first control example, in order to suggest and notify the content of the main effect of the variation pattern (the effect being executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm), it is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIGS. 112 and 113), which is a secondary effect, has been described. This reach navigation effect includes a time gauge Dm4a indicating the effect period of the main effect, a moving display unit (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the effect in the main effect, an informing unit Dm4c for indicating and informing the content of the main effect, and a guidance display. It is an effect display composed of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

  On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is one. The difference is that the reach navigation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is explained in a plurality of patterns. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the flow of reach navigation effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of reach navigation effects. This reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the change time of the effect (main effect) executed by a predetermined change pattern (super reach or special reach) in the change time of the special symbol, as in the first control example described above. This is a sub-effect, which allows the player to visually grasp and informs or suggests step by step. In this way, by displaying the contents of the main effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 (the description of the effect of the main effect, the variation time, and the expectation level that is a big hit) using the sub-effects, the player can be displayed. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In FIG. 219, the special symbol variation time is set to 60 seconds (see FIG. 117 (b)), develops into super reach 30 seconds after the start of variation, and 20 seconds later (that is, 50 seconds after the variation start). The flow of reach navigation effects when a variation pattern that further develops the main effects is selected is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 219, the pre-reach effect (the third symbol is a high-speed variation) is displayed as the main effect for 15 seconds after the change of the special symbol is started, and then the reach effect (the two third symbols on the left and right are displayed). (Stopping at the same number and changing only the third symbol in the middle) is displayed for 15 seconds. Thereafter, a super reach effect for 30 seconds in the main effect (for example, the change in the third pattern is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the characters confront each other in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 163).

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect in which the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is increased 20 seconds after the start of the super reach effect (for example, an ally character avoids the attack of the opponent character or a weapon different from normal) The timing at which an effect (such as an effect that attacks the opponent's character using) or an effect that indicates that the winning result is out of play (for example, an effect that causes the player to go down due to the attack of the opponent's character) occurs is set. The timing is configured to cause the player to pay attention to what kind of effect is executed.

  In accordance with the timing at which this super reach effect is displayed, the reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). The detailed contents of this reach navigation effect are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, an effect pattern of 20 seconds for the first reach navigation effect and 10 seconds for the second reach navigation effect is set, and the effect branch timing of the super reach effect executed in the main effect (the super reach effect is 20 seconds after being displayed) and a timing at which the first reach navigation effect is switched to the second reach navigation effect are associated with each other.

  In this reach navigation effect, as with the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e are provided on the way. As an effect that suggests that the result of the main effect is a big hit, the character “chance” is displayed, or the indicator attached to the rotating notification unit Dm4c can be switched (point B and point) C).

  Then, when the branching timing of the super-reaching effect as the main effect is reached, that is, when the timing (point D) when 20 seconds have elapsed since the super-reaching effect is displayed, the super-reaching effect continues to develop in the main effect. As a result, the reach navigation production is switched from the first reach navigation production to the second reach navigation production. At this time, since the second reach navigation effect is set in a half period (10 seconds) with respect to the first reach navigation effect period (20 seconds), the second navigation effect is the time used in the first navigation effect. Starting from a half point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). And among the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes again through the guidance display part Dm4e (point E) through the second reach navigation effect (point E). The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation effect ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing (stop display timing of the third symbol) of the super reach effect.

  In this way, among the third symbol variation effects that notify the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the third symbol, it becomes a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) with high expectation degree of jackpot. By executing the reach navigator effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect, it is possible for the player to visually grasp the progress of the aspect of the main effect, and to notify or suggest in stages. Thus, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  Next, contents displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 220A is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect, and FIG. 220B is the point D shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. 220 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at the point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. In addition, about the location demonstrated in the 1st control example mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the display content of the point C during the first reach navigation effect production will be described with reference to FIG. 220 (a). As shown in FIG. 220 (a), in the first reach navigation effect (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes the guidance display section Dm4d, a “chance” with a high expectation degree that is won by the jackpot is displayed, and guidance is provided. When passing through the display part Dm4e, “chance” is not displayed, but “x” is displayed. In this way, by notifying the degree of expectation that the jackpot is won in the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e and the effect of the main effect are combined. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220 (b), the display content of the point D during the first reach navigation effect production will be described. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) is started from a half position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portion Dm4e again during the second reach navigation effect. In this way, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b passes again in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display unit can be converted without a sense of incongruity. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 220 (c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display unit Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed and “chance” is displayed. In this way, when switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect, the effect is set so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display section that has passed in the first reach navigation effect, thereby the first reach navigation effect. Because the player watches the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass again through the guidance display section for which the high-expected notification (“chance”) has not been made. The production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the same data can be efficiently used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

  In the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect that does not change the notification content even when the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. . In this case, it is preferable to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to keep an eye on whether the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early, and the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where it is possible to pass through the guidance display section where the notification of the jackpot expectation is high (“chance”), the effect of reducing the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described.

  FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, an effect scenario storage area 222bb, and an effect scenario selection table 222bc are added. It is different and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 222, the details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. The second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the determination result of the pachinko machine 10, and the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above, This is different in that it does not execute the determination process based on the winning information stored on hold.

  Specifically, when the determination result is “Win” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “2” is selected as the internal level, and when the result is “150 to 198”. “3” is selected as the internal level. When the determination result is “out” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 149”, “1” is selected as the internal level, and when the result is “150 to 198”, the internal counter “2” is selected as the level.

  As a result, about 25% of the internal level when the success / failure determination result is “win” is set to “3”, about 75% when the determination of the success / failure is “win”, and the result of the determination is “out” It is possible to set about 25% of “1” to “2” and about 75% when the determination result is “out” to “1”. By setting the internal level in this way and executing the production in accordance with the internal level, it is possible to easily set a plurality of jackpot expectations for the production than in the case of performing the production only in response to the determination result. It becomes possible.

  In this control example, the internal level is set to three steps, but the number of steps of the internal level is not limited to this, and may be set to four or more steps. In this case, for example, by providing an internal level that is set to only about 1% of the case where the determination result is “win”, and performing an effect corresponding to the internal level, it is rarely displayed. An effect can be provided to the player. Thereby, it becomes possible to give a player a sense of superiority.

  Next, the effect scenario storage area 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect scenario storage area 222bb. This effect scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of reach navigation effect effect scenarios are stored, and each reference is made when an effect scenario is selected in reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later. This is the area where scenarios are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the effect scenario storage area 222bb is a scenario pattern of the effect scenario, as an expectation display notified (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first point) and the guidance display unit Dm4e (second point), Both the guidance display part Dm4d and the guidance display part Dm4e are used as return positions of the character Dm4b when the “expected” “chance” or the low expectation “x” is switched from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect. A return position “1” which is a passable position or a return position “2” which is a position where only the guide display portion Dm4e can pass is set.

  Specifically, in the scenario 1, the first point “×” and the second point “×” are displayed during the first reach navigation production, the return to the return position “1”, and the first point “x” during the second reach navigation production. “Chance” and the second point “chance” are displayed. Scenario 2 displays the first point “×” and the second point “×” during the first reach navigation, and returns to the return position “1”. Returning to the scenario, the first point “chance” and the second point “×” are displayed during the second reach navigation production, and scenario 3 is the first point “x” and the second point “during the first reach navigation production. This is a scenario in which “x” is displayed, the return point is “1”, the first point “x” and the second point “x” are displayed during the second reach navigation effect. As described above, a plurality of scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation effect and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation effect is different are facilitated, and the scenario is set corresponding to the internal level described above. Thus, it is possible to easily execute an effect that matches the expected degree of jackpot.

  Similarly, the display modes shown in FIG. 223 (a) are set for the scenarios 4 to 12 as well. Note that “super” displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation production in scenario 11 indicates a display (for example, “super hot”) with a much higher expectation degree of jackpot than the “chance” display. .

  In this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as scenario patterns for reach navigation effects, but more scenarios may be used. Further, as described in the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above in the scenario pattern, the type of the character Dm4b and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be set.

  Further, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, so that the display data used for the effect is shared, but the display data is shared by other methods. For example, when the second reach navigation effect is started, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect may be displayed side by side. In this case, the display area where the reach navigation effect is executed can be reduced by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in accordance with the moving direction of the character Dm4b.

  In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a having one path is used in the moving direction of the character Dm4b. However, a time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of paths may be provided. In this case, the scenario pattern may be set so that the path along which the character Dm4b moves is different between the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect. Thereby, the production contents of reach navigation production can be made more diverse.

  Next, the effect scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect scenario selection table 222bc. This effect scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when an effect scenario is selected in reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the effect scenario selection table 222bc selects each scenario based on the internal level, the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Is set to

  Specifically, when the value of the internal level is “1”, the variation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 129”, the scenario “5” is selected and “ In the case of “130 to 198”, the scenario “4” is selected. When the internal level value is “1”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “1” is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is “66 to 129”, the scenario “2” is selected, and when the value is “130 to 198”, the scenario “3” is selected.

  Furthermore, when the value of the internal level is “2”, the variation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “7” is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is “66 to 129”, the scenario “8” is selected, and when the value is “130 to 198”, the scenario “10” is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is “2”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “9” is selected, and the effect counter 223f When the value is “66 to 129”, the scenario “6” is selected, and when the value is “130 to 198”, the scenario “1” is selected.

  If the value of the internal level is “3”, the variation time is “60 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “7” is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is “66 to 198”, the scenario “12” is selected. Further, when the value of the internal level is “3”, the variation time is “90 seconds”, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 65”, the scenario “1” is selected and the effect counter 223f When the value is “66 to 129”, the scenario “6” is selected, and when the value is “130 to 198”, the scenario “11” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 221, the description will be continued. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the second internal level selection table 222ba described above based on the determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. It is an area. In the second internal level storage area 223ba, the internal level determined in the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is set (stored) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting an effect scenario (FIG. 224, S2153), which is initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that a reach navigation effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141), and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005) in this control example. This reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is a process executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is to execute the reach navigation effect. Is determined.

  When the reach navigation effect setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired change pattern type, the display change pattern information corresponding to the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected. The variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is set (S2151). Here, the main effect is an effect for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the effect period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm (FIG. 112) of the third symbol display device 81. This is an effect performed in the central part of (see).

  When the processing of S2151 is completed, the internal level is then determined and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba based on the second internal level selection table 222ba (S2152), and then the internal level and effect scenario selection table 222bc Based on, the production scenario is selected and set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

  Then, when the processing of S2153 is completed, the processing of S2107 and S2108 is executed similarly to the reach navigation effect setting processing (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, a modified example of the display mode of reach navigation effects used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 1 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 2 of the fourth control example. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically modification 3 of the 4th control example, and Drawing 226 (b) is a mimetic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in modification 3 of the 4th control example. FIG. 226 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. In addition, this modification 1-3 is a modification of the display mode used by reach navigation effect, and uses the structure described in the 1st control example or the 4th control example mentioned above as control content. Therefore, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a for the second reach navigation effect. By doing in this way, the display data used for production can be diverted.

  Next, FIG. 225 (b) shows the contents of the second reach navigation effect of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the second reach navigation effect is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and the effect that the character Dm4b continuously moves is executed. . In this case, the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of locations for notifying the jackpot expectation increases to four. As a result, a maximum of four “chances” for notifying that the degree of expectation for jackpot is high can be displayed, and the player can be widely notified of the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

  In this modified example, the guide display units Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. For example, the first reach navigation effect is executed in accordance with the progress of the second reach navigation effect. You may make it scroll-display in the moving direction (FIG. 225 (b) viewpoint right direction) of character Dm4b so that an area | region may be erase | eliminated. Thereby, the effect of this modification can be executed without enlarging the area of the small area Dm4.

  In this case, only the display results of the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed in the small area Dm4. The display content displayed on the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed as the guidance display portion Dm4f. The display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation effect.

  Next, FIG. 226 (a) shows the contents of the reach navigation effect of the third modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the reach navigation effect of this modification, a time gauge Dm4a branched into two routes is used, and the first route that finally reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1, the second route A second route reaching the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Among these, when the character Dm4b moves along the first route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e, and when the character Dm4b moves along the second route, it passes through the guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f. .

  When the reach navigation effect is executed in this modified example, the first navigation effect moves either the first route or the second route, and reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. And it returns to the return position set in the position before the branch point where the 1st course and the 2nd course branch, and the 2nd navigation production is performed.

  In the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b moves on either the route on which the character Dm4b has moved in the first navigation effect or the route on which the character Dm4b has not moved in the first navigation effect. Accordingly, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the display result on the guidance display unit Dm4e through which the character Dm4b has passed in the first navigation effect is changed in the second navigation effect. It becomes possible to make it.

  When a route with different first navigation effects and second navigation effects is selected, the display results can be displayed on the three guidance display portions Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as reach navigation effects.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), as a result of the selection of the first route in the first navigation effect, “chance” for notifying that the big hit expectation is high is displayed in the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. When the second route is selected as the second navigation effect in the state, the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portion Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route as shown in FIG. A “chance” to notify that the price is high is displayed. When different routes are selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, the current second navigation effect is provided by the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached by the first navigation effect. “Development” is displayed to show that it is inside. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the present condition easily.

  Further, when the same route is selected for the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect, for example, when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is “×” in the first navigation effect, the second navigation effect is displayed. As a result, the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e may be changed to “chance”.

  That is, in the case where the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the first navigation effect is “x”, when the second navigation effect starts from the return position shown in FIG. The effect mode of the second navigation effect is an effect mode in which the same route as the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in which “x” is displayed in the first navigation effect is changed to “chance”. Or a case where a route different from the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e remains “x” and the display result of “chance” is displayed on the guidance display unit Dm4f. Both can be expected.

  In this case, the second navigation effect may be set so that it is more advantageous for the player to move along a route different from the first navigation effect. Specifically, the probability that “chance” is displayed as the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e is changed from “×” to “chance”. It may be set so that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f is displayed as “chance” than the guidance display unit Dm4e. Thereby, it can be expected that a route different from the first navigation effect is selected as the route selected in the second navigation effect for the player, and the reach navigation effect can be continuously watched. It becomes possible.

  As described above, in the reach navigation effect in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a for guiding the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) routes, and the result of the first navigation effect (the display result of the guidance display unit) The route expected by the player in the second navigation effect can be changed.

  Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the reach navigation effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this modification, the position (return position) where the second navigation effect is started is described as one place (position before the route branches), but the return position as in the fourth control example described above. A plurality of may be provided. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided in front of the guidance display unit Dm4d, or a return position may be provided between the branch point of the route and the guidance display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation effect is executed, the route (the guidance display unit through which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation effect) changes depending on the position where the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on the result of the first navigation effect (display result of the guidance display unit) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

  Furthermore, in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two paths, but it may be branched into more (three or more), or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Alternatively, a specific position may be set in the middle of the path along which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another path when passing through the specific position. Thereby, reach navigation production can be made more various productions.

  In addition, in this modified example, when the reach navigation effect is executed, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4. For example, during the first navigation effect, the route on which the character Dm4b moves (For example, only the first route) is displayed, and a plurality of routes (first route and second route) are displayed only when a route different from the first navigation effect is selected in the second navigation effect. Also good. By configuring in this way, the player is not informed in advance (during the first navigation effect) what kind of route is passed by the second navigation effect, so the player can predict the effect. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the contents of the main effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the description of the effect of the main effect, the variation time, and the expected degree of jackpot) are sub-effects. By displaying using, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  Further, the production branch timing of the super reach production executed in the main production (timing 20 seconds after the super reach production is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation production to the second reach navigation production. Because of this configuration, among the 3rd symbol variation effect (main effect) that notifies the lottery result of the special symbol using the variation display of the 3rd symbol, a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect) with high expectation degree of jackpot The player can visually grasp the progress of the main production mode by executing the reach navigation production, which is the secondary production, at the timing of the main production (production branch timing). Thus, it is possible to notify or suggest in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In addition, by notifying the expectation degree of winning the jackpot at the plurality of guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e and the production of the main effect are combined. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, by setting the guidance display unit that has passed in the first reach navigation effect so that the character Dm4b passes again in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of the guidance display unit can be converted without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display section that has passed in the first reach navigation effect, the guidance in which the high-expected notification (“chance”) has not been made in the first reach navigation effect. Since the player watches the reach navigation effect while expecting that the second reach navigation effect is set so as to pass through the display unit again, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e again. However, an effect that does not change the notification content even when the character Dm4b passes again may be provided. . In this case, it is preferable to perform an operation (for example, jump) to avoid the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e. Thereby, in the second reach navigation effect, it is possible to keep an eye on whether the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display portions Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early, and the first reach navigation. When the second reach navigation effect is started from a position where it is possible to pass through the guidance display section where the notification of the jackpot expectation is high (“chance”), the effect of reducing the expectation of the jackpot is suppressed. can do.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to efficiently use the same data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect as display data used for the effect, the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the second control example described above, the slot to be executed next at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 in the slot effect continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds) as the continuous slot effect. The production mode of production is configured to be set.

  In contrast, in this control example, detailed control has been added regarding the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and stop display mode of the pseudo symbol in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above. It is different in point.

  In the fifth control example, compared to the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is identical. The difference is that the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 227 and FIG. 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of pseudo symbol dynamic display modes in slot effects can be set, and the type of slot effect to be executed (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened) Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the remaining time of the operation effective period of the frame button 22 and the slot effect, the extended slot effect).

  FIG. 227 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols “A” are stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols in the middle are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the left middle right pseudo symbol “A” is arranged in a line, the pseudo symbol “A” is acquired. As described in the second control example, a plurality of types (three types) of pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” are acquired as a result of executing a slot effect a plurality of times in the continuous slot effect. In such a case, it is notified that a privilege (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is won (a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (b) to (e), another example set as a dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols will be described. In this control example, it is configured to be able to set a plurality of pseudo symbol dynamic display modes, and the pseudo symbols can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. The user can be prompted to press the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the operation effect (slot effect) for operating the frame button 22.

  FIG. 227 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the number of reels is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), in this control example, a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which a pseudo symbol used for slot effect is displayed is set as a pseudo symbol dynamic display mode can be set. Yes. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in a limited display space.

  In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but it may be reduced from the normal number of reels, and the number of reels may be two. In this control example, the number of reels is set to one, and the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed is enlarged and displayed. However, a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without enlarged display may be employed. In this case, in the vacant area (the area where the left and right reels are normally displayed), a display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, the timing at which the pseudo symbols “A” are arranged in a line) Display or display of the expected degree in which the pseudo symbol “A” is arranged in a line by pressing the frame button 22) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22.

  FIG. 227 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the size of the pseudo symbol is changed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (c), in this control example, a dynamic display mode for enlarging the pseudo symbol during dynamic display can be set from among the pseudo symbols used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol. doing. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be depressed eagerly.

  In this control example, the pseudo-symbol “A” is displayed in an enlarged manner than the other symbols, so that the player can easily grasp it. The pseudo display “A” may be a dynamic display mode that is easier to visually recognize than other designs. This makes it easier to visually recognize the pseudo symbol “A” without changing the dynamically displayed region.

  FIG. 227 (d) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the symbol arrangement of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect is changed. As shown in FIG. 227 (d), in this control example, among the reels used for the slot effect as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols, the symbol arrangement of the reels (middle reels) displaying the pseudo symbols being dynamically displayed is different. The displayed dynamic display mode can be set. Specifically, among the dynamically displayed symbols, a dynamic display mode in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols “A”) to be stopped and displayed this time is increased can be set. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be depressed eagerly.

  In this control example, by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol “A”) that are the target of stop display this time, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol “A”. In addition to this, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not the target of stop display this time, that is, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols “B” and “C”), Alternatively, the number of pseudo symbols “A” may be increased. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, it is possible to easily identify individual symbols that are dynamically displayed (rotated display).

  FIG. 227 (e) is a schematic diagram showing an example in which the dynamic display speed (rotational speed) of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed is changed as the dynamic display mode in the slot effect. As shown in FIG. 227 (e), in this control example, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol being displayed dynamically among the reels used for the slot effect as the pseudo symbol dynamic display mode. The dynamic display mode in which the (rotational speed) is reduced can be set. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be depressed eagerly.

  In addition, the dynamic display speed of the reels that are dynamically displayed may be slow in the vicinity of the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and may be fast in other cases. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the subject of the stop display this time, and to further shorten the period during which the reel makes one round.

  Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed is set to a normal speed until the reel is displayed in a predetermined number (for example, two laps), and thereafter (for example, the third lap) is described above. As described above, the dynamic display speed may be decreased. As a result, a player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two rounds) can easily cause the player to grasp the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target. It is possible to prompt the user to operate 22.

  As described above, in this control example, each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is configured so that the pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In each of the dynamic display modes described above, only the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target is displayed with a higher brightness than the other symbols, or is changed to a display mode that emphasizes the edge of the symbol. This may make it easier for the player to grasp.

  In addition, the frame button 22 can be operated even when the reel rotation speed reaches a predetermined number (dynamically displayed as if the reel has been rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period has elapsed since the slot effect was started. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. Thereby, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can operate the frame button 22 eagerly.

  Next, the stop display mode of each slot effect in the continuous slot effect of this control example will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the determination result of the special symbol, and the determination result of the special symbol is correct. Is set so that three types of pseudo symbols “A”, “B”, and “C” can be acquired by a plurality of slot effects executed in a continuous slot effect. In the case of detachment, it is set so that the number that can be acquired is one of 0 to 2 among the three types of pseudo symbols in a plurality of slot effects executed in a continuous slot effect.

  Therefore, if the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is out, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display is not stopped and displayed on the line. Is controlled to stop. Specifically, before and after the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display, a different symbol from the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display is set so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display. When the frame button 22 is operated aiming at the stop, the stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed immediately before or after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to display the stop display mode of detachment without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, in this control example, in addition to the stop control described above, the start position of the dynamically displayed reel is changed without changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reel, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Stop control for displaying a stop display mode of detachment is also possible. Next, the stop control described above will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol arrangement and a stop position of a reel (medium reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in the slot effect. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a), a place where a pseudo symbol (pseudo symbol “A”) that is the current stop display target is not set as a symbol array (a pseudo symbol that is not the current stop display target is set). Are arranged in a continuous pattern. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, and one of them is a symbol array in which a pseudo symbol “A” is set (see FIG. 228 (b)).

  By using such a symbol arrangement of reels, stop control can be performed in which a stop display mode of disengagement is displayed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable just by changing the reel start position and dynamic display speed in each slot effect. It can be executed.

  This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228 (b). FIG. 228 (b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228 (a). As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in this dynamic display mode, the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the array 4 as the symbol array of the reels that are dynamically displayed. Is set with a pseudo symbol “-” different from the current stop display target.

  The dynamic display mode using the reels includes a rotation start position 1 where the position of the dynamic display of the reels is the array 1 of the symbol array, and a rotation start position 2 which is the array 9 of the symbol array. Is set. Then, two types of “high” and “ultra-low” are set as the speeds of the dynamically displayed reels. Specifically, the reel speed “high” is set at a speed at which the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 0.7 seconds, and the reel speed “very low” is specific. The time required for one symbol to be dynamically displayed to move is set at a speed of 1.2 seconds.

  That is, when a slot effect in which the operation effective period of the frame button 22 (button operation effective period) is set to 6 seconds is executed, 9 to 10 symbols move when the reel speed is “high”. When the reel speed is “ultra low”, the effect of moving five symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo symbol that is dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period without changing the symbol arrangement, simply by changing the reel dynamic display start position and the reel speed. Therefore, various dynamic display modes can be set without increasing the types of symbol data, and the amount of effect data can be reduced.

  Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b). When the rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that either the reel speed “high” or the reel speed “super low” is set. Also, a dynamic display mode capable of displaying the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed is executed. In this case, the reel speed “super low” (one symbol is displayed) has a longer period during which the pseudo symbol “A” is displayed than the reel speed “high” (the period during which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds). The player can easily make the player grasp the pseudo symbol that is the target of the stop display this time.

  In addition, when the rotation start position 2 is set, the symbols that are dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period when the reel speed “high” is set are in the range of the array 9 to the array 5, so that the stop display is performed. A dynamic display mode capable of displaying the target pseudo symbol “A”. When the reel speed “ultra-low” is set, the symbols that are dynamically displayed during the button operation effective period are in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed.

  As a result, when the result of determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong, the dynamic display that does not display the pseudo symbol “A” is executed by starting the dynamic display set to the reel speed “super low” from the rotation start position 2. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when such stop control is executed, it is preferable that symbols set other than the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display be the same symbol. As a result, whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in the current slot effect is a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed is set to other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the dynamic display contents of the symbols.

  Further, when the reel speed is “ultra low” and the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 1, the dynamic display mode in which the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be the stop display target ( Dynamic display mode that is advantageous to the player) When the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode (disadvantageous to the player) that cannot display the pseudo symbol “A” to be stopped and displayed. Dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or unfavorable for the player only by grasping the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reel is started in the slot effect. Can be prevented.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232.

  FIG. 229 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. This display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of reels of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are stored, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode to be selected is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 230, the display mode storage area 222ca stores a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) having different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and symbol arrangements as dynamic display modes in the slot effect. Has been. Thereby, when a continuous slot effect is executed in this control example, a plurality of patterns can be set as the dynamic display mode executed in each slot effect.

  This rotational speed indicates the period during which the symbol that is being dynamically displayed is displayed in the display area where the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, when the rotational speed is “high”, one symbol is 0.7 seconds. It is set to be displayed. In addition, at the rotational speed “low”, 1 symbol is set to be displayed for 1 second. Furthermore, it is set so that one symbol is displayed for 1.2 seconds at the rotation speed “super low”. In this way, by setting the reel rotation speed in three stages, in the dynamic display of each slot effect, it is possible to set a dynamic display that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the pseudo symbol and a dynamic display that makes it difficult to distinguish. It becomes possible. Therefore, different effects can be executed even in the dynamic display mode using the same symbol arrangement.

  Furthermore, by providing three reel rotation speeds, the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot effect can be varied. For example, when the period of one slot effect (period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 6 seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed “high”, and the rotation speed “ At “low”, six pseudo symbols can be displayed, and at the “ultra low” rotational speed, five pseudo symbols can be displayed. This makes it possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display mode is displayed, depending on the rotation speed of the reel.

  Specifically, the display mode 1 is such that the rotational speed is “high” and the symbol arrangement is a stop display target (indicated by “circle” in FIG. 230) and a stop symbol that is not a stop display target. (Displayed as “x” in FIG. 230) are displayed alternately. Display mode 2 has a rotation speed of “low” and the same symbol arrangement as display mode 1 is set. It is what is done.

  The display mode 3 has the same rotational speed as the display mode 1, and the pseudo-design (not shown as “circle” in FIG. 230) whose symbol arrangement is the target of stop display (not shown in FIG. 230). 230 is set to be displayed side by side, and the pseudo-design (displayed with “star” in FIG. 230) to be stopped is highlighted (enlarged, Light emission, etc.). In display mode 4, the rotational speed is “low”, and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 3 is set.

  The display mode 5 is set so that the rotational speed is “ultra low”, and the pseudo-design for the stop display target is displayed in the array 4 as the symbol array, and the pseudo-design other than the stop display target is displayed for the other arrays. The display mode 6 is such that the rotational speed is “ultra-low”, and as a symbol arrangement, a pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the array 11, and other sequences are pseudo symbols other than the stop display target. Is set to be displayed.

  The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 use the same symbol arrangement data, and are display modes in which the positions where dynamic display is started are different. That is, in the display mode 6, dynamic display is started from the array 5 shown in the display mode 5. The display mode 5 and the display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode described in FIG. 228 described above is executed.

  In the display mode 7, the rotation speed changes midway. The rotation speed is “low” during the period in which the symbol arrays 1 to 6 are displayed, and the rotation speed is during the period in which the arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. As a symbol array, a pseudo symbol that is not a stop display target and a pseudo symbol that is a stop display target are alternately displayed as a symbol array, and the arrays 7 to 11 are pseudo symbols that are not a stop display target. It is set to be displayed.

  In this way, the rotation speed is slowed in the range (array 1 to 6) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed, and the rotational speed is set in the range (array 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped is not displayed. By increasing the speed, the speed of the dynamic display is changed to attract the player's interest, and by increasing the period during which the pseudo symbol that is the target of the stop display is displayed, the player is ambitious to the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range where the pseudo symbol that is the target of stop display is not displayed (array 7 to 11), it is possible to shorten the period for one round of the reel, and one slot effect period ( The range (array 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed during the operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the player can actively display the frame. The button 22 can be operated.

  In display mode 8, the rotation speed changes as the symbol array circulates. The rotation speed is “high” in the first lap, and the rotation speed is “low” in the second and subsequent laps. The display mode 9 is a display in which the pseudo-design to be stopped and displayed is highlighted when the symbol array circulates, and the rotation speed is “high” in the first cycle. ”And the same symbol arrangement as that of the display mode 7, and the pseudo symbol“ star ”that emphasizes the pseudo symbol“ A ”to be stopped and displayed is displayed after the second round.

  In this control example, the nine display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) described above are settable as the dynamic display mode executed in the slot effect. The display mode is not limited to this, and more display modes may be used. By doing in this way, the production effect of each slot production performed in a continuous slot production can be heightened more.

  Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. The display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when selecting the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, and is used in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), it is referred to.

  In this display mode selection table 222cb, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the display mode selection table 222cb is set with a winning display mode selection table 222cb1 and an outlier display mode selection table 222cb2. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected.

  As described above, since the dynamic display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is selected based on the determination result of the special symbol, it is possible to win a special symbol jackpot by grasping the content of the effect of the continuous slot effect. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not he has won.

  FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning display mode selection table 222cb1. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f is determined by the winning display mode selection table 222cb1. (Slot effect) display mode is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, “display mode 1” as the initial slot effect, “display mode 1” as the normal slot effect, and “display” as the first shortened slot effect. When “display mode 2” is set as the second shortened slot effect, “display mode 2” is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “50 to 99”, “Display mode 1” is “display mode 2” as a normal slot effect, “display mode 2” as a first shortened slot effect, “display mode 4” as a second shortened slot effect, and “display” as an extended slot effect. When “mode 4” is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 149”, “display mode 1” is set as the initial slot effect and “display mode” is set as the normal slot effect. “8” is set as “display mode 4” as the first shortened slot effect, “display mode 5” as the second shortened slot effect, “display mode 5” as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is set to “ In the case of “150 to 198”, “display mode 1” is the first slot effect, “display mode 9” is the normal slot effect, “display mode 4” is the first shortened slot effect, and “display mode 4” is the second shortened slot effect. “Display mode 7” is set as “Extended slot effect”.

  FIG. 231 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table for removal 222cb2. Each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extension) executed in the continuous slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f is displayed by the display mode selection table 222cb2. (Slot effect) display mode is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 49”, “display mode 1” as the initial slot effect, “display mode 1” as the normal slot effect, and “display” as the first shortened slot effect. When “display mode 2” is set as the second shortened slot effect, “display mode 2” is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is “50 to 99”, “Display mode 1” is “display mode 2” as a normal slot effect, “display mode 2” as a first shortened slot effect, “display mode 4” as a second shortened slot effect, and “display” as an extended slot effect. When “mode 4” is set and the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 149”, “display mode 1” is set as the initial slot effect and “display mode” is set as the normal slot effect. “2” is set as “display mode 7” as the first shortened slot effect, “display mode 6” as the second shortened slot effect, “display mode 6” as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is set to “ In the case of “150-198”, “display mode 1” is the first slot effect, “display mode 4” is the normal slot effect, “display mode 8” is the first shortened slot effect, and “display mode 8” is the second shortened slot effect. "Display mode 9" is set as "Display mode 7" as the extended slot effect.

  As described above, in this control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all slot effects that may be executed in the continuous slot effect. Even if the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect to be executed, the next slot effect can be executed smoothly.

  Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. This stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting a stop mode of each slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect, and when there is a slot effect in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later. When it is determined (S2034 in FIG. 233: Yes), it is referred to.

  In this stop mode selection table 222cc, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), a hit stop mode selection table 222cc1 and a stoppage stop mode selection table 222cc2 are set, and the table corresponding to the determination result of special symbols. The stop mode is selected with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning stop mode selection table 222cc1. The winning stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols established as the first slot effect “1”, the number of symbols established as the normal slot effect “2”, the number of symbols established as the first shortened slot effect “0” as the second shortened slot effect The established symbol number “2” is set as the extended slot effect, and the established symbol number “2” is set.

  When the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 199”, the stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols established as the first slot effect “1”, the number of symbols established as the normal slot effect “2”, the number of symbols established as the first shortened slot effect “1” as the second shortened slot effect The established symbol number “1” is set as the extended slot effect, and the established symbol number “1” is set.

  As described above, when the determination result is correct, three symbols are established after each slot effect is executed in the continuous slot effect. As a result, the player is notified that the player has won.

  Furthermore, in this control example, since there are a plurality of stop patterns for each slot effect when the result of success / failure is a win, the current continuous slot effect is executed while the success / failure determination result is correct during the execution of the continuous slot effect. It is possible to suppress a situation where the player knows whether or not the continuous slot effect is executed.

  FIG. 232 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stoppage mode selection table 222cc2. The stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting stop patterns having different numbers of established symbols in each slot effect based on the value of the effect counter 223f.

  Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols established as the first slot effect “1”, the number of symbols established as the normal slot effect “0”, the number of symbols established as the first shortened slot effect “0” as the second shortened slot effect The established symbol number “0” is set as the extended slot effect, and the established symbol number “0” is set.

  When the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 199”, the stop pattern 2 is selected. In the stop pattern 2, the number of symbols established as the first slot effect “1”, the number of symbols established as the normal slot effect “0”, the number of symbols established as the first shortened slot effect “1” as the second shortened slot effect The established symbol number “0” is set as the extended slot effect, and the established symbol number “0” is set.

  As described above, in this control example, the first slot effect executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect is the same stop mode regardless of whether the determination result is a hit or not, so the continuous slot effect starts. Immediately after the first slot effect is completed (when the first slot effect is completed), the player knows whether or not the current continuous slot effect is a continuous slot effect that is executed when the result of the determination is correct. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. FIG. 229 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In the display mode storage area 223ca, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2071 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effects corresponding to the slot effects of the continuous slot effects. Information related to the display mode that is referred to when setting the command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238) and stored when the continuous slot effect ends. Is initialized.

  The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the stop mode selection table 222cc described above. In the stop mode storage area 223cb, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effects corresponding to the slot effects of the continuous slot effects. Display mode stored when the command is set (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851 and S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238) and the continuous slot effect ends. Information about is initialized.

<Regarding the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the other points are the same. It is. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the variation display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the fluctuation display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

  When the process of S2006 is completed, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, and then the display mode is changed based on the display mode selection table 222cb. This is selected and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

  When the processing of S2071 is completed, a stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to 2011 are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234 to FIG. 238, various effects processing in the slot effect processing (see FIG. 174) of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example. Will be explained.

  First, referring to FIG. 234, the first slot effect processing 2 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first slot effect in-process 2. When the first slot effect in-process 2 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed in the same manner as the first slot effect in-process (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. When the processing of S4707 is finished, next, the display slot stop effect command for the set stop mode is set (S4751), and the display slot effect command corresponding to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. The setting is made (S4752), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even when it is determined that the current time is not the button pressing effective period (S4701: No), S4710 is performed in the same manner as the first slot effect processing (see FIG. 175) in the second control example described above. ˜S4712 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal slot effect in-process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot effect in-process 2. When the normal slot effect processing 2 is executed, similarly to the normal slot effect processing (see FIG. 176) in the second control example described above, the processing of S4801 to S4803 is executed. In the processing of S4803, the slot effect counter If it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is awaited to end. The state is set (S4807), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4803 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), the slot effect state is set to the second shortened slot effect (S4809).

  When the processing of S4809 is finished, next, a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode of the second shortened slot effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, similarly to the first shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are performed. Execute the process.

  When the processing of S4904 is completed, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is then set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is set. A corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 237, the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610) will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot effect in-process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, similarly to the second shortened slot effect in-process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed. When the process of S5002 is completed, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is supported. The display slot effect command to be set is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5004), and this process is ended.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extended slot effect in-process 2 (S4612). When the extension slot effect processing 2 (S4612) is executed, the processing of S5101 and S5102 is executed and then the stop mode is stored, as in the extension slot effect processing (see FIG. 179) in the second control example described above. A display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152). ), The slot effect state is set to the end waiting state (S5104), and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot effect of the second control example described above, in each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect, various pseudo display patterns are displayed dynamically. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be operated eagerly by the player.

  Furthermore, since a predetermined condition (the number of laps of the symbol arrangement displayed on the reels or the passage of a predetermined time) is satisfied even during one slot effect, the dynamic display mode is changed. On the other hand, the operation means (the frame button 22) can be operated more eagerly.

  As a plurality of dynamic display modes, the number of dynamically displayed reels may be changed. As a result, it is possible to enlarge and display the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed in a limited display space. Moreover, you may change the magnitude | size of a pseudo | simulation pattern. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target is dynamically displayed, so that the frame button 22 can be depressed eagerly.

  In this case, it is good also as a dynamic display mode which makes it easier to visually recognize the pseudo symbol which is the target of stop display by reducing the other symbols. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize a predetermined pseudo-pattern without changing the dynamically displayed area.

  Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the predetermined symbol. Further, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased by decreasing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not to be stopped and displayed). In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed can be reduced, individual symbols dynamically displayed can be easily identified.

  Further, as a dynamic display mode, the symbol arrangement of the reels that are dynamically displayed may be changed to set a range in which predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) concentrate.

  In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed in the slot effect can be changed. As a result, even with the same symbol arrangement, it is possible to set a dynamic display that makes it easy to grasp a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol that is a stop display target) and a dynamic display that is difficult to grasp. Can be executed.

  Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel may be decreased in a range where a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased otherwise. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the current stop display target without changing the period during which the predetermined symbol array is displayed.

  Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reel is set to a normal speed until a predetermined number of reels (for example, two laps), and thereafter, the dynamic display speed is dynamically displayed as described above (for example, the third lap). The speed may be decreased. This makes it possible for a player who has not operated the operating means (the frame button 22) for a predetermined period (a period in which the reel makes two revolutions) to easily grasp a predetermined pseudo symbol (a pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed). It is possible to prompt the user to operate the operating means (the frame button 22).

  Further, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of each slot effect are determined based on the determination result of the special symbol, the contents of the effect of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect are determined. Based on this, it is possible to predict the determination result of the special symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the production contents of the continuous slot production.

  In the present control example, each slot effect (first slot effect, normal slot effect, first shortened slot effect, second shortened slot effect, extended slot effect) that may be executed in the continuous slot effect is dynamically changed in advance. Since the display mode is set, the next slot effect can be smoothly executed no matter what timing the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect. Can do.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the first slot effect that is executed at the beginning of the continuous slot effect is the same stop mode regardless of whether the determination result is win or miss, and immediately after the start of the continuous slot effect (first time When the slot effect is finished), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows whether or not the current continuous slot effect is a continuous slot effect that is executed when the result of the determination is correct. .

  In this control example, a configuration in which the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of each slot effect executed in the continuous slot effect is set in advance is used, but when the slot effect to be executed in the continuous slot effect is determined. (When the slot effect to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot effect), the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of the slot effect may be set.

  Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot effect that are executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot effect is being executed are also at the same timing as the other slot effects. You may make it set.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example explains in detail the composite pressing effect of the second control example described above. The composite pressing effect of the second control example described above is configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

  On the other hand, this control example is configured to execute a combined press effect executed based on one special symbol variation and a composite effect executed based on a plurality of special symbol variations. It is different in point. In addition, a detailed description is added regarding the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each pressing effect in the combined pressing effect executed based on one special symbol change and the pressing effect executed.

  In the sixth control example, compared with the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is one. It differs from the point where the part was changed. The other points are the same as in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 239, a back image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the back image data ("mountain" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the back image data (“sea” stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

  In this control example, the stage shown in FIGS. 239 (a) and (b) can be selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the change of the special symbol is started. When the person operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is switched.

  In this control example, an effect corresponding to the displayed stage is executed. Therefore, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed by operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the player can change the stage (for example, five seconds after the change of the special symbol is started). As a result, a new effect can be executed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of the combined press effect in this control example. Note that, in the composite pressing effect of the present control example, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted for portions that overlap with the composite pressing effect of the second control example described above.

  As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. Period is set. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous striking effect is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the variation time of the special symbol variation 1 (60 s) becomes 12 seconds to the time when the remaining time becomes 2 seconds.

  When the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the number of repeated hits is 50 times or more) during the continuous hit effect, the background (stage) executed in the next special symbol variation is displayed. The operation mode to be changed is configured to be changed. Here, an operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 (b) and (c).

  FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode capable of changing the background of the special symbol variation being executed as the background change operation mode, and FIG. 241 (c) is executed as the background change operation mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation mode which can change the background of the next special symbol fluctuation | variation which is. First, in FIG. 241 (b), a back image corresponding to the currently selected background ("sea" stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and a small size of the sub display area Ds is displayed. Stages that can be selected as the background selection screen ("sea" stage and "mountain" stage) are displayed in the area Ds2, and the stage that is currently selected is displayed larger than the stage that is not selected.

  Then, below the main display area Dm, “Background changes by pressing the button” is displayed as a background change notification display for notifying the player that the current period is a period in which the background can be changed. Then, a display imitating a “button” indicating that the current operation valid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid is displayed.

  This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the background can be changed and allows the player to select an arbitrary background.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, an effect that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends) until the special symbol variation ends (for example, a continuous hit effect). May be executed. In this case, as a result of the player eagerly operating the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is operated even after the next special symbol variation is started, and the background is changed unintentionally in the next special symbol variation. There was a case where the problem of end.

  For example, if this problem occurs in a state where an effect (a so-called continuous effect) that is executed across a plurality of variations is being executed, the effect that the player was looking forward to cannot be seen. There was a risk of dissatisfaction with the player.

  Therefore, in this control example, in order to prevent the above-described problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends) (for example, When it is determined that a continuous hitting operation) has been executed, the background changing operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background changing operation mode.

  Here, the specific background change operation mode described above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 241 (c), this specific background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241 (b). The background is not changed until it is finished. On the lower side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, “Select the background of the next change by pressing the button” is displayed as a display for informing the player that the current background change operation mode is present. The selected content indicating the background displayed in the next change is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds.

  Thus, the situation which makes a player dissatisfied by changing the aspect of the effect using the frame button 22 performed by the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In this control example, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends, the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol variation. Although the structure in which the operation mode of the effect (hereinafter referred to as the frame button operation effect) is changed is used, other structures may be used.

  For example, when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol change exceeds a predetermined number, the mode of the frame button operation effect in the next special symbol change may be changed. The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the mode of the subsequent frame button operation effect may be changed based on the fact that the operation content of the frame button operation effect executed before is determined to be the predetermined operation content.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation effect is a predetermined operation, the aspect of the next frame button operation effect is changed. Although it is configured so that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only in situations where the above-described problems may actually occur, the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed in this special symbol variation. Based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). You may comprise so that the aspect of the frame button operation effect performed corresponding to a special symbol fluctuation | variation may be changed. Thereby, it can prevent reliably that the problem mentioned above generate | occur | produces.

  Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination unit determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the aspect of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. Thereby, for example, when it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the current special symbol variation is wrong despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player feels sorry and the frame button 22 It is possible to prevent an unintended background change from being executed due to the start of the next special symbol variation in a state where the button is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

  As described above, in this control example, a plurality of frame button operation effects executed across a plurality of special symbol variations (a special symbol variation 1 continuous strike effect and a special symbol variation 2 background change effect in FIG. 240). On the other hand, the aspect of the frame button operation effect performed later based on the operation content in the frame button operation effect performed previously is comprised so that a change is possible.

  In addition, in the same way as in the second control example described above, a plurality of frame button operation effects (composite pressing effects) executed during one special symbol change are also being performed before the frame button operation effect. Based on the operation content, the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 240, the composite pressing effect will be described. When the special symbol variation 2 (90 s) is executed, a composite pressing effect in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are continuously executed is executed. This composite press effect is an effect similar to the composite press effect executed in the above-described second control example (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode of the frame button operation effect in each frame button operation effect executed in the composite press effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the effect mode to be executed in the composite press effect. As shown in FIG. 242, when the combined press effect is executed, first, the press effect 1 is executed. This push-down effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to perform continuous hitting operation of the frame button 22 in the same way as in the second control example described above (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the operation valid period is 5 seconds after the effect starts. 7 seconds) (see FIG. 157 (b)).

  During the press effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the press effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (a timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation effective period). As the determination contents, based on the operation contents of the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is repeatedly operated (operation 3), and “weak repeated hit” determined when the number of repeated hits is small (50 or less), and the repeated hits. The auto-strike function is executed by “strong striking” determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more) and an operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for two seconds or more in the press effect 1. “Long press” determined as “No”, “No operation” determined when the frame button 22 has never been operated during the press effect 1, and an unnecessary frame button operation is executed for the press effect 1. There are five types of “other operations” that are determined to be present.

  Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1, the mode of the press effect 2 that is the frame button operation effect to be executed next is set. Specifically, when it is determined that “weak hitting” in the pressing effect 1, “timing pressing effect” (see FIG. 158 (a)) is set in the pressing effect 2, and “strong hitting” is determined. Is set to “pressing effect 2” (see FIG. 243 (a)), and when determined as “long press”, “timing release effect” (see FIG. 158 (b)) is set. When it is determined that “no operation”, “timing pressing effect” is set to the pressing effect 2 as in the case where it is determined that “weak repeated hitting” described above, and when it is determined that “other operation”, it is pressed The “timing push effect (difficulty)” (see FIG. 243 (b)), which increases the difficulty level of the “timing push effect” described above, is set as the effect 2.

  In this way, by setting the mode of the press effect 2 to be executed next based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the press effect 1, for example, the frame button exceeds the predetermined number (50 times) in the press effect 1. A player who presses 22 (a player who is good at continuous hitting operations) can continuously participate in the frame button operation effect by executing the effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22.

  In addition, for the player who is executing the automatic continuous hitting function in the press effect 1 (the player who is continuously pressing the frame button 22), the effect of releasing the button instead of the effect of pressing the button. By executing, an effect corresponding to the current button operation state (pressed state) can be executed, and it is possible to suppress the player from being confused by the contents of the effect.

  Furthermore, for a player who is executing an unnecessary frame button operation for the press effect 1, an effect that makes it difficult for the frame button operation effect of the press effect 2 to be successful can be executed as a penalty.

  Then, when the press effect 2 is finished, the repeated hit effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the operation effective period is 5 seconds from the start of the effect) is executed as in the composite press effect of the second control example described above (FIG. 159 (b) )), The combined pressing effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243 (a), a description will be given of the repeated press effect of the press effect 2 that is executed when it is determined as “strong hit” in the press effect 1 of FIG. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as the composite pressing down effect of the 2nd control example mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (a), when the continuous hit effect is started with the press effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment column, and the display mode of the meter display unit D1 changes. “Meter may pierce !?” is displayed. Further, “continuous hit” indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is a continuous hit effect is displayed between the meter display portion D1 and the small area Dm5.

  In the continuous striking effect executed in the pressing effect 2, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is based on the game result of the combined pressing effect and the lottery result of the special symbol as in the pressing effect 2 of the second control example described above. Specifically, when the frame button is pressed more than 20 times during the period (3 seconds) in which the pressing effect 2 is executed (see FIG. 159 (a)). The display on the meter display unit D1 changes based on the determination result of the special symbol satisfying the operation condition and executing the combined pressing effect. For example, when the special symbol of this time is won as a jackpot as a result of the determination of success / failure, and the special symbol is also won in the winning information stored on hold, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the meter display The meter of the part D1 is extended.

  In this way, for a player who has performed a sufficient number of continuous hit operations in the press effect 1, the continuous hit operation can be continuously executed in the press effect 2, and is further executed based on the continuous hit operation. Therefore, the player can be motivated to perform an operation on the favorite frame button 22 because the pressing effect 1 and the pressing effect 2 are different.

  In this control example, the effect mode is configured to be changed based on the number of consecutive hit operations on the frame button 22, but, for example, the number of consecutive hits (operation conditions) at which the effect mode is changed is set to a plurality of operation conditions. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation conditions for the current pressing effect, so that the frame button operation can be actively executed to the end.

  The timing push effect (difficult) of the press effect 2 that is executed when it is determined as “other operation” in the press effect 1 in FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the press effect 2 in the composite press effect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as the composite pressing down effect of the 2nd control example mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the timing push effect (difficult) is the display of the target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge with respect to the timing push effect (see FIG. 158 (a)) of the second control example described above. The difference is that the position is different and the moving body D3a is not displayed in the timing gauge.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the success difficulty (degree of difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db3) with respect to the normal timing push effect. This makes it difficult for a player who does not intentionally participate in the composite press effect to make the timing press effect difficult (it is difficult to satisfy the operation conditions), and an effect that is displayed when the operation conditions are satisfied (special It is possible to make it difficult to execute an effect that suggests a lottery result of symbols.

  Note that the method for increasing the success difficulty level is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, while the timing push effect is being executed, the target Db3 is moved at high speed in the timing gauge to make it difficult to understand the press timing. The display of the target Db3 may be temporarily deleted, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or reduced to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

  Further, as a condition for setting the timing push effect (difficulty), the operation determination result and the press effect 2 are started in addition to the case where the operation determination result in the press effect 1 is determined as “other operation”. In the case where the operation situation at the time is different, for example, in the press effect 1, the frame button 22 is pressed at the time when the press effect 2 is executed even though “long press” is set as the operation determination result. The timing push effect (difficulty) may be set even when it is determined that there is no.

  Further, in this control example, the timing push effect (difficulty) is configured to be executed for a player who is determined not to intentionally participate in the composite push effect. For example, when the operation content for the frame button 22 in the press effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of consecutive hits is 7), the timing press effect (difficult) is successful. In such a case (when the operation conditions are satisfied), a player who notifies the lottery result of a special symbol, displays a specific effect (image or video), or provides information that can be accumulated by the player You may comprise so that the privilege which becomes advantageous to may be provided.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

  FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, the RAM 223 in this control example has a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a checking flag 223dc, and a press counter 223dd added to the RAM 223 in each control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, “sea” stage, “mountain” stage) set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is used when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation effective period, which is the operation period during which the background can be changed, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 247). When the background information based on the operation content is stored and the checking flag 223 dc is set to ON in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), the display information is displayed based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

  The operation change flag 223bd is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the special symbol variation ends. When the flag is ON, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated. Indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. The operation change flag 223bd is determined in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 247) that the frame button is input during 5 seconds (the effective period before the end) until the special symbol variation ends ( It is set to ON (S6810: Yes in FIG. 247) (S6811 in FIG. 247).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802: Yes in FIG. 247), and the checking flag 223dc is set to OFF. If it is determined (S6803 in FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

  The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether an effect (see FIG. 241 (c)) for changing the background of the next fluctuation is being executed as the background change effect. This indicates that an effect to be performed is being executed, and when it is off, an effect to change the background of the next fluctuation is not being executed. This checking flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 247) (S6804 in FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referred to when setting the display background command (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to OFF after setting the display background command (S2083).

  The number-of-presses counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of operations of the frame button 22 executed during the press effect 1 of the composite press effect. The number-of-presses counter 223dd is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the auto-press effect setting process 2 that the press effect 1 is being performed (normally pressed) (S4510) (S4551 in FIG. 246). Reference is made when determining whether or not the number of times pressed during production 1 has reached the predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246), and when it is determined that the predetermined number (50 times) has been reached (FIG. The counter value is initialized to 0 (S4552 in FIG. 246). Although not shown, the counter value is also initialized to 0 at the timing when the pressing effect 1 of the composite pressing effect ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Sixth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173). (Refer to FIG. 246) instead of executing the automatic press effect setting process (refer to FIG. 246), and the point that the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (refer to FIG. 247) is described in detail, and the other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. The variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

  In the process of S2040, various effects to be executed based on the acquired variation pattern are set. Specifically, the processing of S2031 to 2033 is executed in the same manner as the variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

  When the processing of S2040 is completed, it is next determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (that is, during the last special symbol variation, When the effect of changing the background is executed in the next special symbol variation (S2081: Yes), the display background command is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ( S2082).

  Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above. The process ends.

  With this configuration, the third special symbol variation is started at the timing at which the next special symbol variation is started based on the information on which the background of the next special symbol variation is set (information set in the background information storage area 223da). The background ("sea" stage, "mountain" stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the auto-press effect setting process 2 (S4410) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the auto-press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This auto-pressing effect setting process 2 (S4410) is a case where it is normally pressed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246) with respect to the auto-pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Processing contents are different.

  When the auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. If it is determined in the processing of S4510 that it is the normal pressing period (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), a display pressing command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the pressing frequency counter 223dd is incremented by one. (S4512).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552). If the value of the number-of-presses counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552: No in FIG. 246) ), This process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-presses counter 223dd exceeds 50 in the processing of S4522 (S4552: Yes in FIG. 246), the pressing effect scenario is changed to 2 for non-automatic pressing (4553). The counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this process ends.

  Next, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1707) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is an input of a signal based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. In this case (S6801: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), the next is the first frame button operation effective period in which the background can be selected. Is determined (S6802). If it is determined in the processing of S6802 that the first frame button operation effective period is in effect (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to on (S6803), and is set to on. If it is determined that there is no (set to OFF) (S6803: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

  In the process of S6804, when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), the process proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the process of S6804 to S6806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6807.

  In the process of S6807, it is determined whether a confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation is an operation of the frame button 22 while an effect for setting the background of the next fluctuation is being executed. When there is a confirmation operation in the processing of S6807 (the frame button 22 is operated). If it is determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this process ends.

  Here, the processing of S6808 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. If the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background of the next change is being executed, the display is switched to one in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The background display ("sea" or "mountain") displayed in an enlarged manner in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to be transferred when the next change is started. In other words, in the process of S6808, when the confirmation operation is executed once for the background information (in the “change” stage in FIG. 241) currently set (with the current change), the next change is made. When the background information corresponding to the “sea” stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to be executed and the confirmation operation is executed twice, the background information corresponding to the “mountain” stage is transferred to the background as the background to be changed next time. Information storage area 223da is set.

  Returning to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S6804 that the operation change flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6804: No), for display corresponding to the background next to the currently set background A background command is set (S6809), and this process ends.

  The process of S6809 is in the state where the operation change flag 223db and the checking flag 223dc are both set to OFF, that is, during the first frame button operation effective period, that is, a normal background change effect (FIG. 241 (b)). The background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

  If it is determined in the processing of S6802 that the current time is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), it is then determined whether the current time is the pre-termination period (S6810). The pre-end period is a period indicating that the remaining period until the special symbol variation is ended is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). If it is determined that it is not the pre-end period (S6810: No) ), This process is terminated, and if it is determined that it is a period before termination (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) is performed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation is completed) until the special symbol variation is completed. ) Is determined to have been executed, the background change operation mode executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, a situation in which the player is dissatisfied by changing the aspect of the effect using the frame button 22 executed in the next special symbol change based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol change occurs. It is possible to suppress this.

  It should be noted that the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol variation this time and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured to change the aspect of the frame button operation effect that is executed in response to the next special symbol variation based on the fact that it has been set in step (b). Thereby, it can prevent reliably that the problem mentioned above generate | occur | produces.

  Further, a means for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the frame button operation effect is not set is provided, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. When the determination unit determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the aspect of the next frame button operation effect may be changed. Thereby, for example, when it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the current special symbol variation is wrong despite the fact that the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player feels sorry and the frame button 22 It is possible to prevent an unintended background change from being executed due to the start of the next special symbol variation in a state where the button is operated (pressed) a plurality of times.

  In this control example, when it is determined as “long press” in the press effect 1 of the composite press effect, the timing release effect is executed in the press effect 2. However, for example, a player However, it may be configured such that all of the combined pressing effects can be executed while the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. The effect executed in the press effect 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the press effect 2 that is executed when it is determined as “long press” at the operation determination timing of the press effect 1 as the composite press effect. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses the frame button 22 for a long time and reaches the operation determination point in the state where the automatic continuous hitting function is being executed in the press effect 1, the comment box displays “Auto-timing is set by long-pressing the button”. ”Is displayed, and a schematic diagram simulating a timing gauge and an expectation indicating the ratio at which the timing is set are displayed beside it.

  In this case, the operation timing of the timing push effect is displayed in the timing gauge displayed in the comment column while executing the effect that the meter of the meter display unit D1 rises by executing the automatic continuous hit function during the press effect 1. A lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the auto timing is set during a period until the press effect 2 is started, and the frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing in the timing press effect executed in the press effect 2 (see FIG. 158 (a)). An effect similar to that performed is executed. By configuring in this way, the player can execute the continuous hitting effect and the timing pressing effect only by continuously pressing the frame button 22 (continuously pressing and holding it).

  In the above-described example, the degree of expectation at which the auto timing is set may be set randomly or based on a lottery result of a special symbol. Further, the degree of expectation may be notified to the player or may not be notified. Furthermore, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (before the press effect 2 is executed), or the set timing is not notified to the player in advance. Also good.

  For example, two timings for determining the operation content of the pressing effect 1 are provided, and when it is determined as “long press” at the previous determination timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed and before the later determination timing. The player may be notified of the auto timing setting result. By configuring in this way, when the setting content of the auto timing is bad, the operation content is changed from there (for example, repeated hitting operation), so that the normal timing pressing effect can be executed as the pressing effect 2.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In the seventh control example, when the pressing effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in the present control example), the interval ( In this control example, an additional effect is executed for 10 seconds). Specifically, when the pressing effect (first pressing effect) ends and a short interval (for example, 10 seconds) is opened, the next pressing effect (second pressing effect) starts. An additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 between the second press effect and the second press effect is executed. Thus, the pressing effect or the additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect until the second pressing effect ends.

  Here, when the first pressing effect is completed, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) despite the player releasing his hand from the frame button 22. The player moves his hand to the frame button 22 again at a short interval, which increases the player's operation burden and makes it impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, in the seventh control example, the pressing effect or the additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect until the end of the second pressing effect. Therefore, it is only necessary to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second pressing effect is completed, and the above-described problem can be suppressed (prevented).

  First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow of setting an additional effect in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting an additional effect. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a plurality of operation effects are produced by a third symbol variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (Effects that cause the player to operate the frame button 22) can be set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for the special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is changed to the first variation pattern (0 after the special symbol variation starts). A variation pattern corresponding to a period of ˜30 seconds), a second variation pattern (a variation pattern corresponding to a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation), and a third variation pattern (a special symbol variation). The third symbol variation effect is set separately for a variation pattern corresponding to a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the start.

  Here, in recent years, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, it is required to increase the types of effect patterns of the third symbol variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It was. Therefore, as in this control example, the applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into a plurality of periods, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought about processing to do.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to create the same type of effect pattern with a smaller amount of data than when a series of effect patterns are stored. Therefore, more production patterns can be created using the same amount of data when each series of production patterns is stored, the amount of data used for the third symbol variation production can be reduced, and other productions (for example, an accessory can be used). It is possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, bonus effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and it is possible to set various effects within a limited data capacity, There was an effect that it was possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  However, when a series of effect patterns is created by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, in each of the continuous variation patterns, an operation effect is set in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. was there. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the variation pattern that is executed first among the continuous variation patterns. When the operation effect is executed in the first half of the variation pattern to be executed next, an effect pattern in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is created.

  Furthermore, by setting a longer period of the operation effect to be executed with at least one variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns, the period in which the player is eager to play the game is continued, so that the player enters the game Although it may be possible to suppress getting bored early, when such a configuration is used, it is easy to create an effect pattern in which multiple operation effects are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) Met.

  As described above, this control example solves a problem that occurs when a process capable of creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data is executed.

  In the first variation pattern, an operation effect (“variation B”) with an effective operation period of 10 seconds for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, and in the second variation pattern, an operation effect (“SP2”) with an operation effective period of 25 seconds. However, in the third variation pattern, an operation effect (“SSP2”) having an operation effective period of 10 seconds can be set.

  Specifically, “variation B” that can be set as the first variation pattern is the operation effective period (10 seconds) 17 seconds after the first variation pattern is started (after the special symbol variation is started). It is set and ends after 3 seconds after the operation valid period elapses. In the 3rd symbol display device 81, after the 3rd symbol fluctuates at high speed in the first 17 seconds and the left and right 3rd symbols stop at the same number, the operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot ( Operation effective period 10 seconds) is executed, and the effect of notifying the player of the result of the operation effect in the remaining 3 seconds is executed.

  “SP2” that can be set as the second variation pattern is an operation effect (step 30) that is executed next for 3 seconds after the first variation pattern ends (30 seconds after the special symbol variation starts). The display explaining the content of the production of the operation effective period 23 seconds) is executed, and then the operation effective period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation effective period elapses and ends after 4 seconds. In this “SP2”, the operation effective period is set to be as long as 23 seconds. By operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variable (color change, Change of the comments), the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is variable (color change, luminance change, change in lighting), or drive provided in the pachinko machine 10 The drive mode of the apparatus (see FIG. 7) is variable (change in the presence / absence of drive, change in drive speed, change in drive range). Therefore, the player can change various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period (23 seconds in this control example).

  “SSP2” that can be set as the third variation pattern is an operation effect (step 60) that is executed next for 4 seconds after the second variation pattern ends (after 60 seconds have elapsed since the start of special symbol variation). The display explaining the production contents of the operation effective period (10 seconds) is executed, and then the operation effective period (10 seconds) is set. After the operation effective period elapses, that is, after the special symbol variation starts. It ends after 90 seconds. In “SSP2”, an effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during the operation effective period is executed. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the special symbol success / failure determination result (lottery result) is a period in which the operation valid period is not set (from the start of the third variation pattern to the end after 15 seconds have elapsed). Period).

  When “variation B” is set in the first variation pattern and “SP2” is set in the second variation pattern, the operation effective period set in “variation B” and “SP2” are set. The interval between the operation effective period to be performed is 6 seconds. This interval of 6 seconds is an interval at which an additional effect can be executed. When “SP2” is set in the second variation pattern and “SSP2” is set in the third variation pattern, the operation effective period set in “SP2” and “SSP2” are set. The interval between the operation valid period is 8 seconds. This interval of 8 seconds is an interval at which an additional effect can be executed.

  The remaining period until the operation effective period (25 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in “variation B” is set to “SP2” is started is a predetermined period (in this control example, within 10 seconds). In the case of the operation timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period (10 seconds) set to “variation B” is within 4 seconds, an additional effect is executed. It will be. Further, an operation in which the remaining period until the operation effective period (10 seconds) in which the operation timing of the frame button 22 in “SP2” is set to “SSP2” is started is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of timing, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set to “SP2” is within 2 seconds, an additional effect is executed. Become.

  In this way, when a plurality of operation effects with an operation validity period set is executed, an additional effect is performed based on the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated). By using the configuration for determining whether to execute, a problem when a plurality of operation effects for which an operation effective period is set is executed (that is, the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of not operating it are repeated in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the operation burden on the player increases and the player cannot concentrate on the game.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are executed, the operation content of the operation effect executed before (whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated). ), It is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of operation effects for which the operation effective period is set are set at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In such a case, the additional effect may be executed at the predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. FIG. 250A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an operation effect when “SP2” is set as the second variation pattern, and FIG. 250B is a diagram between “SP2” and “SSP2”. FIG. 250C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a normal display in which “additional effects” are not executed in a period in which the “additional effects” can be performed, and FIG. 250C is a case where “SSP2” is set It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (a), during “SP2,” an effective period notifying unit S1 (a diagram simulating a frame button) that notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation period of the frame button 22 is valid; A period display portion M1 indicating the operation effective period in “SP2” is displayed, and the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation effective period is displayed by the period display unit M1. In the comment field, the text “Press the button” prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 during “SP2,” the word “chance” is displayed in the comment field as a result of the operation, as shown in FIG. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 250 (b) is the timing when the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), so that the valid period notifying unit S1 and the period display unit M1 are displayed. Not.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), “SSP2” is started, and an effective period notifying unit S1 for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the operation is effective for the frame button 22 (a figure simulating the frame button). ) And a period display portion M2 indicating the operation effective period in “SSP2”, and the remaining period (a in the figure) of the operation effective period is displayed by the period display unit M2. In addition, the characters “continuous hit” indicating the operation content in “SSP2” and the characters “set meter to MAX” indicating the effect content are displayed.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (c), when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the operation effective period of the frame button 22 in the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). Since the display of the effective period notifying unit S1 for informing that the display is effective, the display of the period display unit M2 indicating the operation effective period, and the display for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 are not performed. The operation of the frame button 22 is stopped. When the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250 (c) is made. If such a display (effect) is executed in a short period of time, an operation on the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the game motivation may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed, the above-described problem occurs by executing the additional effects in the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250 (b) is displayed). Is suppressed. Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the display (effect) contents of the additional effect will be described.

  FIG. 251 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example displayed as an additional effect in the present control example, and FIG. 251 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating another example displayed as an additional effect in the present control example. FIG. 251 (c) is a schematic diagram showing still another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), an additional effective period notifying unit Sa that notifies the operation effective period set by the additional effect and the additional operation effective period are added to the display content shown in FIG. 250 (b). The period display part Ma is displayed and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation effective period is displayed by the additional period display part Ma. By executing the additional effect in this manner, after the operation effective period of “SP2” is set (see FIG. 250 (a)), the operation effective period of “SSP2” is set (see FIG. 250 (c)). ), It is possible to notify the player that the operation is valid for a continuous period of time, and the player's operation on the frame button 22 becomes complicated, and the game motivation is reduced. This can be suppressed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 251 (a), the display mode (display mode and display position) of the additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the operation effective period is the same as the display mode of the effective period notification unit S1 or S2. , It does not give a sense of incongruity to the additional performance being executed. Further, since the player operates the frame button 22 as an additional effect, an additional comment is displayed for the comment displayed by the operation effect of “SP2”. The player does not feel uncomfortable with the displayed effect (operation effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 251 (a), only the additional period display unit Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example of the operation effective period will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 (b) and 251 (c).

  FIG. 251 (b) shows the display content when an additional effect is set so that the display content of “SP2” shown in FIG. 250 (a) is displayed continuously (extension). As shown in FIG. 251 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display portion M1 indicating the operation effective period of “SP2” is displayed in a state where there is no remaining period, and the side ( An additional period display section Ma is displayed on the left side in FIG. 251 (b). As a result, the remaining period a decreases in “SP2” (moves to the left side of the period display portion M1), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation effective period ends), that is, an additional effect is produced. When it is started, the additional period display section Ma can be displayed, and the player can recognize that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is “SP2” extended. .

  Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also added because the effect of rewriting (updating) the character of “chance” displayed during the operation effect of “SP2” is executed. It is possible to recognize that the operation effect executed by the effect is “SP2”.

  FIG. 251 (c) shows the display content when an additional effect is set so that the display content of “SSP2” shown in FIG. 250 (c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251 (c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display portion M2 indicating the operation effective period of “SSP2” is displayed, next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251 (b)). The additional period display section Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b decreases in the additional effect (moves to the left side of the period display portion Ma), and when the remaining period disappears (when the operation effective period ends), that is, “SSP2” When the operation valid period is started, the remaining period of the period display unit M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect is “SSP2” for the player. It is possible to recognize that the production has been executed in advance.

  Also, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect that changes the display form of the meter that is increased by the operation effect of “SSP2” (for example, the color of the meter changes or the effect around the meter is changed). By changing the value, an effect that suggests that the meter becomes MAX in the operation effect of “SSP2” is executed. Therefore, an operation effect in which the additional effect and the operation effect of “SSP2” are more relevant. Can be recognized.

<About the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 are changed and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the second control example described above. And the point that the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

  FIG. 252 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting a detailed variation pattern according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110. Has been. Specifically, the first variation for selecting the production mode (first variation pattern) of a period of 30 seconds after the variation is started (that is, a period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds after the variation starts). The pattern selection table 222a1, the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the presentation mode (second variation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation, 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the variation start A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting an effect mode (third variation pattern) for a period until the passage of time and an additional effect selection table 222a4 for determining the effect mode of the additional effect are provided.

  In this control example, the first to third variation patterns and the additional effects are selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110, and the variation pattern is a combination thereof. Based on this, one variation effect is executed. For example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first variation pattern is selected from the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, and one variation is based on the selected variation pattern. Perform the production. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second fluctuation is selected from second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. A pattern is selected, a third variation pattern is selected from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, an additional effect is selected from the additional effect selection table 222a4, and one is selected based on the selected first to third variation patterns and additional effects. The fluctuating effect is executed.

  Although illustration is omitted, when a variation time other than the above-described variation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation time is displayed. Will be selected. For example, when the main controller 110 selects short deviation (fluctuation time: 7 seconds), the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in which a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds is defined.

  First, with reference to FIG. 252 (b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (the production mode in the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (the production mode of the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the variation start) corresponds to the value of the first production counter 223f1. It is stipulated.

  Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the first effect counter 223f1, a variation A that is an effect mode in which the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined. In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, multiple types of the production | presentation aspects of the fluctuation | variation A are prescribed | regulated, and the fluctuation | variation A is performed in one of the presentation aspects. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation | variation A can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  For the value “100 to 198” of the first effect counter 223f1, a variation B that is an effect mode in which a press effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, multiple types of the production | generation aspects of the fluctuation | variation B are prescribed | regulated similarly to the fluctuation | variation A, and the fluctuation | variation B is performed by the one of those production | generation aspects. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation | variation B can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second variation pattern (the production mode in the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 defines an effect mode corresponding to the value of the second effect counter 223f2 until the 60 seconds elapse from 31 seconds after the start of the change. Yes.

  Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the second effect counter 223f2, a variation SP1 that is an effect mode in which the press effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed is defined. In the same way as the variation A, the variation SP1 has a plurality of types of production modes, and the production is executed in any one of the production modes. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of fluctuation | variation SP1 can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  For the value “100 to 198” of the second effect counter 223f2, a variation SP2 that is an effect mode in which a press effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. In the same way as the variation B, the variation SP2 has a plurality of types of production modes defined, and the production is executed in any one of the production modes. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of fluctuation | variation SP2 can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252 (d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (the production mode in the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the variation start) will be described. FIG. 252 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the rendering mode from the start of the variation to the passage of 90 seconds is defined corresponding to the value of the third rendering counter 223f3. Yes.

  Specifically, for the value “0 to 99” of the third effect counter 223f3, a variation SSP1, which is an effect mode in which the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined. In the same way as the variation A, the variation SSP1 also has a plurality of types of effects, and the effects are executed in any one of the effects. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of fluctuation | variation SSP1 can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  For the value “100 to 198” of the third effect counter 223f3, a variation SSP2 that is an effect mode in which a press effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed is defined. In the same way as the variation B, the variation SSP2 also has a plurality of types of effects, and the effects are executed in any one of the effects. Thereby, since the variation of the production | presentation aspect of fluctuation | variation SSP2 can be increased, a player's interest can be improved.

  Although details will be described later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. By these independent counters, each variation period (a first variation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, a second variation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds) as detailed variation patterns Since the production mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, variations of the production mode can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Here, in each fluctuation period (a first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, a second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and a third fluctuation pattern that is a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds). When the pressing effect for pressing the button 22 is continuously executed, for example, when the pressing effect is executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds and a period of 31 to 60 seconds, the pressing effect executed first. When the pressing of the frame button 22 in the (pressing effect executed in the period of 0 to 30 seconds) is slow, the pressing effect (the period of 31 to 60 seconds is opened after a short interval from the pressing of the frame button 22). The press effect executed at the same time is executed. In this case, the second pressing effect is executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds) even though the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is finished and the hand is released from the frame button 22. Thus, the player moves his hand to the frame button 22 again at a short interval, which increases the operation burden on the player and may make it impossible to concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when the pressing effect is continuously executed in one variation effect, if the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow, the first pressing effect ends. An additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed in a period from the start to the start of the next (second) press effect. Thus, the pressing effect or the additional effect for pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first pressing effect until the second pressing effect is ended. It is only necessary to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the process is completed, and the above-described problems can be suppressed (prevented).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be described. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

  The additional effect selection table 222a4 selects an additional effect to be executed when the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first pressing effect is slow in the case where the pressing effect is continuously executed in the one variation effect described above. It is a table.

  As shown in FIG. 253, an additional effect is defined when the variation pattern (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect is a specific combination (when the press effect is continuous), When the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed in the first pressing effect that is executed first among the continuous pressing effects, the period from the end of the pressing effect that is executed first to the start of the pressing effect that is executed next, The specified additional effects are executed.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect is not a specific combination (when the press effect is not continuous), the additional effect is not defined and added. The production is never executed.

  Specifically, the case where the first variation pattern is “variation A (no press effect)” will be described first.

  When the first variation pattern is “variation A (no pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (no pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (ie, 60 In any one of “change SSP1 (no press effect)” and “change SSP2 (with press effect)”, the press effect is continuously executed in one change effect. Therefore, no additional effects are defined and no additional effects are executed.

  When the first variation pattern is “variation A (no pressing effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP2 (with pressing effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” and “variation SSP1”. If there is no “pressing effect”, the additional effect is not defined because the pressing effect is not continuously executed in one variation effect. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. It is prescribed.

  When this additional effect 2 is defined, the additional effect 2 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the press effect executed in the second variation pattern. Since the additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, the player continues to the frame button 22 for a period until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

  Next, a case where the first variation pattern is “variation B (with press effect)” will be described.

  When the first variation pattern is “variation B (with press effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP1 (without press effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” (that is, 60). In any one of “change SSP1 (no press effect)” and “change SSP2 (with press effect)”, the press effect is continuously executed in one change effect. Therefore, no additional effects are defined and no additional effects are executed.

  When the first variation pattern is “variation B (with a press effect)” and the second variation pattern is “variation SP2 (with a press effect)”, the third variation pattern is “none” and “variation SSP1”. In either case (no pressing effect) or “variation SSP2 (with pressing effect)”, the pressing effect is continuously executed in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern. An additional effect 1 is defined.

  Furthermore, if the third variation pattern is “variation SSP2 (with a press effect)”, the press effect is continuously executed in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern. In addition to the additional effect 1, an additional effect 2 is defined.

  If the additional effect 1 is defined, the additional effect 1 is executed when the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is late in the press effect executed in the first variation pattern. Since the additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, the player continues to play the frame button 22 for a period until the press effect in the second variation pattern is executed. The operation can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the effect counter 223f are changed and the effective period storage area 223ea is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The effect counter 223f is used to select the first variation counter 223f1 used to select the first variation pattern, the second variation counter 223f2 used to select the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern. A third variation counter 223f3 that hangs down is provided (see FIG. 254 (b)).

  The effective period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not an effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (that is, a period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effective). The period during which the button 22 is validly pressed is set as a value of the elapsed time (ms) from the start of the fluctuating effect. This effective period storage area 223ea is used as a press effect to be executed when a change pattern command for executing a press effect is set (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256) in the change display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256). A period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (see FIG. 257), when an additional production is set (S6854: Yes in FIG. 257), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the additional production is valid. Is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). And although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, when the one fluctuation production is complete | finished, the content of the effective period storage area 223ea is cleared.

  Next, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration in the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

  The additional effect data storage area 233n is an area for storing effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2. In the additional effect data storage area 233n, when it is determined that there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) (S2751: Yes), Corresponding additional effect data is stored. Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when the execution of the additional effect is determined at the update timing of each additional effect (the additional effect flag is on), it is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. The effect data being overwritten is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, an additional effect is executed.

  The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined. When the additional effect 1 is ON, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 is determined and is OFF. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 has not been determined. The additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when an additional effect command indicating the additional effect 1 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6903). In the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is referred to (S3852), and the value of the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on. When it is determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional effect 2 is determined. When the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has been determined and is off. In some cases, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been determined. The additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when an additional effect command indicating the additional effect 2 is received in the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) (S6902). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), reference is made (S3856), and the value of the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on. When it is determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. In this control example, the point that the change display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of the change display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and the frame button input monitoring is performed. The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the effect processing (see S1707 in FIG. 137), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712) in the present control example, when a variation pattern in which a press effect is executed is set in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above (S2031). : Yes), the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the executed press effect is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

  In the seventh control example, the press effect, the slot effect, and the point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the process corresponding to those effects is not executed. However, the press effect in the second control example is not executed. The slot effect and the point effect can be executed, and processing corresponding to these effects may be executed. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of effects, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed. Then, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation pattern received from the main controller 110) acquired in the process of S2003 is displayed as the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 to third fluctuation pattern selection table). 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and a display variation pattern command is set (S2006).

  When the process of S2006 is completed, the process proceeds to S2031. In the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is to execute a press effect (S2031: Yes), each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 is displayed. The operation effective period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the effective period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2031, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute the press effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process of S2007 is performed. Transition to processing.

  When the processing of S2031 or S2092 is completed, the processing from S2007 to S2011 is executed as in the second control example, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1707), a frame button pressing command is set based on the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 during the operation valid period of the frame button 22. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the operation effective period of the pressing effect, the period until the next pressing effect is started is determined, and the period until the next pressing effect is started is short. When it is determined that (in this control example, 10 seconds or less), an additional effect command is set to execute the additional effect.

  Specifically, in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the effective period storage area 223ea, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid (frame button operation valid) It is determined whether or not (period) (S6851). If it is determined in the processing of S6851 that it is not the frame button operation valid period (S6851: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6851 that the frame button operation is valid (S6851: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6801).

  If it is determined in step S6801 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6801: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6801 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: Yes), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6582), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button press command set in the process of S 6852 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 (S 1702). Are transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display frame button pressing command, the display control device 114 determines a period (for example, a pressing effect period in the second variation pattern) in which the command is set from the received command, and an effect ( For example, a comment display effect (see FIG. 250 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S6852 is completed, it is determined whether or not the current period is a period during which the press effect is being executed (S6853). If it is determined in step S6853 that the current period is not a period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6853 that the current period is a period during which the press effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, the process of S6854 is performed. Transition to processing.

  In the process of S6854, it is determined whether or not the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less. In the process of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), in order to execute the additional effect, a display additional effect command is executed. After setting (S6855), the effective period storage area 223ea is updated based on the pressing effective period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6854, when it is determined that the remaining period until the next pressing effect is started is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the process of S6855 and S6856 is skipped, and this process is performed. Exit.

<Control processing executed by display control apparatus in seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260, a control process executed by the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (FIG. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180), and the variation pattern command process (FIG. 146) is compared with the second control example described above. The point that the change pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) is executed instead of the reference (a), the point that the additional effect command process (see FIG. 259 (b)) is added, and the pointer update process The difference is that the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 258, the details of the command determination process 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described. In the command determination process 4 (S2502) in the present control example, a change pattern command is used instead of the change pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) with respect to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 259 (a)) is executed and the point that the additional effect command process (see FIG. S259 (b)) is added, and the other points are the same.

  In the command determination process 4 (S2502), first, similarly to the second control example, the processes of S2601 to S2604 are executed. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), the variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605), and the process proceeds to S2601.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605) in the present control example, the additional effect data is added to the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146 (a)) in the second control example described above when there is additional effect data. The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

  In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751). When additional effect data is set as the variation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when the pressing effect is set (selected) in the first to third variation patterns continuously. It is.

  In the process of S2751, when it is determined that there is additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751: Yes), additional effect data corresponding to the command (effect data corresponding to the additional effect 1 or the additional effect 2) is used. Then, it is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process proceeds to S2701.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2751 that there is no additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2701.

  When the process proceeds to S2701, the process from S2701 to S2706 is executed and the present process is terminated as in the second control example described above.

  In this way, when the variation pattern command that may execute the additional effect is received, the effect data necessary for the execution (display) of the additional effect is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n in advance. When executing (displaying) an additional effect, you can execute (display) the additional effect without delay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only when an additional effect is executed, the effect data necessary for the execution (display) of the additional effect may be stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n. Thereby, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to store the effect data in the additional effect data storage area 233n, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed as in the second control example.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not an additional effect command has been received (S2639). If it is determined in step S2609 that an additional effect command has been received (S2439: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to step S2601.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command process (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259 (b). This additional effect command process (S2640) is a process executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of the additional effect is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the additional effect command process (S2640), first, it is determined whether or not the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901).

  If it is determined in the process of S6901 that the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of the additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON (S6903), and this process is performed. Exit. As described above, the additional effect 1 is an additional effect that is executed between the pressing effect of the first variation pattern and the pressing effect of the second variation pattern.

  When the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON by the processing of S6903, the additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to display (display).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of the additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this process ends. . As described above, the additional effect 2 is an additional effect that is executed between the pressing effect of the second variation pattern and the pressing effect of the third variation pattern.

  When the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON by the processing of S6902, the additional effect 2 is executed at the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the second variation pattern) ( Display data table buffer is updated to display.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2609 that an additional effect command has not been received (S2639: No), other command processing is executed (S2614), and the process returns to step S2601.

  Next, the details of the pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined with respect to the pointer update process (see FIG. 153) in the second control example described above, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern) The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) one second before the end timing of the press effect), and the other points are the same.

  In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (0.1 second before the end timing of the press effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851). ).

  In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the case where the additional effect 1 is executed (the frame button 22 has been pressed early or has not been pressed). Alternatively, the pressing effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), so this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3852 that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), the additional effect 1 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Therefore, the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to OFF. (S3854), and this process ends.

  In the process of S3853, the additional effect 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d where the display data executed after 1 second is stored. Thereby, the additional effect 1 can be executed (displayed) from the time when one second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional effect 1 (one second before the end timing of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern). Note that the update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the press effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed in accordance with the change.

  In the process of S3851, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the second variation pattern). Is determined (S3855).

  In the process of S3855, if it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not a case where the additional effect 2 is executed (the frame button 22 has been pressed early or has not been pressed). Alternatively, the pressing effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), and the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3856, when it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the additional effect 2 is executed (from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the next pressing effect). Therefore, the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to OFF. (S3858), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S3855, when it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the process from S3802 to S3806 is executed and the process is terminated as in the second control example described above.

  As described above, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), the display data table buffer is overwritten (updated) beforehand with effect data for executing (displaying) the additional effect at the update timing of each additional effect. The production can be executed (displayed) without delay. Of course, the display data table buffer may be updated at the timing when the additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the additional effect 1, if the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of the additional effect 1 is displayed. The data table buffer 233d may be overwritten (updated).

  Further, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the update timing of each additional effect, and then it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed (whether or not the additional effect flag is on). It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the additional effect is executed (that is, when the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the update timing of the additional effect. Thereby, when the additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is the update timing of the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In this control example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, an additional effect is set for the interval between them. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when a plurality of operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, a plurality of operation effects are continuously performed by performing processing so as to delay the start timing of the operation effect executed first by a predetermined interval. You may make it perform, and you may comprise so that a process may be carried out so that the start timing of the operation effect performed later may be advanced a predetermined interval.

  With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation effects as one continuous operation effect without setting an additional effect between the plurality of operation effects. In this case, for example, the start timing of the operation effect to be executed later is advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), so that the end timing of the operation effect to be executed later is also advanced by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is preferable to set the additional effect described above after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, or to set a longer period for the effect to display the result of the operation effect.

<Modification of the seventh control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the seventh control example described above, a case has been described in which a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect executed for one special symbol variation, but in this modification, a continuous special symbol variation is performed. A case where a plurality of operation effects are set so as to straddle will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as each control example mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow of setting an additional effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an additional effect is set across a plurality of special symbol variations.

  As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set for a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the start of the special symbol variation. The background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 can be switched by the player operating the frame button 22 during this period.

  When the first variation pattern “variation A” and the second variation pattern “SP2” are set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27. The operation effect is executed in a period of 2 to 4 seconds (23 seconds). In special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), since the end of the special symbol variation is the end timing of the second variation pattern “SP2”, the end timing of the operation effective period of “SP2” in the special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the operation effective period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

  Also during the 5 seconds, the control similar to the seventh control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display content of the additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be described.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram for explaining the display content of the additional effect when a plurality of operation effects are set across the continuous special symbol variation, and FIG. 262 (a) is an example of the display content in the normal background change effect period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262 (c) shows display contents during the background change effect period when the additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), in this modified example, a display mode capable of changing the background is displayed as in the above-described sixth control example. The display contents are the same as those in FIG. 241 (b) in the sixth control example described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), an additional effective period notification unit Sa that notifies the effective period set by the additional effect 3, and an additional period display that indicates the additional operation effective period Part Ma is displayed, and the remaining period (b in the figure) of the operation effective period is displayed by the additional period display part Ma. Then, the characters “MAX and get a new background get” explaining the game contents in the additional effect 3 and a meter that is changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

  In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly operates the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, the background that cannot be normally selected can be selected in the background change effect. Become.

  FIG. 262 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content of a background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in FIG. 262 (c), normally, two types of the “sea” stage or the “mountain” stage can be selected as the background (see FIG. 262 (a)). , “River” stage is displayed to be selectable.

  As described above, in the present modification, an additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed even in a plurality of operation effects set so as to cross a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, as in the seventh control example described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation for the frame button executed by the player from straddling a plurality of special symbol variations from becoming complicated.

  In the additional effect 3, the condition for the meter to be MAX may be a case where the operation content executed during the operation effect satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result (special result determination result) of the special symbol variation 2 in advance. (So-called prefetching) and the determination result may be a predetermined result (for example, jackpot). Moreover, you may combine both.

  Further, the additional effects used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example additionally set both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operation effective period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, only the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed, and the operation valid period of the frame button 22 may not be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a case will be described in which only the effect mode is changed without changing the operation effective period of the frame button 22 as an additional effect. FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic diagram showing display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (a) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. FIG. 263 (b) shows an additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation effective period and the display of the period display unit M1 deleted from the display content of FIG. 251 (b) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. FIG. 263 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 263 (c) shows an additional period display section Ma and a period display section M2 showing the additional operation effective period from the display contents of FIG. 251 (c) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content which deleted the display.

  As shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to (c), since the operation effective period of the frame button 22 is not changed as an additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is executed is a period in which the operation effective period is not set. Therefore, the period display units M1 and M2 indicating the operation effective period and the additional period display unit Ma indicating the additional operation effective period are not displayed.

  However, since the operation display unit Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the effective period notification unit Sa shown in FIG. 251 as notification that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as an effect mode, the operation is effective. It is possible to suppress the player from stopping the operation of the frame button 22 during the period between the period and the operation valid period (operation invalid period).

  As described above, the notification (the display of the operation display unit Sb) that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as an effect mode is performed without changing the operation effective period as an additional effect. Thus, it is possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 across a plurality of operation valid periods, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent repetition of the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of stopping it. .

  In this case, as an effect mode of the additional effect, it is preferable to use an effect mode in which the display mode is changed based on the player operating the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. Thereby, although it is actually the operation invalid period, it is possible to make the player think that the display mode is variable based on the operation valid period, that is, the operation of the frame button 22.

  Specifically, as an effect that is actually executed during the operation effective period, an effect that an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251 (a), or an effect shown in FIG. 251 (b). The operation of the frame button 22 includes an effect in which the content of the comment changes midway based on the operation of the frame button 22 and an effect that the meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. Regardless of this, it is preferable to execute a pseudo effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner.

  Thereby, it can be made to think that the display mode is changing based on operation of the frame button 22. FIG. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the pseudo effect mode described above is changed may be switched based on the operation content (the operation interval and the number of operations) performed on the frame button 22 executed during the actual operation valid period. Thereby, it can be made to think that the production | presentation aspect during an operation invalid period is changing based on operation of the frame button 22. FIG.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. Each control example described above constitutes various effects as operation effects in which the player operates the frame button 22. This control example is different in that the effect mode control is different when the operation effect in each control example described above is executed.

  Specifically, based on the remaining period of the operation effective period set for each operation effect, control is performed to vary the effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated. With this configuration, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation effective period is equal to or less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the operation effective period is the predetermined time. More than (for example, more than 5 seconds), the effect mode in which the change amount (the amount of increase in the meter, the amount of increase in the numerical value, etc.) of the effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is larger (larger) is executed With this, you can entertain the operation effects to the end.

  Further, in the operation effect in which the effect mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (that is, long press operation) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), the remaining period of the operation effective period is equal to or less than the predetermined time (for example, 5 The period for determining that the long press operation has been performed is shortened (for example, 1 second). By configuring in this way, it is possible to experience the change in the production mode based on the long press operation even in the final stage of the operation production, so that the operation production can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the eighth control example, a part of the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed and a part of the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is compared with each control example described above. It is different from the changed point. About another point, it is the same as each control example mentioned above. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 264 (a) and FIG. 264 (b), an operation effect in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 264 (a), a display mode that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed during the variation display of the third symbol. A remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol simulating the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is variable based on the decrease in the remaining time. In this control example, the remaining time period is set to a red display color, and when the remaining time is reduced, the amount is changed to white (the portion displayed in red is reduced) and displayed variably ( (See FIG. 264 (b)).

  Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, “long-pressed auto-strike” indicates that, by long-pressing the frame button 22, control (discrimination) is performed in the same state as that of continuous-stroke. Characters are displayed. In the upper part of the display area, an indicator whose color is changed based on repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the degree of expectation that the determination result of the special symbol whose scale is changing is a win is set. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the indicator is displayed with a variable color (variable from white to red) until the indicator scale is larger, the player is not successful in determining whether the special symbol is changing. I can expect that.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for 3 seconds or 1 second), the long press is performed on the pattern simulating the frame button 22. Detected, and “automatic continuous hitting” characters are displayed to indicate that it is set to be in a state where automatic continuous hitting is set. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be a long press is variably set according to the remaining time during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, when the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds until then, the setting that has been determined to be a long press is the frame button 22 continuously for 1 second. Switching is set so that a long press is determined when is pressed. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time is short, more indicators can be stored and button effects can be enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed depending on the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of change of the indicator is increased or the speed of change is increased. You may make it comprise. In addition, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less) or the like, when the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value or the predetermined value (for example, the scale MAX) that is the value by which the indicator can be changed. If an effect to be displayed is selected, the indicator may be varied and displayed up to the scale 1).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707), which is one processing in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S1707).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time (frame button operation valid period) is a value greater than 0 (S7031). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (0 or less) (S7031: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is not less than 5 seconds (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

  In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S7037). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the SW press counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW pressing counter (not shown), it is determined whether the value is longer than the long pressing determination value set in the processing of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that the value is longer than the long press determination value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the variation pattern (S7041), and the updated SW indicator is displayed. A display command is set (S7042). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value in the process of S7040 (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7037 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is discriminated (S7043). If it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW pressing counter (not shown) is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds, the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 assuming that it is continuously hit. Update. And when it becomes more than a long press judgment value, it sets so that SW indicator may be varied. Note that the amount by which the SW indicator varies is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set so as to represent the expected degree of the determination result.

  Therefore, the player can change the indicator even if the player presses the button for a long time or makes repeated hits. Furthermore, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, even if the SW effective time is reduced, it is possible to show the player the effect of changing the indicator. Note that the speed at which the indicator is varied may be set faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

  The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and to measure a period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a number-of-presses counter) and a counter that measures a period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, 1 is added to the press count measurement counter, and measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

  In a state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing number measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( It is determined by the pressing period determining means whether or not a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds has been reached.

  Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. May be.

  As described above, by providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter, it is possible to control the press operation (continuous hit operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22 independently of each other.

  Next, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265), when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed and operated. Long press operation even if the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short by shortening (decreasing from 3 seconds to 1 second) the long press judgment value, which is a value for determining that (Automatic continuous hitting) can be executed, and when the long press determination value is shortened, the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short by increasing the speed at which the SW indicator is varied. The SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range that can be variably set) by the long press operation (automatic striking) executed in

  On the other hand, in this modification, when the long press operation (automatic striking) is executed in a state where the long press determination value is shortened, the long press operation (automatic when the long press determination value is not shortened) is performed. This is different in that it is configured such that the value of the SW pressing counter is added more than the continuous hit).

  In this modification, when a long press operation (automatic continuous hitting) is performed in a state where the long press determination value is shortened, the value of the SW press counter is increased (the automatic continuous hit interval is short). However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), A large number of SW pressing counter values due to automatic repeated hitting may be added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of this modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266).

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the above-described eighth control example, the processes in S7031 to S7037 are performed. Processing is executed. If it is determined in step S7037 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7051), not 1 second. If it is determined (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processes of S7038, S7041 and S7042 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S1707 of FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7051 that it is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is added by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is added by 2 (S7052). In step S7053, a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S7037 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7037: No), the frame button input monitoring / production process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) in the eighth control example described above is performed. Then, the processing of S7043 and S7044 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in this modification, when the remaining period of the SW effective period (button operation effective period) is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. The value (time) to be performed is shortened (from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter added by the automatic continuous hitting operation is added more than usual. did.

  As a result, the SW indicator is variably displayed to the end (up to a maximum range that can be variably set) by a long press operation (automatic striking) that is executed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

  Furthermore, unlike the above-described eighth control example, since the value added to the SW press counter is configured to increase, the value of the SW press counter can be associated with the value of the SW indicator, and the control load There is also an effect that can be reduced.

  The SW pressing counter (not shown) described above is configured to measure the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and to measure a period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter that measures the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (a number-of-presses counter) and a counter that measures a period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (a pressing period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when the frame button 22 is started to be pressed, 1 is added to the press count measurement counter, and measurement of the press period measurement counter is started.

  In a state where the player continuously presses the frame button 22, the value of the pressing number measurement counter is not added, the value of the pressing period measurement counter is added, and the value of the pressing period measurement counter is a predetermined value ( It is determined by the pressing period determining means whether or not a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds has been reached.

  Then, when it is determined by the pressing period determination means that the value of the pressing period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. May be.

  As described above, by providing the press count measurement counter and the press period measurement counter, it is possible to control the press operation (continuous hit operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22 independently of each other.

  As described above, the configurations described in the control examples may be combined as appropriate. In particular, the configurations of the reach navigation effects described in the first control example and the configurations of the reach navigation effects described in the fourth control example are combined. Or the combination pressing effects described in the second control example are combined with the pressing effects in the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or described in the second control example. Each component of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example is combined with each component of the continuous slot effect described in the fifth control example, or each point effect described in the second control example is described in the third control example. You may combine with each structure of the point production which performed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a base member; a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable; and an abutting member formed so as to be able to abut against the displacement member. The first member is disposed on the member so as to be linearly displaceable, the pinion gear is rotatably disposed on the first member, the rack gear is engaged with the pinion gear, and is linearly displaceable on the first member. A second member disposed, wherein the base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is engaged, and the first member of the displacement member is in contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

  Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member, and the contact member is displaced together with the displacement member, or the contact member is disposed at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. If the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions, control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper), etc. Are known.

  However, the conventional configuration described above has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is decreased in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, breakage of the displacement member and the abutting member can be suppressed while securing a presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  That is, the displacement member includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the rack gear of the base member is engaged through a pinion gear rotatably disposed on one member, the second member is increased more than the first member when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. Thereby, the displacement speed of a 2nd member can be made quick and the effect accompanying the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, the displacement member abuts the first member, whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member, on the contact member, so that the impact at the time of contact is weakened to prevent damage to the displacement member and the contact member. can do.

  In addition, as a form of driving of the first member with respect to the base member, for example, the rack member formed on the first member meshes with a pinion gear disposed on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotated to drive the first member to the base. A member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member or a tip of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member, and the arm body is driven to rotate, whereby the first member is moved to the base member. And the like that are linearly displaced.

  The contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the protruding direction with respect to the first member. The second member may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In any case, the first member having a slower displacement speed than the second member is brought into contact with the contact member, so that the impact at the time of contact is weakened, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A gaming machine A2 that is in a direction allowing displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. Since the displacement member is in a direction that allows the displacement of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member is received by the abutment member and escaped, so that a buffering effect can be exerted. As a result, the displacement member and the abutment member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

  The direction allowing the linear displacement of the displacement member means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least a component of the linear displacement direction of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member need not be a linear displacement, and may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is contacted. At this time, the escape operation of the contact member can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exhibit a buffering action and to easily prevent the displacement member and the contact member from being damaged.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the gaming machine A4 includes a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member. Can be achieved. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the abutting member are arranged side by side in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. Therefore, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement increases, resulting in an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the size by using one of the guide members.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be disposed at a position where it does not contact the displacement member. A state where no contact is made can be formed. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. When the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the stop position of the displacement member is easily aligned with the target position. By disposing the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the both, the number of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and the life of them is improved. Can be achieved.

  Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes contact member drive means for applying a drive force to the contact member, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the drive force of the contact member drive means. A gaming machine A6 that is formed to be displaceable in a direction.

  Here, the displacement member includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member relative to the base member. Since the structure is such that the base member is linearly displaced in the accelerated state, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stop state) becomes slow, there is a possibility that the presentation effect accompanying the displacement is hindered.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the presentation effect accompanying the displacement.

  The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member need not be a linear displacement, and may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts the first member of the displacement members. A gaming machine A7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased. That is, the abutting member abuts on the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, so that an auxiliary force acts from the abutting member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from the start of pushing back the stopped displacement member until the displacement member speed exceeds the contact member speed and the displacement member displacement precedes the contact member displacement). As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, and a gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is a rack in the contact member. A gaming machine A8 that is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the abutting member, the displacement member can be easily linearly displaced quickly from the stopped state, and the displacement member ( The speed of the linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement can be improved.

  That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited. It is possible to reliably assist the initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the linear displacement speed of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member is correspondingly increased. Speed can be increased.

  In addition, the gear ratio being large (small) means that the distance of linear displacement of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

  Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member is delayed. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such coexistence becomes possible for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention taking the lower unit 600 as an example>
A driving unit; a displacement member that is driven by the driving unit to be displaceable toward the first position; and a contacted member to which the displacement member displaced to the first position contacts. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine B1 is formed such that at least a component in a direction toward the abutted member among the velocity components of the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and an abutting position (first position) where they abut each other. A gaming machine to be formed is known (for example, JP-A-2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in directions close to each other and brought into contact (combined) at the contact position, whereby the pair of displacement members are integrated. To produce a single character.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated and, for example, the posture is unstable, for example, they are rebounded. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character increases and extends, The effect of the production is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member of the velocity component of the displacement member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, since the decrease in at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of the displacement of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the contacted member to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, the abutted member may be a member stopped at the first position or a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is arranged at the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is positioned relative to the abutted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state). Arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displacement member (that is, the displacement member and the abutted member being in a mutually displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

  In addition, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component continuously decreases toward the first position, or a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. Examples of combinations of these are exemplified.

  Further, the decrease in the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced, but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes zero, and This includes the case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

  The gaming machine B1 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a state in which the driving state of the driving means is constant, The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least a component in a direction toward the abutted member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means reduces the reduction in the vicinity of the first position of the component in the direction toward the abutted member among the speed components of the displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means in accordance with the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the driving means, thereby reducing the control cost and improving the reliability.

  Examples of the state in which the driving state is constant include a state in which the supply current or supply voltage is constant if the driving means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.). The However, the change of the state in the transient response at the time of starting and stopping shall be ignored.

  In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member that is displaceably disposed, and the transmission means is a rotation base that is rotatably connected to the base member and a position that is separated from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. And a connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is rotatably connected to the displacement member, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base as a rotation center in a direction to bring the connecting tip portion close to the first position. Accordingly, the gaming machine B3, wherein the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base. That is, the displacement in the tangential direction of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought close to the first position with the rotation base as the rotation center, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. Thus, since the transmission means interposes the connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connection member, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means The structure of the means can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes: A guided portion that is guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is a component in a direction toward at least the abutted member among speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove; Is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion that is guided along the guide groove. Of the speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Thus, since the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means Can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the gaming machine B5 is provided with an interposed member that is connected to the base member so that one side is displaceable and is connected to the displacement member so that the other side is displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the gaming machine B5 includes an interposed member that is connected to the base member so that one side is displaceable and is connected to the displacement member so that the other side is displaceable. When the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means and the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be combined with the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposed member. Thereby, the form of the displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B5, the one side and the other side of the interposed member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the one side and the other side of the intervention member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by the shaft support, so when the displacement member is displaced, The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped trajectory with the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied from the interposed member member to the displacement member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the displacement form of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component in a direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means causes the component in the direction toward the abutted member of the velocity components of the displacement member to be at least substantially 0 at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component in a direction toward the abutted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is a negative value in the first position. Game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that the component in the direction toward the abutted member of the velocity component of the displacement member is a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in a direction away from the abutted member at the first position, the displacement member is displaced when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts the abutted member. Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Also, if the displacement member is a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions or control, Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, the occurrence of impact can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the game machine includes a second drive unit that drives the contacted member, and a second transmission unit that transmits a driving force of the second drive unit to the contact member. The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is configured so that the speed component of the abutted member is constant while the driving state of the second driving means is constant. A gaming machine B9, wherein at least a component in a direction toward the displacement member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable toward the first position, so the effect by bringing the pair of members into contact with each other Can enhance the effect. For example, the pair of members can be integrated to form a single character by displacing the member to be abutted and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (merging) at the first position.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B9 includes the second transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the second driving unit to the contacted member, and the second transmission unit includes at least one of the speed components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the occurrence of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, the abutted member and the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded, and the attitudes of the abutted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, a reduction in at least the component in the direction toward the displacement member among the velocity components of the contacted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to form the single character by integrating the contacted member with the displacement member is reduced for both the contacted member and the displacement member. Thus, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, the second transmission means reduces at least a component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position while the driving state of the second driving unit is constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving unit in accordance with the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second driving means, thereby reducing the control cost and improving the reliability.

  Note that the abutted member, the second driving unit, and the second transmission unit in the gaming machine B9 can be replaced with the displacement member, the driving unit, and the transmission unit in the gaming machines B2 to B8. Therefore, an interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the contacted member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding unit 700 as an example>
Drive means, first and second members displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and first and second transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first and second members, respectively. A first predetermined section in which the first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first drive loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than a force is loaded on the driving means, and the second transmission means is a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is loaded on the driving means. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmission means can In a state where one predetermined section is formed, a small number of the first predetermined section In a state where at least a part of the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section forms at least a part of the second predetermined section. A gaming machine C1, wherein one transmission means forms the first suppression section.

  Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, and A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, JP-A-2015-53958). According to such a gaming machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by one driving means, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the second member is displaced by one driving means, the driving force for driving both members is duplicated, so that the load on the driving means increases and the durability thereof is reduced. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving unit is reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section that can reduce the load of the driving means smaller than the first predetermined section. 2 transmission means can be formed a second predetermined section and a second suppression section that can reduce the load of the driving means smaller than the second predetermined section, and in a state where the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, In a state in which the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section. 1 transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the driving means can be distributed, the load of the driving means can be reduced and the durability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one side at a time) and the first member and the second member can be displaced together, it is possible to reduce the load on the driving means, The production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a cam member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving means, and a first member or A cam rubbing member that applies displacement to the second member, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined amount. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a crank member having a pin portion positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank frictional contact member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides and that imparts displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove; In the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the amount of displacement of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is determined as the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the crank frictional contact member.

  According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or by the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (friction surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank friction member (distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member around can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the second predetermined section In the 2 suppression section, the gaming machine C4, wherein the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, the first weight or the second member is used to make the first The load of the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

  Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction member or the crank member and the crank friction member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using the interlock, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the driving means can be changed while maintaining the above.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to give displacement to the first member. A crank member having a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from a rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank member thereof. A crank rubbing member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and that imparts displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove, and the cam member and A gaming machine C5, wherein the crank member is integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that the space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, compared with the case where it forms separately, the shift | offset | difference of the displacement of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be suppressed, and the precision of the synchronization of both members can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission unit or the second transmission unit does not transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after the non-transmission section.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not apply the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. It is possible to form a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state as transmission, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

  That is, when starting the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of the inertial force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member is slowed down. Since it is difficult to displace smoothly, the non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided as a non-transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to gain momentum, and after the momentum is applied (that is, after passing through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission sections, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each non-transmission section. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means or the second transmission means can simultaneously form a non-transmission section, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace both the first member and the second member, and during that time, the driving means can be idled with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member Has a displacement component downward in the gravitational direction, so that when one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. By avoiding the state, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a pin that is eccentrically positioned from a rotation center of the main body portion A crank member having a portion, and a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to apply displacement to the first member or the second member. A section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. Passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. Be done If, before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission interval, the gaming machine rotation of the crank member is characterized in that it is stopped C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the first member or the second member starts to be displaced, and the pin part reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. In the case of sliding toward, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means.

  That is, when the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be made non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In the structure in which the part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a circular arc that protrudes toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means Is overloaded. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 2400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide, the game can be rotated on the slide member A rotation member disposed on the base member, and conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into a rotation motion of the rotation member, wherein the conversion means rotates the rotation member. A gaming machine D1 that can form a state that is not converted into motion.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-236802). A gaming machine is also known in which a sliding member is provided with a rotating member and driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member. According to this gaming machine, while the slide member is slid (linearly moved), the rotary member disposed on the slide member can be rotated, and an effect that combines the linear motion and the rotary motion is performed. Can do.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating member and the driving means for rotating the rotating member are disposed on the slide member, so that the weight of the entire slide member increases, and the slide member is driven. There has been a problem that the load on the driving means for (sliding) increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it includes a rotating member that is rotatably arranged on the slide member, and a conversion means that converts the slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotating member. The rotation member can be rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the entire slide member is reduced accordingly, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement). The load on the driving means for suppressing the load can be suppressed.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotation motion of the rotation member, so only the form in which the rotation member is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a configuration in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotated. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A game machine D2 comprising: a pinion gear, and a release means formed so as to be able to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear and disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed to be meshable with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. Therefore, when the slide member is slid with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Moreover, since the conversion means includes release means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotated can be formed. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotational motion) can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the release means is provided on the base member, and it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, so that the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to a tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby engaging the rack gear and the pinion gear. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being released.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward the one side in the tooth width direction. At least a portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-described portion of the base member is rotated in the reverse direction. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  In the gaming machine D2, the release means disengages the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member in which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the release means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby reducing the rack gear and the pinion gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-described portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a pinion gear, and a tooth is missing at a part of the rack gear.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slid with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member. can do.

  In this case, since the teeth of the rack gear are partly missing, when the pinion gear passes through the part of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member can be formed. . That is, according to the present configuration, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, while the tooth of the rack gear is rotated. When the pinion gear reaches the portion where the is missing, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force by stopping the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the state in which the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. A form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotational motion) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine D6, a part of the teeth of the rack gear is omitted, and the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, and the means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Therefore, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than other teeth.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the rack gear teeth are more rigid than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the tooth adjacent to the missing part collides with the tooth of the pinion gear that has passed through the missing part of the rack gear, and is easily damaged. However, its rigidity is increased, thereby improving durability. be able to.

  In addition, as a means to raise rigidity, the form which enlarges the tooth width of a tooth | gear is illustrated, for example. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes between a state that allows rotation transmission and a state that blocks rotation. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slid with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member. can do.

  In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so as to be able to change between a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation transmission is interrupted. The state which is not converted into the rotational motion of the member can be formed. That is, the one-way clutch is allowed to transmit rotation, and the rotating member is not only rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. For example, the one-way clutch is blocked from transmitting rotation. The slide member is changed from a state in which the slide member is slid while being non-rotated, or a state in which the one-way clutch allows the transmission of rotation when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. In such a state that the rotation of the rotary member is continued by the inertial force.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is not rotated. It is possible to form a form to be displaced, or a form in which the rotating member is rotated in a state in which the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. Can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving unit that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A gaming machine D9, comprising an operation element operated to change between a state allowing and blocking, and the operation element is operated by the displaced displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, the gaming machine D9 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving unit that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member. In addition to the movement of the slide member and the rotation member (linear movement and rotation movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the operation element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operation element can be used as the displacement member. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a means for operating the operating element of the one-way clutch on the slide member, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operation element that is operated to change between a state in which rotation is allowed to be transmitted and a state in which the rotation is blocked, and the base member is provided when the slide member is slid. An gaming machine D10 comprising an engaging portion positioned on a displacement locus of the operating element, wherein the operating element is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, the base member includes an engaging portion positioned on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slid and displaced. Since the operating element is operated by the joint portion, it is not necessary to provide a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operating element) on the slide member. Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  Note that the position where the engaging portion is disposed may be any position as long as it is on the above-described displacement locus of the operation element. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be on the way on the displacement locus.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member, and the second slide. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. The position where the clutch state is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permitted state can be changed. Accordingly, the position at which the rotation state of the rotation member is changed when the slide member is slid and the position at which the rotation member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped is determined according to, for example, the gaming state. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member, and the second slide. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operating element can be operated and a position where the operating element cannot be operated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. Thus, when the slide member is slid, the form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and the form in which the state of the one-way clutch cannot be switched can be formed. That is, a state in which the rotation state of the rotation member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotation state of the rotation member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be disposed on the second slide member, or may be disposed on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the second slide member may displace the engaging portion directly or indirectly.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 8400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, and a shielding opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an opening state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding opening means A first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear. And a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. When the two members are linearly displaced to one side, the shielding state is formed, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. Open state formed Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member and shielding opening means that can form a shielding state that shields a predetermined region of the base member and an opening state that opens the predetermined region. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-like rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined regions are shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. On the other hand, each rotating plate is rotated 90 degrees and the plate thickness portion (side surface) is directed to the front, thereby providing a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state). Are) disclosed.

  However, according to the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate that is rotated 90 degrees and has the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. Therefore, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to reducing the thickness in order to ensure the strength during rotation.

  On the other hand, a single plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the predetermined area is shielded (shielded) by displacing (arranging) the plate-like body to the predetermined area. On the other hand, there is also known a gaming machine configured to open a predetermined area (form an open state) by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area). Yes. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area.

  However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-like body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it was necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielding state and the open state.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member that is disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the first member, and A second member that has a second side rack gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear and that can be linearly displaced on the first member, and a base side rack gear that is formed on the base member and meshes with the first side pinion gear. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side so that a shielding state is formed, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, an open state is formed.

  That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member and the second member retracted from the predetermined area are arranged accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for doing so.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined area or disposing the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielding state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  The shielding state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and is a region opened to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined region is opened does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined region is formed by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. In other words, the shielded state only needs to have a relatively large shielded area with respect to the open state, in other words, the open state only needs to have a relatively large open area with respect to the shielded state.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion coupled to the main body portion, and the second member includes the first member A second body portion having the second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion coupled to the second body portion. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion coupled to the main body portion. And a second member having a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and connected to the second body portion. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region. In this case, only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion and the second main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the locus can be avoided from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member when the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes the drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is the first member. Since the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member when the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displacing the first member is small. Can be That is, among the spaces necessary outside the predetermined region of the base member, spaces other than the spaces necessary for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a second side pinion gear thereof. A gaming machine E4 comprising: a third side rack gear engaged with the third member, and a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second side pinion gear in which the shielding opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable and having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is engaged, the second member accompanies the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side along with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is moved to the other side along with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

  Therefore, by linear displacement to one side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, By linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region (displaced outside the predetermined region). ), An open state can be formed.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state in which the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member that has been retracted from the predetermined region accordingly. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area can be reduced by superimposing the three divided areas rather than superposing the two divided predetermined areas.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. It is possible to shorten the time required for disposing in a predetermined area, and more quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the third member includes the third body rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is engaged, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, A gaming machine E5 comprising a third displacement portion coupled to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, the first member, the second member, and the third member are first displaced when linearly displaced to one side or the other side. Only the trajectories of the displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part can be overlaid on the predetermined region. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion, and the third main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the locus can be avoided from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third member are retreated in the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined region can be completely opened.

  In addition, it is good also as a gaming machine which further expands the technical idea (relationship of the 3rd member with respect to the 2nd member) in the gaming machine E4 or E5, and further includes a 4th member, a 5th member,.

  That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. And a third member that is disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. The shield opening means is disposed rotatably on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An n + 1-th pinion gear and an (n + 1) -th rack gear with which the n-th pinion gear meshes, and an n + 1-th member disposed on the n-th member so as to be linearly displaceable. However, n is an integer greater than or equal to 3.)

  Similarly, the third member has a third main body portion that has a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and is connected to the third main body portion. The n + 1-th body portion is extended to include a third displacement portion, and the (n + 1) th member has an (n + 1) -side rack gear meshed with the n-th pinion gear and is supported by the n-th member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an (n + 1) th displacement portion connected to the (n + 1) th body portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shielding opening means includes a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when linearly displaced. A gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the shield opening means is configured such that the third member disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved.

  That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, By linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region (displaced outside the predetermined region). ), An open state can be formed.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state in which the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member that has been retracted from the predetermined region accordingly. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area is smaller when the three divided portions are overlapped than when the predetermined area is divided into two.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is increased by the speed of the second member. This linear displacement can be increased at least faster than the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or disposing the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be further performed. Can be done quickly.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 400, Projecting Unit 700, and Elevating Unit 800 as Examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is moved to the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position. Arranged and the second member is disposed at the extended position by being displaced in a manner including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position.

  Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member that are retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the extended position and brought into close contact or contact with each other, thereby associating and integrating them. An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize it as one character is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the first member and the second member are structured to be displaced to the overhanging position by linear displacement, so that when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the overhanging position is reached. There is a risk of mutual interference during the displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and since it is necessary to shift each displacement, it takes time until the character is formed. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is arranged in the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced in a manner including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position. Thus, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the protruding position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second member is arranged at the projecting position by being displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. Can be formed. Therefore, it can be easily suppressed that the second member interferes with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. A gaming machine F3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are provided. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is easy to suppress the second member from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the extended position, and the second member can be freely positioned at the retracted position. The degree can be increased. In other words, the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhanging position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, so that the rotation is not the movement to the overhanging position but the first member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, since the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the extended position, the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device disposed in the game area, and the retreat position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, The gaming machine F4, wherein the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position and is arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position.

  Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the production effect is sufficiently obtained. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically long, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow, and the arrangement space of the members Is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long position at the extended position, while being arranged in a vertically long position at the retracted position. Therefore, the second member can be enlarged correspondingly by effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the extended position Can be made larger.

  The gaming machine F3 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to perform linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the second member Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the second member from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed in a larger size, and the character formed with the first member at the extended position can be further increased in size. . For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for disposing the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to the area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a third member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position is provided, and the third member is connected to the first member and the second member at the extended position. A gaming machine F6 that is arranged with different positions in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes the third member formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so the first member and the second member In addition, a larger character can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is disposed at a position where the first member and the second member are different in the front-rear direction at the extended position, the third member does not contact the first member and the second member at the extended position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other in the overhang position, or when there is a possibility of contact, the third member needs to set the displacement speed in consideration of breakage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not brought into contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first member and the second member at the overhang position, and the effect of producing the character can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine F6, the third member includes a projecting portion that is formed by projecting to the side that has the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

  Here, if the front-rear direction positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made different, the size of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction is increased and the size is increased. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are reduced (thinned) in order to suppress such front-rear direction dimensions, it is difficult to ensure rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to protrude to the same side as the first member and the second member. In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the gaming machine is reduced and the longitudinal dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity while suppressing the longitudinal dimension of the gaming machine as a sum of the second member and the third member) can do.

  Any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, comprising a contacted member disposed on the first member and in contact with a part of the second member at the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is contacted at the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

  The abutted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the extended position, or the first member and When the second member is disposed at the extended position, the second member may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both of them approach the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

  In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the contacted member is separated from the first member. The gaming machine F9 is arranged at the overhang position.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the abutting member is the first abutting member. Since it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position in the state spaced apart from the member, it can be reliably contact | abutted with the 2nd member in an overhang | projection position. In addition, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the extended position.

  In the gaming machine F9, the abutting member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member after the first member is arranged at the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, the second member is displaced in the direction of approaching the first member after the first member is disposed at the extended position, A space for displacing the member can be formed. That is, when the first member is disposed at the extended position, the contacted member is separated from the first member, and the role of receiving the displacement of the second member is exhibited. The member to be abutted is displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed along with the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

  In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is at least in the retracted position. A gaming machine F11, characterized in that it is in a state of being close to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced away from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

  In the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is disposed at the extended position. .

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, it can suppress that a to-be-contacted member interferes with a 2nd member in the middle of the displacement to an overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member comes into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact Accordingly, the abutting member is formed so that the contacted member is displaced toward the second member in the other group.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member is applied to the contacted member. When contacted, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set along with the contact. For example, in one set, the second member is positioned at the reference position. When the contact member is displaced beyond and contacted with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact caused by the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the one set is not received only by the first member. The second member in the other set can also be received. Thereby, kinetic energy can be disperse | distributed, and while being able to make it easy to stop the displacement of the 2nd member in one group, breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member with the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the target in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member along with the transmission, and the displacement of the contacted member in the one set is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the abutting member in the other set is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member by displacing the first member with transmission, or a structure in which these are combined Is exemplified.

  Any of the gaming machines F1 to F13 includes a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position and is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be able to contact the first member and the second member at the extended position. Since the periodic displacement is formed, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced using the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first member and the second member. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other in the overhang position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

  In the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position in which the front-rear direction position in the extended position is ahead of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is disposed at a position where the front-rear direction position in the extended position is forward of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) disposed on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated using the member on the near side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of vibration to the player.

  In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the extended position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is reduced. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in a manner different from each other without relating the first member and the second member. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, it is vibrated in a different manner. Therefore, the part formed by the first member and the part formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400, the upper unit 700 and the lower unit 800 as an example>
A first group of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhang position, a first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and the second group In each gaming machine in which the second effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the second group when each displacement means is arranged at the overhang position, the one displacement means of the first group and the A gaming machine G1 comprising a dual-purpose unit that also serves as one displacement unit of the second group.

  Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position. A gaming machine having a second group is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

  According to this gaming machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the extended position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (the first character When the displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhanging position while the player recognizes it as an effect mode), each of the displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As the (second effect mode), an effect of causing the player to recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the first group is disposed at the extended position, so that each of the first group The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the extended position. By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is effective that a larger character can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

  However, when a plurality of characters (effects) are formed as in the conventional technique described above, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters is increased accordingly. Since the area (space) to be kept is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to enlarge each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to enlarge each character (direction mode).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the dual-purpose means is used as one displacement means of the first group and one displacement means of the second group, a plurality of (first) It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second production aspects, and to increase the size of each displacement means. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is a position where an overhang position that is arranged when the first production mode is formed differs from an overhang position that is arranged when the second production mode is formed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that

  Here, in the case where the first effect mode is formed and in the case where the second effect mode is formed, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the same overhang position, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are formed. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (common means) is used in the production mode, and the entertainment is disturbed. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first production mode and the second production mode using the dual-purpose means arranged at the same position (overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means forms the overhang position that is arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used in both the first production mode and the second production mode. Can be inhibited. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased as much as the combined means can be arranged at different positions (extension positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode Difference (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture different from a posture in forming the first presentation mode and a posture in forming the second presentation mode. Gaming machine G3.

  Here, when the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common when the dual-purpose means has the same posture. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is being used and hinders interest. In addition, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode using the same posture combined means, the degree of freedom is reduced correspondingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It is difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture when forming the first performance mode and a posture when forming the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is also used in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, and to prevent the entertainment from being hindered. . In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the dual-purpose means can be made different in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement) Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is front and rear with respect to at least one displacement means of the first group. A gaming machine G4 having different directional positions and at least a portion overlapping in front view.

  Here, the dual-purpose means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures when the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stop states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stop state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary. In this case, in the structure in which the dual-purpose means abuts on the one displacement means in the extended position (at least a part of the front-rear direction position matches), if the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means exceed the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first production mode, Since at least one of the displacement means has a different position in the front-rear direction and at least partly overlaps in front view, even if the stop state (extension position or (and) posture) varies, It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the combined means. That is, by overlapping partly in front view, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the single displacement means, and the dual-purpose position can be Even when the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of one displacement means caused by being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the dual-purpose means.

  In the gaming machine G4, the one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when arranged at the projecting position when forming the first effect mode. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  In this case, as described above, the dual-purpose unit is likely to vary in the stopped state (the extended position or (and) posture), and the dual-purpose unit is in the extended position when forming the first effect mode. In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least part of the position in the front-rear direction coincides), if the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the one displacement means Is formed, and association (integration) is inhibited. Similarly, even if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means exceed the target position, the one displacement means is pushed out to cause a positional shift, so that association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). Is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the dual-purpose means is positioned on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion where they are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, it is more than one displacement means and the other displacement means. For example, one displacement means or (and / or) another displacement means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and overlaps in a front view with respect to a portion where the one displacement means and the other displacement means are in contact with each other. When a deviation occurs in the target position and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap is shielded by the dual-purpose means so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means from being inhibited, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. And the extended position of the combined means disposed when forming the first effect aspect, and the extended position of the combined means disposed when forming the second effect aspect. Are different positions, and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the first production mode is different from the posture of the dual-purpose unit when forming the second production mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that rotational displacement and linear Since it is displaced in a mode in which displacement is combined, the degree of freedom of the overhang position and posture when forming the first production mode or the second production mode can be increased.

  In the gaming machine G7, a gaming machine G8 is characterized in that a position in the front-rear direction of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the straight base member and the writing means. The front and rear direction positions of the one displacing means and the dual-purpose means can be made closer to each other while the means is positioned on the front side and easily visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) one displacement means with the dual-purpose means.

  In the gaming machine G8, in a state where one displacement means and the combined means of the first group are disposed at the retracted position, the one displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view. A gaming machine G9.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, in the state where one displacement means and dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means and the linear base member are Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position so as to form the first effect mode, the one displacement means is a straight line. It can suppress contacting with the side of a base member.

  In the gaming machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means of the first group are disposed at the retracted position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position that does not overlap the linear base member when viewed from the front. In the middle of the displacement of the other displacing means and the combined means toward the extended position, the other displacing means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is A gaming machine G10, wherein at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view has a smaller size in the front-rear direction than the area where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, in the state where the other displacing means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacing means faces the straight base member. Arranged at a position where it does not overlap in view, and other displacement means and dual-purpose means are displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member Since at least the area where the other displacement means overlap in the front view has a smaller size in the front-rear direction than the area where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view, the other displacement means is formed to form the first effect mode. When the linear base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhang position, it can be suppressed that other displacement means abut on the side surface of the linear base member.

  The gaming machine G10 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to perform linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose unit, and the conversion mechanism includes: The gaming machine G11, wherein the one of the linear base members is disposed in a region overlapping the front view at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose means, Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual means are synchronized, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the dual means relative to the linear base member can be increased. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the shared means can be formed in a larger size, and the character formed at the extended position can be further increased in size. For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for disposing the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the common means material can be retracted to the area. The dual-purpose means can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in a region where one displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view at the retracted position, and accordingly, another region of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The dimension in the front-rear direction of the area can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the extended position, it is possible to suppress the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
An effect mode setting means capable of setting any one of the effect modes, a display means capable of displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and a plurality of stages of stage information on the display means Stage information display means for displaying the stage information, stage information variable means for changing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information by the stage information variable means Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, and switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to set a plurality of effect modes as effect modes displayed on the display device, and when a specific effect mode is set, a predetermined score is given to the player, There is one in which an effect based on the cumulative value of the assigned points is executed (for example, JP 2007-215579 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since a score is given only in a specific production mode, the accumulated value of the score obtained when shifting to another production mode is discarded, so that the player There was a problem that the willingness to get the score decreased and the game got tired early. In addition, in order to reliably execute an effect using the assigned score, it is necessary to fix the effect mode to a specific effect mode from when the score is given until the effect based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production became monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, any one of the plurality of effect modes is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is displayed on the display means. In the display means, the stage information display means displays the stage information of a plurality of stages in a variable manner by the stage information variable means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information, the specific effect executing means performs a specific effect Is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display unit is switched by the switching unit to a display mode corresponding to the production mode set by the production mode setting unit.

  Thereby, even if a different production mode is set, since the stage information can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the currently set production mode, the stage information is continuously used even if the production mode is shifted. It is possible to perform the production. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  The gaming machine H1 has stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. Stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored by the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display unit based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit.

  Thereby, even when the display mode is switched by the switching unit, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage unit. Therefore, even if different effect modes are set, the effect using the stage information can be continuously executed, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  In addition, the display mode corresponding to the production mode is, for example, identification information that can identify the assigned score, numbers, characters, symbols used in the currently set production mode, and characters appearing in the production mode. It is conceivable to use a display mode that uses. Further, it is considered that the image accompanying the identification information that can identify the assigned score is made to be a display mode using an image corresponding to a motif (for example, the sea or a mountain) used in the currently set production mode. It is done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in the display mode corresponding to the currently set production mode, even if the production mode is varied while the production of displaying the stage information is being executed, the variable production mode The step information can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine H2, the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2, since at least the predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, different rendering modes are set in a state where the predetermined stage information is displayed, Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display predetermined stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, even if the effect mode is switched while the effect in which the stage information is displayed, the effect that the player can easily understand can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information that approximates the predetermined stage information.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, at least approximate stage information that approximates predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that the approximate stage information is displayed. Even if a different presentation mode is set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display approximate stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, in the state where the approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is displayed a little more is displayed, when the effect mode is switched, the stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information is displayed, and the game There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of the person.

  Here, as the approximate stage information in the gaming machine H4, for example, when an indicator capable of displaying the stage information in seven stages is used, stage information indicating the seventh stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information, and approximated. Stage information indicating the sixth stage may be set as the stage information.

  Note that a plurality of approximation stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. Thereby, when a different production | presentation aspect is set and a display aspect switches, giving a discomfort to a player can be suppressed more.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the effect mode setting means includes a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to switch a production | presentation aspect with the displayed stage information, there exists an effect that the production effect of the production which displays stage information can be heightened.

  Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing in this way, since an effect mode changes in the state where predetermined stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect effect of the effect which displays stage information can be raised more.

  Furthermore, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing in this way, since the effect mode is switched in a state where the approximate step information is not displayed, there is an effect that the effect of the effect of displaying the step information can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H5, the stage information display means displays the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means. A gaming machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H5, when a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting unit, the predetermined level information is displayed as the level information by the level information display unit. .

  Thereby, when specific stage information is displayed, a specific production mode is set, and when the display mode is switched, predetermined stage information can be displayed. Therefore, in the effect in which the stage information is displayed, it is possible to cause the player to expect the display mode to be switched, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Here, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing in this way, since the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the effect mode in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player, There exists an effect that an effect can be heightened more.

  Furthermore, as long as it has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, the approximate stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing in this way, the predetermined stage information is switched in a state where neither the predetermined step information nor the approximate step information is displayed, that is, in the state where the expectation of jackpot is low in the effect where the step information is displayed. Is displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance and to enhance the performance effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the variable amount determining means for determining the variable amount of the step information variable by the step information variable means, and the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means based on the variable amount A gaming machine H7 having variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the effect aspect set by the effect aspect setting means.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable amount of the stage information that is varied by the stage information varying means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, variable information corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is obtained. Displayed by variable information display means.

  Thus, the player can easily grasp the variable amount by which the stage information is varied by grasping the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Furthermore, since the variable amount in which the stage information is variable is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set effect mode, the variable information is displayed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable even if the effect mode is switched. There is an effect that can be.

  The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information that specifically indicates the variable amount, information that suggests the variable amount (for example, information such as large variable amount or small variable amount), and more than one If the stage information is displayed, it may be information indicating stage information to be variable among a plurality of stage information.

  Further, the timing for displaying the variable information may be set as appropriate based on the displayed variable information. For example, if information specifically indicating the variable amount is displayed as the variable information, the step information variable means The variable information may be displayed after the step information is changed by the above. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the aspect in which the stage information is varied, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  On the other hand, when information indicating variable amount or information indicating step information to be changed is displayed as variable information, the variable information may be displayed before the step information is changed by the step information changing means. Thereby, after grasping the displayed variable information, it is possible to gaze at how the stage information is specifically changed, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine H7, variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means A display timing setting means for setting timing;

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is differentiated into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

  This makes it possible to display variable information for changing the stage information divided into a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, as a variable information differentiation method by the variable information differentiation means, when the variable information is to display a specific numerical value (for example, a score), the numerical value (score) is changed to a plurality of numerical values (small score). If the variable information is a display that suggests variable contents of the stage information (for example, a variable degree or a variable target), it should be divided so that the suggested contents are displayed step by step. That's fine. Thereby, a player can be continuously watched with respect to the production in which the stage information is varied, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when displaying variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, variable information that is advantageous to the player (high expectation that the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information) (Variable information) may be displayed later. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect while giving the player a sense of expectation to the end.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H8, the effect mode setting means includes setting restriction means for restricting setting of the predetermined effect mode according to the set effect mode. Game machine H9.

  According to the gaming machine H9, the setting restricting means restricts the setting of the predetermined effect mode according to the set effect mode, so that various effects can be executed by using a plurality of effect modes. In the configuration, it is possible to easily regulate switching of a predetermined effect mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to suppress the setting of the production mode that is difficult to convey that the stage display is continuously performed for the player. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation for the player.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H9, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the setting condition when any of a plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, and the plurality of setting conditions Priority order setting means for setting the priority order, and when a plurality of the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the effect is set based on the setting condition having the higher priority order set by the priority order setting means. A gaming machine H10 that sets an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the following effects are produced. That is, when any one of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the effect mode is set based on the setting conditions. Then, the priority order is set for the plurality of setting conditions by the priority order setting means, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the rendering is performed based on the setting condition having the higher priority order set by the priority order setting means. A mode is set.

  Thereby, since the production mode is set based on the setting condition having a high priority, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (Production display position setting)
A display means having a display area; a first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period; and while the first effect executing means is being executed, In the gaming machine provided with the second effect executing means for executing the second effect, the second effect executing means corresponds to the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed. The game machine J1 is characterized in that the second effect is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is an apparatus that executes an effect in which a point indicating a predetermined value is displayed on a display device and gives a bonus effect when the point reaches a predetermined number (for example, JP, 2012-179176, A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a dedicated area for displaying points is provided in the display device, and the mode in which the points are displayed becomes monotonous. In addition, if a point is displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying the point on the display device, the display of another effect executed on the display device and the display of the point overlap, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a problem of doing.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed for a predetermined period by the first effect executing means on the display means having a display area, and the second effect executing means is executed while the first effect executing means is being executed. A predetermined second effect is executed on the display unit by the effect executing unit in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect.

  Thereby, the position where the 2nd effect is displayed can be displayed corresponding to the 1st effect currently performed, and it can prevent that the 1st effect and the 2nd effect are displayed repeatedly. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine J1, the second effect executing means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area in the display means, and the second effect is executed when the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J2 characterized by having an area changing means for changing the allowable area based on a display mode of one effect.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in a predetermined allowable area in the display area of the display means. Then, the allowable area is varied by the area varying means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area where the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since the second effect can be executed in the area related to the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine J2 includes first effect determination means for determining a main display area in which a main image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, The area varying means varies the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed based on the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main effect display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, based on the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect determining means by the area changing means, the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed is changed.

  Thereby, it is possible to vary the allowable area for executing the second effect based on the display area in which the image that is the main subject in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to perform a 2nd effect in the area | region relevant to a 1st effect, there exists an effect that an effect can be heightened more.

  In the gaming machine J3, the area variable means sets the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect determination means as a prohibited area in which the second effect is difficult to execute, and the areas other than the main display area are the permissible areas. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being an area.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are produced. That is, the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect determination means is set as a prohibited area where the second effect is difficult to execute by the area variable means. Then, the area variable means sets the area other than the main display area as the allowable area.

  Thereby, it can be suppressed that the display area in which the main image is displayed in the first effect and the display area in which the second effect is executed are overlapped, and the effect is reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine J3, the first effect determination unit determines a specific subject display area that, among the display regions determined to be the subject display area, determines a specific subject display area in which the main image is not displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A gaming machine J5, comprising: a determining unit, wherein the region varying unit sets the display region determined as the specific subject display region by the specific subject display region determining unit as the allowable region.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, among the display areas determined as the main display area, the specific main display area in which the main image is not displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period is determined by the specific main display area determination means, and the display determined as the specific main display area The area is set as an allowable area by the area variable means.

  Thereby, as a display area for executing the second effect, a display area after the elapse of a predetermined period can be set as an allowable area. Therefore, it is possible to give a range to the timing of executing the second effect, provide an unexpected effect to the player, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second effect and second value information having a value higher than the first value information. And a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area as a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, wherein the second effect executing means includes the first The gaming machine J6 is configured to display the value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the second effect, first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowable area is set by the allowable area setting means. The first allowable area and the second allowable area different from the first allowable area are set. Then, the second effect executing means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable area and the second value information in the second allowable area.

  This makes it possible to display the value information in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed at a plurality of locations in the display area, and the effect of rendering can be enhanced. Furthermore, since it is possible to display value information indicating different values in different small areas, for example, even when displaying the same value in total, the first value information is displayed multiple times in the first allowable area. It is possible to set a plurality of display methods such as displaying or displaying the second value information only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, since the player sees the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the location where the value information is displayed and the number of times, the player can be prevented from getting bored early. There is.

  Any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7 has display image creation means for creating a display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display image creation means has a first layer on which at least the first effect is displayed. And the second layer on which the second effect is displayed are combined to create the display image, and the first composition process for superimposing the first layer on the front side of the second layer And a second compositing process for transmitting the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed in the first layer, and a gaming machine J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J7, the following effects are produced. In other words, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creating means by combining at least the first layer displaying the first effect and the second layer displaying the second effect. . Then, the first layer is superimposed on the front side of the second layer by the first compositing process, and the display area corresponding to the display area in which the second effect is executed is transmitted through the first layer by the second compositing process. Is done.

  Thereby, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed simultaneously on the display means, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine J8, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed for each of the plurality of small areas. A gaming machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display area of the second layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

  Accordingly, there is no need to change the display content of the second layer in accordance with the region where the second effect is displayed, and the display region corresponding to the display region of the first layer that has been transmitted among the second layers is displayed. Only the displayed second effect is visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed simultaneously on the display means, and the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Direction navigation changed midway)
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and discrimination result by the discrimination means In a gaming machine comprising: an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the display; and a display means for displaying an effect aspect based on the effect executed by the effect executing means. Displayed by period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of performance, progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating an elapsed period from the start of the specific period, and progress information display means. Specific production mode information display means for displaying specific production mode information indicating a specific production mode given to the player when the progress information satisfies a predetermined condition; Gaming machine K1, characterized in that it has a, a presentation mode varying means for varying the specific effect mode information based on the progress information is displayed by over-information display means.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a time gauge for displaying the progress of the production, and display the progress of the production to the player (for example, JP-A-2015-6280). In such a conventional gaming machine, a player plays a game by predicting a lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter, but even if the fluctuation ends in the middle of the meter or the end of the meter is reached, Furthermore, there is a problem that the willingness to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter decreases because the production continues.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, when the determination condition is satisfied, determination is performed by the determination unit, and when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting unit. An effect based on the result of determination by the determining means is executed by the effect executing means, and an effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the specific period information indicating the specific period of the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed by the period information display means, and the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period is displayed by the progress information display means. . Further, the specific effect mode information indicating the specific effect mode given to the player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display unit satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific effect mode information display unit. Based on the progress information displayed by the display means, the specific effect mode information is varied by the effect mode variable means.

  Thus, the specific effect mode information indicating the content of the specific effect mode given when the progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the specific period satisfies a predetermined condition may be varied based on the progress information. It becomes possible. Thereby, it can suppress that the willingness to play a game by seeing progress information can be suppressed, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific effect mode information display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. The game mode K2 is characterized in that the production mode varying means varies the pseudo specific production mode in the specific production mode information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific effect mode display means displays, as the specific effect mode information, a specific effect mode indicating the specific effect mode and a plurality of pseudo specific effect modes different from the specific effect mode. Among the information, the pseudo specific effect mode is varied by the effect mode varying means.

  Thereby, since the pseudo specific effect mode that is displayed in a pseudo manner based on the progress information is changed, it is possible to cause the player to watch the display content based on the progress information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play the game by looking at the progress information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, an expectation that can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition, the degree of expectation that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result A game machine K3, characterized in that it has a degree display means, and the effect mode variable means is capable of changing the specific effect mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies the specific display condition, the expectation degree that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result can be displayed by the expectation display means. When a specific display condition is satisfied, the specific effect mode information can be changed by the effect mode variable means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to perform two, an expectation degree display and the change of specific production | presentation aspect information, at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play the game by looking at the progress information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the game machine K4 includes a specific period extending means for extending the specific period when a predetermined production mode is given as the specific production mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the specific period is extended by the specific period extending means when a specific performance aspect is given as the specific performance aspect. It is possible to set a specific period according to the production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play the game by looking at the progress information, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine K4 has extended period information display means for displaying the extended period extended by the specific period extension means using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4, the extended period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extended period information display means using at least part of the specific period information. There is an effect that the capacity of display data for displaying the extension period can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means is used as progress information indicating the elapsed period from the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means. A game machine K6 having extended progress information display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period from the start of the extended period extended by the specific period extending means is extended using at least part of the progress information. Since it is displayed by the information display means, there is an effect that the capacity of display data for displaying the progress information of the extended period can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the game machine has an expectation display conversion means capable of converting the expectation displayed by the expectation display means. A gaming machine K7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation degree displayed by the expectation degree display means is converted by the expectation degree conversion means. Therefore, the game can be performed while expecting the specific period to be extended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines K7, the specific period information used when the extended period information display means displays the extended period includes the specific display for the expectation degree display means to display the expected degree. An establishment period in which a condition can be established is included, and when the extension progress information display means passes the establishment period, the expectation conversion means converts the expectation degree. A gaming machine K8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the extension period is displayed by the extension period information display means, specific period information including a formation period in which a specific display condition for the expectation degree display means to display the expectation degree can be established is used. When the extension progress information passes the establishment period, the expectation degree conversion unit converts the expectation degree.

  As a result, when the expectation degree is converted by the expectation degree conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation degree display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is executed. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the expected degree is converted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means moves to move on the time gauge. A gaming machine K9 that displays a body.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the following effects are produced. That is, the time information indicating the period is displayed as the specific period information by the period information display means, and the moving body moving on the progress information time gauge is displayed by the progress information display means.

  This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period using the time gauge, and allows the player to easily grasp the progress information based on the movement status of the moving object. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K9, the expectation level display means displays the expectation level when the moving body reaches the specific position on the time gauge, and the expected condition is displayed. The extended period information display means Is to display the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge. A gaming machine K10 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine K10, the satisfaction condition is established when the moving body reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation degree is displayed by the expectation degree display means. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Further, the extension progress information is displayed by moving the moving body to a predetermined position of the time gauge by the extension progress information display means.

  Thereby, the display of the extension period can be executed using the time gauge and the moving body. Therefore, the extended period can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Furthermore, since display data for displaying a specific period can be used as display data for displaying the extended period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K9 or K10, the time gauge has a plurality of paths through which the moving body can move.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K9 or K10, the moving body has a plurality of paths that can be moved, so that the player can predict which path the moving body will move. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through a branch position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of paths. Game machine K12.

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K11, the extended body information display means moves the mobile body to a position where the mobile body can pass through the branch position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of paths. When the specific period is extended, it is possible to cause the player to predict which route the moving body will travel again. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (various effects of continuous slot effects)
An operation means operable by the player, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on an operation on the operation means, a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, The effect execution means executes a specific effect that can execute at least an operation effect in which an operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set a plurality of times within a specific period. There is provided an effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of another operation effect based on information related to an operation for at least one operation effect among the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. A gaming machine L1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided, and an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed by operating the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2012-223651 gazette).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, a valid period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the valid period, and the game is monotonous. As a result, there was a problem of getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, an effect based on the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player is executed by the effect executing means, and an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed on the display means. Is displayed. Further, the effect execution means executes a specific effect capable of executing an operation effect in which at least an operation effective period in which an operation to the operation means is determined to be effective is set a plurality of times within the specified period. Based on the information regarding the operation with respect to at least one operation effect among the plurality of operation effects executed during the effect, the effect mode of the other operation effects is varied by the effect mode varying means.

  Thereby, in the specific effect in which a plurality of operation effects are executed, the effect mode of the other operation effects can be varied based on the operation content of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In the gaming machine L1, the effect mode varying means is configured to vary the operation effective period of the other operation effects.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1, the operation effective period of other operation effects can be changed by the effect mode changing means, so that various effects can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the effect mode varying means is configured to vary the number of times of the other operation effects.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation effects can be varied by the effect mode varying means, so that it is possible to provide various effects to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation effect is to execute a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period. A gaming machine L4 characterized by having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by a plurality of the operation effects in a specific effect become a predetermined combination.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, a symbol effect that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation effective period is executed as an operation effect, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation effects in a specific effect are predetermined. In the case of a combination, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means.

  As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the symbols that are stopped and displayed for each of the plurality of operation effects executed during the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early in the period in which the specific effect is being executed.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the game machine includes operation timing determination means for determining a timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set as the operation effect, A gaming machine L5, wherein the effect mode of the other operation effect is varied based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation timing determination unit determines the timing at which the operation unit is operated during the operation effective period set in the operation effect. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation effect, the effect mode of the other operation effects is varied by the effect mode variable means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the effect mode of another operation effect according to the operation timing of the operation means in one operation effect. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In the gaming machine L5, when the operation mode determining unit determines that the operation unit has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started by the operation timing determining unit. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the number of other operation effects is increased.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the operation timing determination means that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started, the effect mode variable means determines the number of other operation effects. Will be increased.

  Accordingly, it is possible to increase the number of operation effects by operating the operation means at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to eagerly operate the operation means, and there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the effect executing means can execute the other operation effects a plurality of times, and the operation timing determining means has started the operation effective period of the one operation effect. When it is determined that the operation unit has been operated beyond a predetermined period, a first operation effect is executed as the other operation effect, and the operation timing of the first operation effect is determined by the operation timing determination unit. If it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the period is started, it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the predetermined period after the operation effective period of the one operation effect is started. The gaming machine L7 is characterized by executing the same number of operation effects as the case.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5 or L6, the following effects are produced. That is, when other operation effects are executed a plurality of times by the effect execution means, and it is determined by the operation timing determination means that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period after the operation effective period of one operation effect is started. In addition, the first operation effect is executed as another operation effect by the effect executing means. If it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation effective period of the first operation effect is started, the operation effective period of one operation effect is started within the predetermined period. The operation effects are executed as many times as when the operation means is determined to have been operated.

  As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation effect, one operation can be performed by operating the operation means within the predetermined period during the first operation effect to be executed next. It is possible to execute the operation effect as many times as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period. Therefore, an opportunity to increase the number of operation effects can be provided to a player who has not noticed that the operation effects have been executed or who has been too focused on the operation effects and has not been able to operate the operation means at an early stage. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the effect executing means performs a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of the one operation effect. A gaming machine L8 that is to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect execution means executes a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set.

  As a result, the player's willingness to play is reduced by repeatedly executing the operation effect for a player who has not operated the operation means during the operation valid period, that is, a player who does not like the operation effect. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L4 to L8, the gaming machine L9 is characterized in that the privilege is more easily given by the privilege giving means as the number of the operation effects executed by the effect executing means is larger.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L4 to L8, the more the number of operation effects executed by the effect execution means, the more easily the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. The operation means can be operated and the player's willingness to play can be prevented from being reduced.

<Characteristic M group> (Changes the aspect of the slot effect based on the remaining period of the operation effective period)
Operation means operable by the player, operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which an operation on the operation means is effectively determined, and effect execution means for executing an effect in which the operation effective period is set And a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. When the operation valid period is set, a dynamic display effect is executed in which predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed from the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically by operating the operation means. When the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect is a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode to change the dynamic table. Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it is intended to.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operating means, an effect of aligning predetermined symbols is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-2012). No. 233651).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, a valid period for validating the operation of the operating means is set, and only a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within the valid period, and the game is monotonous. As a result, there was a problem of getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, an operation effective period in which an operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player is effectively determined is set by the operation effective period setting means, and an effect in which the operation effective period is set is produced. An effect mode based on the effect is displayed on the display means. Then, the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode by the effect execution means, and the plurality of identifications dynamically displayed by operating the operation means when the operation effective period is set. When a dynamic display effect for stopping and displaying predetermined identification information from information is executed, and the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect is a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation effective period is variable. It is displayed dynamically.

  As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed is changed depending on the remaining period of the operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means is valid, so that the player can operate the operation means at various timings. It becomes. Therefore, since various effects can be provided to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  In the gaming machine M1, the effect execution means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined in advance for a predetermined period, and the remaining operation effective period in the dynamic display effect is displayed. A remaining period determining means for determining a period, and when the remaining period determining means determines that the predetermined remaining period is present, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A game machine M2 having dynamic display mode changing means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode determined in advance by the effect execution means, and the remaining period of the operation effective period in the dynamic display effect is determined by the remaining period determination means. The Then, when it is determined that the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing unit.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation effective period becomes a predetermined remaining period, it is not necessary to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the operation effective period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the game machine M1 or M2 includes a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode includes the plurality of dynamic display modes. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the specific identification information of the identification information is in a dynamic display mode that makes identification easier than other identification information.

  According to the gaming machine M3, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific identification among the plurality of pieces of identification information is performed as the variable dynamic display mode. It becomes a dynamic display mode in which information is easier to identify than other identification information.

  Thereby, since the specific identification information in which the specific effect is executed when the stop display is performed becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than the other identification information, the player is motivated to operate the operation means. It becomes possible to raise. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effect executing means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times, and the specific effect executing means is executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in a plurality of dynamic display effects satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific effect is executed. The gaming machine M4 is a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in a display effect.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the effect execution means, a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed at the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. And it becomes a dynamic display mode in which the variable symbols satisfying the predetermined condition are dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in one dynamic display effect as the variable dynamic display mode.

  As a result, even if the remaining period of the operation effective period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute a plurality of dynamic display effects, a variable symbol satisfying a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed with one dynamic display effect. The Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate the operating means during the continuous dynamic display effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the operation valid period setting unit sets the operation valid period a plurality of times during a period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed, and the remaining period determination unit includes: The gaming machine M5 is characterized by determining whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of times of the operation effective period.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation effective period is set a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is executed by the operation effective period setting means. Then, the predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means based on the remaining number of operation effective periods.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the remaining number of the operation effective period, the player is eager to operate the operation means during the remaining operation effective period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the array information storage means for storing the array information in which the plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array, and the array information stored in the array information storage means is used. Start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, wherein the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is controlled by the operation effective period setting means. A first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means within the set operation valid period And a game machine M6 characterized by being settable.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, array information in which a plurality of identification information is set in a predetermined array is stored in the array information storage means, and the start position of dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means is the start position setting means Is set by Predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information. Within the operation effective period set by the operation effective period setting means, a first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is easily displayed on the display means, and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means Is set by the start position setting means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to execute dynamic display in which predetermined identification information is easily displayed on the display unit and dynamic display in which it is difficult to display using the same arrangement information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of display data for executing dynamic display.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the effect executing means includes dynamic display speed changing means for changing the speed of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6, the dynamic display speed is varied by the dynamic display speed varying means, so the number of times that the predetermined identification information is displayed within the operation effective period. Can be varied. Therefore, various effects can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

<Characteristic N group> (The next button effect is determined based on the contents of the button operation)
An operation means operable by a player, a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated, a determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and An operation effect execution unit capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination unit, and a determination result determined by the determination unit during a period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect execution unit. And when the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution unit within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, An execution control means for switching the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and executing the second operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination unit. N1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, an operation of actually pressing the operation button and an operation in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period. (For example, JP, 2014-180364, A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, in an operation effect that requires the operation button to be operated a plurality of times (for example, a continuous hit effect), the operation button is actually pressed a plurality of times, or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or more. It was said that the operation effect can be enjoyed by automatically executing the repeated operation, but when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times continuously, during the operation effect executed first There is a case where the operation to the executed frame button is executed in an operation effect executed later, and the effect of the effect of the operation effect executed later is lowered.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, as the operation effects for operating the operation buttons, for the players such as the operation effects described above (continuous hitting effects) and the operation effects for operating the operation buttons at a predetermined timing (for example, timing push effects) Some of them have operation effects that allow them to perform different operations. In this case, when the timing push effect is executed after the continuous hit effect is executed, the timing push effect is started while the operation (continuous hit operation) executed during the continuous hit effect is continuously executed. There is a problem that the operation button is operated without aiming at a predetermined timing during the timing pushing effect, and the effect of the timing pushing effect is lowered.

  In addition, in conventional gaming machines, an effect is generally executed based on a variation period of a special symbol, so that a plurality of operation effects are executed within a limited period of a special symbol variation period. Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed. Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, it cannot be solved by an easy method of increasing the interval at which a plurality of operation effects are executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, when an operation means that can be operated by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is output by the signal output means and is determined by the determination means. A predetermined operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation effect mode is being executed by the operation effect executing means, the determination result determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. When the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution unit within a period in which the predetermined condition after the first operation effect mode is executed, the execution control unit sets the determination result by the determination unit. Based on this, the second operation effect mode is switched to the specific operation effect mode and executed.

  Accordingly, when the second operation effect mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, while the first operation effect mode is being executed. Based on the content of the operation performed on the operation means performed by the player, the second operation effect mode can be switched to a specific operation effect mode and executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine N1, the determination means is different from at least the first determination result and the first determination result in the determination result determined by the determination means during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. The execution control means determines the first determination result as the specific operation effect mode when the determination means determines that the execution result is the first determination result. A gaming machine N2 that is configured to execute a corresponding operation effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are achieved. That is, during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined by the determination unit to be the first determination result and the second determination result different from the first determination result. . And when it determines with it being a 1st determination result by a determination means, the operation control aspect based on a 1st determination result is performed as a specific operation effect aspect by an execution control means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect mode corresponding to the determination result determined in the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed as the second operation effect mode. Therefore, when the operation effect mode is continuously executed, the effect is not reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of rendering the operation effect mode.

  In the gaming machine N2, the determination unit determines that the operation of the operation unit has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control unit includes the specific operation effect mode as the specific operation effect mode. A gaming machine N3 that is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been performed a plurality of times as the first determination result, and the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as the specific operation effect mode. It is done.

  Thereby, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times in the first operation effect aspect, an operation effect aspect that causes the operation means to be operated a plurality of times is executed as the second operation effect aspect. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. .

  In the gaming machine N3, during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, an operation number measuring unit that measures the number of times the operation unit is operated, and the number of times measured by the operation number measuring unit are determined. A determination unit for determining the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the determination unit. A gaming machine N4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, the following effects are produced. That is, during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the number of times the operation unit is operated is measured by the operation number measurement unit, and the number of times measured by the operation number measurement unit is determined by the number determination unit. . Then, based on the determination result of the number determination means, the determination means determines a first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result.

  Thereby, it is possible to switch the operation effect mode of the second operation effect mode based on the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed.

  In the gaming machine N4, the determination means determines that the determination result is the first determination result when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is greater than a predetermined number of times. .

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination unit is greater than the predetermined number, the determination unit determines that the result is the first determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation effect mode. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, there is an effect that the state in which the player is eagerly operating the operation means can be continued.

  In the gaming machine N4, the determination means determines that the determination result is the third determination result when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination means is less than a predetermined number of times. .

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N4, when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination unit is less than the predetermined number, the determination unit determines the third determination result. Thereby, when the operation means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period when the first operation effect mode is being executed, the operation effect mode corresponding to the first determination result is the second operation effect mode. It can be prevented from being executed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means has the specific operation effect mode. As described above, the gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the operation means is switched to an operation effect mode in which the operation means is continuously operated.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined as a first determination result that the operation of the operation unit is continuously executed by the determination unit for a predetermined period. Then, the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated continuously as the specific operation effect mode.

  Thereby, when the player operates the operation means continuously for a predetermined period in the first operation effect mode, an operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated continuously is executed as the second operation effect mode. . Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the effect of the second operation effect mode does not decrease, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. .

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the execution control means has notification means for notifying that the specific operation effect aspect is executed, and the notification means executes the second operation effect aspect. The gaming machine N8 is characterized by notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the time it is completed.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification means notifies that the specific operation effect mode is executed by the execution control unit before the second operation effect mode is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where a specific operation effect aspect is performed as a 2nd operation effect aspect, it becomes possible to perform a game, without a player being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the gaming machine N8, the determination unit performs the determination while the first operation effect mode is being executed, and the notification unit performs the determination after the determination by the determination unit is performed. The gaming machine N9 is characterized by notifying that the specific operation effect mode is executed before the end of one operation effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, the following effects are produced. That is, while the first operation effect mode is being executed, the determination by the determination means is executed, and the specific operation effect mode is not changed until the first operation effect mode ends after the determination is executed. The execution is notified by the notification means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that it can alert | report reliably that a specific operation effect aspect is performed by the time the 2nd operation effect aspect is started.

  In the gaming machine N8 or N9, an aspect display means for displaying the operation effect aspect executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation effect aspect, The game machine N10 is characterized in that the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode by the operation content display means.

  According to the gaming machine N10, the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution unit is displayed by the mode display unit, and the operation content of the operation unit corresponding to the operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display unit. And the operation content of the operation means corresponding to a specific operation effect mode is displayed by the operation content display means.

  Thereby, since the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation effect mode is displayed, it becomes possible to execute the game without being confused by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation effect execution means can execute a continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed. A gaming machine N11 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine N11, the continuous operation effect mode in which the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode are continuously executed is executed by the operation effect executing means. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect in which the player can operate the operation means in a short period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine N11 has an effect result display means for displaying the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means, and the effect result display means includes the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode. The gaming machine N12 is characterized in that the effect result is displayed based on the operation effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine N12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N11, the following effects are produced. That is, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect executing means is displayed by the effect result display means. Then, the effect result is displayed based on the first operation effect mode and the second operation effect mode.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to make it the effect which linked | related the 1st operation effect aspect and the 2nd operation effect aspect, and there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (Changes the interval between repeated automatic hits)
An operation means operable by the player, a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and the signal When the determination result by the determination means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means for setting a first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed, and the signal determination in a state where the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect for each first period, and the first effect mode being executed And a variable period setting means for variably setting an execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means to a second period different from the first period based on establishment of a predetermined variable condition. , Have Gaming machine P1, which is a shall.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation effect using an operation button, there is one in which a continuous hitting operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364). Issue gazette).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, in an effect that requires the operation button to be operated a plurality of times (for example, a continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by pressing the operation button continuously. However, in the operation effects other than the continuous hit effect (for example, the timing push effect), the operation effect other than the continuous hit effect is impaired by executing the automatic continuous hit operation, and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a problem that.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the output signal is determined by the signal determination means. Then, when the determination result by the signal determination unit satisfies the first condition, the first effect mode is set by the first setting unit, and the first effect mode is set. When the determination result by the signal determination unit satisfies a second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit for each first period. Further, when the first effect mode is being executed, the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is set to be the first period by the period variable setting means based on the establishment of the predetermined variable condition. Are variably set in different second periods.

  This makes it possible to vary the intervals between specific effects executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, various effects using the operating means can be executed in a state where the specific effect executing means is being executed, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine P1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that a predetermined variable condition is established based on a result of discrimination by the discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is executed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the determination result is a predetermined determination result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving unit. A predetermined variable condition is established based on the determination result of the determination means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the determination result of the determination means by the execution period in the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, a specific effect executed based on the player's operation is watched, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the gaming machine P3 has a notifying means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determining means.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notification means notifies that the second condition is satisfied by the signal determination means, so that the player operates the operation means, When the conditions are satisfied, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period in a specific performance is changed.

  In the gaming machine P3, the notification means guides an execution period set by the period variable setting means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine P3, the notifying means guides the execution period set by the period variable setting means, so the player is notified of the timing at which a specific effect is executed next. It is possible to guide. Therefore, even if the execution period in a specific effect is changed, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period for effectively determining the operation of the operation means, and a remaining period for determining the remaining period of the effective period set by the effective period setting means Determining means, wherein the signal determining means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated continuously for a predetermined first determination period, and the remaining period When the remaining period is determined to be a predetermined period by the determining unit, the determining unit includes a determining period variable unit that changes the first determining period to a second determining period shorter than the first determining period. A gaming machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the effective period for effectively determining the operation of the operating means is set by the effective period setting means, and the remaining period of the effective period is determined by the remaining period determining means. When the operation unit is operated continuously for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination unit determines that the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining period is determined to be the predetermined period by the remaining period determination unit The first determination period is changed to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period by the determination period varying means.

  Thereby, when the remaining period of the effective period in which the operation of the operation means is effectively determined becomes a predetermined period, it is possible to easily execute the specific effect changed in the second period, There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determining unit is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determining period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, the remaining period discriminating means discriminates the period whose remaining period is shorter than the first discriminating period as the predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the production until the end of the effective period.

<Characteristic Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
An operating means operable by the player; a determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated; and an effective period setting means for setting an effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means; A notification means for notifying an operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operation means, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means, When the effective period setting means sets at least the first effective period and the second effective period under a predetermined condition, it is specified over the first effective period and the second effective period. And a notification control means for notifying the operation notification mode of the information by the notification means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines can execute a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of operation effects are executed, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to operate the operation buttons and increase the game motivation. However, the operation effects are frequently set. If this happens, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button, resulting in a problem that the game motivation is reduced.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, a valid period in which operation of the operation button can be accepted is set, and if it is within the valid period, an effect based on the operation of the operation button is executed, and other than the valid period, that is, the invalid period. For example, when the player operates the operation button a plurality of times, a part of the operation is performed during the invalid period because the operation based on the operation of the operation button is not executed. Even though the operation button is operated, there is a problem that the presentation is not executed and the game motivation is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, it is determined by the determining means that the operating means operable by the player has been operated, and the effective period in which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means is set as the effective period An operation notification mode that is set by the means and causes the player to operate the operation means is notified by the notification means. Furthermore, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect executing means based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determining means.

  Then, when at least the first effective period and the second effective period are set under predetermined conditions by the effective period setting unit, the notification control unit straddles the first effective period and the second effective period. Thus, a specific operation notification mode is notified to the notification means.

  As a result, when the first effective period and the second effective period are set under predetermined conditions, the specific operation notification mode is notified across the first effective period and the second effective period. It is possible to notify that the effective period is continuous. Therefore, it can suppress that a player stops operation of an operation means between a 1st effective period and a 2nd effective period. Therefore, by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's gaming motivation from being reduced.

  In this case, as a predetermined condition for setting the first effective period and the second effective period, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such conditions, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  In addition, as a method for determining whether or not the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition, a method for determining an actual period may be used, or a plurality of operation effects may be determined in advance. A method for determining that the combination is set may be used.

  Further, as an operation effect in the gaming machine Q1, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the gaming machine, a driving mode of a driving object provided in the gaming machine, or an output from a sound output device provided in the gaming machine And a light emission mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine. In this way, any player can be used as long as the player who operates the operation means can recognize the effect executed based on the determination of the operation on the operation means.

  In addition, any operation means in the gaming machine Q1 may be used as long as it can be operated by the player. For example, a button device that can be pressed by the player or a reaction by detecting that the player has touched or approached the player. Such a sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, a lever device that can be operated by the player in the front / rear and left / right directions, and the like can be considered.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q2 further includes notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, so the first effective period It is possible to set a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the second effective period based on an operation effect executed during the first effective period or the second effective period.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the specific operation alerting | reporting aspect notified ranging over the 1st effective period and the 2nd effective period can be notified to a player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets an extended effect mode based on the first operation effect that is executed when the first valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Q2, the first operation effect executed when the first valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the extended production mode is set, it is possible to make it appear that the first effective period continues until the second effective period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by frequently repeating the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating.

  In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a prior effect mode based on the second operation effect executed when the second valid period is set. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the second operation executed when the second valid period is set as the specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the pre-production aspect based on the production is set, it is possible to make it appear that the second effective period is set continuously with the first effective period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can further suppress a decrease in game motivation due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is simulated during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by having a pseudo effect execution means for executing.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are produced. In other words, during the invalid period set between the first effective period and the second effective period, the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means is executed in a pseudo manner by the pseudo effect executing means.

  As a result, the operation effect is displayed in a pseudo manner, so that the player can make it appear that the first effective period and the second effective period are set continuously. There is an effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to frequent repetition of the act of operating and the act of not operating.

  In addition, as the pseudo operation effect in the gaming machine Q5, it is preferable to execute an effect whose effect mode is variable. As a result, the operating means is operated for the player who is continuously operating the operating means during the period between the first effective period and the second effective period in which the invalid period is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it seem that the production mode is variable, and the game motivation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q3, it becomes possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed in the first effective period is extended, and to the player There is an effect that it is possible to provide a more understandable presentation.

  Moreover, according to the structure provided with the gaming machine Q4, the pseudo operation effect is executed so that the operation effect executed in the second effective period is executed continuously with the first effective period. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control unit changes the specific operation notification mode based on a determination that a predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination unit during the first effective period. A gaming machine Q6 that is informed by the informing means.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the determination that the predetermined operation condition is satisfied by the determination unit during the first effective period, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode.

  Thus, even when the first effective period and the second effective period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first effective period, a specific operation notification is made. The mode is not notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a specific operation notification mode from being notified in vain to a player who does not like an operation effect, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Even if the first effective period and the second effective period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first effective period, the above-described problem, that is, In addition, since the problem itself that the gaming motivation is reduced due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the player does not occur, the player's willingness to play the game is not required even if a specific operation notification mode is not notified. There is no decline. On the contrary, it is possible to reduce the processing for notifying a specific operation notification mode and to provide the player with an effect executed in a normal state.

  As a predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it may be set as an operation condition that the operation means is operated a plurality of times during the first effective period. Thereby, it can suppress that the game motivation of the player who operates the operation means eagerly falls. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first effective period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that the predetermined remaining period (for example, within the remaining 5 seconds) is reached. Is set as an operating condition, or a means for determining a period until the second effective period is started is provided, and the means determines that the predetermined remaining period (for example, within the remaining 10 seconds) is reached. It may be set as an operating condition that the operating means has been operated. Even if comprised in this way, there exists an effect that the fall of the game willingness by repeating the action which operates an operation means and the action which does not operate frequently can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine Q6, the determination unit includes an operation count measurement unit capable of measuring the number of times the operation unit is operated, and a predetermined number of operations are measured by the operation count measurement unit during the first effective period. The gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied when the game is played.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are produced. In other words, the number of times the operation unit is operated is measured by the operation number measurement unit included in the determination unit. The operation condition is satisfied when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first effective period.

  Thus, a specific operation notification mode is notified when a predetermined number of operations are executed during the first effective period. Therefore, for example, when an operation effect that repeatedly hits the operation means is executed during the first effective period, a specific operation notification mode is notified to a player who is eagerly operating the operation means. It becomes possible to. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation of the operation means is frequently stopped for a player who is eagerly operating the operation means, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's game motivation. There is an effect that can be done.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration provided with the gaming machine Q5, by causing the player to execute the pseudo operation effect by executing the operation effect whose effect mode is frequently changed as the operation effect to be executed in a pseudo manner. On the other hand, there is an effect that an uncomfortable feeling can be suppressed. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times that the pseudo effect execution unit changes the effect mode can be executed, and the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation unit is operated by the operation frequency measurement unit. .

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on an end timing of the first effective period. Machine Q8.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Until the first valid period ends, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the second valid period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect due to the player grasping the operation effect to be executed later.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first effective period and the second effective period are set under the predetermined condition by the effective period setting means, A gaming machine Q9, comprising a validity period changing means for changing the validity period so that the second validity period is continuous.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are produced. That is, when at least the first effective period and the second effective period are set under a predetermined condition by the effective period setting means, the effective period is such that the first effective period and the second effective period are continuous. The validity period is changed by the changing means.

  Thereby, when a plurality of effective periods are set, the plurality of effective periods can be made into continuous effective periods. In other words, since it is possible to eliminate the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the fact that the production does not vary despite operating the operation means. There is an effect that can be done.

  Here, the continuous effective period in the gaming machine Q9 means that a period during which the effect is not variable despite the player operating the operating means is set between the first effective period and the second effective period. The effective period may be changed so that the first effective period and the second effective period are actually connected, or the first effective period and the second effective period During this period, a period shorter than a period necessary for determining that the operating means has been operated may be available.

  In the gaming machine Q9, the valid period changing means additionally sets a period between the first valid period and the second valid period to the valid period.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9, the validity period is additionally set by the validity period changing means in the period between the first validity period and the second validity period. Thereby, since a plurality of effective periods can be continued without changing the first effective period and the second effective period, the control load of the effective period changing means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the valid period changing means delays the start of the first valid period, the gaming machine Q11.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first valid period is delayed by the valid period changing means. Thereby, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and the control load of the effective period changing means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the valid period changing means accelerates the start of the second valid period.

  According to the gaming machine Q12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second effective period is advanced by the effective period changing means. Thereby, since the first effective period and the second effective period can be made continuous, there is no need to set a new effective period, and the control load of the effective period changing means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means includes an effective period display means for displaying the operation notification mode on the display means, and based on the change of the effective period by the effective period change means. A gaming machine Q13, further comprising an effective period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the effective period display means.

  According to the gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display unit by the effective period display unit, and the operation notification mode is changed by the effective period display change unit based on the change of the effective period by the effective period change unit.

  Thereby, since it is possible to display to the player that the effective period has been changed by the effective period changing means, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy to understand for the player.

  In the gaming machine Q13, the validity period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the elapse of the first validity period.

  According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the effective period display changing unit based on the fact that the first effective period has elapsed. Thereby, in a state where the first effective period has not elapsed, the player grasps the contents of the operation effect to be executed later (the operation effect for which the second effective period is set), and the effect of the effect is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a discriminating unit that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination unit is a specific discrimination result And a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on a result of determination by the determination means, and the period effect execution means executes a composite effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set. The gaming machine Q15 is characterized in that the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine Q15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination result executed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is granted by the privilege grant unit. Then, based on the result of determination by the determining means, the combined effect in which a plurality of effective periods are set as the period effects for the predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means.

  Thereby, since the composite effect based on the determination result by the determination means can be executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a discriminating unit that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege grant that grants a privilege to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination unit is a specific discrimination result And a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on a result of determination by the determination means, and the notification control means is executed first among the continuous period effects. When the first effective period set in the first period effect and the second effective period set in the second period effect to be executed later are set under predetermined conditions The game machine Q16 is characterized by causing the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination result executed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the privilege is granted by the privilege grant unit. Further, the period effect for the predetermined period is executed by the period effect executing means based on the result of the determination by the determining means. And among the continuous period effects, the first effective period set in the first period effect executed first and the second effective period set in the second period effect executed later Are set under a predetermined condition, the notification control unit causes the notification unit to notify the specific operation notification mode.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the 1st effective period and the 2nd effective period are set ranging over a plurality of period productions, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the situation.

  In the gaming machine Q16, a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination information based on the determination condition being satisfied, and a prior determination means for determining in advance the determination information stored in the determination condition storage means, And the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on a determination result of the prior determination means for the second period effect. Q17.

  According to the gaming machine Q17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q16, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of pieces of discrimination information based on the fact that the discrimination condition is satisfied is stored by the discrimination condition storage unit, and the plurality of pieces of discrimination information stored are determined by the prior determination unit. And based on the determination result of the prior determination means with respect to the second period effect, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

  Thereby, when the 1st effective period and the 2nd effective period are set ranging over the 1st period production and the 2nd period production, prior judgment corresponding to the 2nd period production performed later A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z1 according to any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2, wherein in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z3 according to any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Operation buttons (operation means)
113 sound lamp control device (signal output means, operation effect execution means)
S1707 Determination means S1732 Execution control means S4410 Determination means S4451 Operation frequency measurement means S4452 Operation frequency determination means

Claims (5)

An operation means operable by the player
A signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation when the operation means is operated;
Discriminating means for discriminating a signal output by the signal output means;
An operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect mode based on a determination result by the determination means;
A determination unit that determines a determination result determined by the determination unit during a period in which the operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution unit;
In a case where the second operation effect mode is executed by the operation effect execution unit within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation effect mode is executed, based on a determination result by the determination unit. And an execution control means for switching the second operation effect mode to a specific operation effect mode and executing the game. The determination means includes at least a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result as a determination result determined by the determination means during a period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed. To determine
The execution control means causes the operation effect aspect corresponding to the first determination result to be executed as the specific operation effect aspect when the determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The determination means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the first determination result,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the execution control means switches to the operation effect mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times as the specific operation effect mode. An operation frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated during the period in which the first operation effect mode is being executed;
And a number determination means for determining the number of times measured by the operation number measurement means,
The determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result based on the determination result of the number determination means. The gaming machine described.   5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the determination unit determines that the determination result is the first determination result when it is determined that the determination result of the number determination unit is greater than a predetermined number.

Images